JP2023101649A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of performing display control preferably.SOLUTION: A VDP 76 creates drawing data on a frame buffer 82 based on a drawing instruction from a display CPU 72. Then, a signal corresponding to the drawing data is output to a pattern display device 41, thereby an image corresponding to the drawing data is displayed on the pattern display device 41. At the time, in a loop display performance, a table for display control of a loop display character, and a table for display control of a loop display background are individually prepared. At a timing when a game round is finished, update of pointer information is stopped on the table for background for display control of the loop display background, and on the other hand, pointer information of the table for character retention for performing a retention time display to the loop display character is updated for performing display control of the loop display character.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 5

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read out from the memory (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2009-261415 A

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing display control.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 provides display means having a display unit,
display control means for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means includes simultaneous display control means for simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display unit,
The gaming machine comprises information storage means for pre-storing first mode determination information in which first mode information for determining the display mode of the first type image is set in chronological order, and second mode determination information in which second mode information for determining the display mode of the second type image is set in chronological order,
When simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display unit, the simultaneous display control means determines the display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, and determines the display mode of the second type image according to the second mode determination information.

According to the present invention, display control can be preferably performed.

1 is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (a) to (j) are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device; FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for a jackpot occurrence lottery or the like. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU of the main control device; It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU of a main control unit. 10 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sound and light MPU; 10 is a flowchart showing table setting processing executed by the sound and light side MPU; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an example of an advance notice lottery table, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a reach lottery table, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a sound and light side RAM. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a control pattern table; FIG. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining how a pattern is oscillatingly displayed on the pattern display device, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining how a pattern is confirmed and displayed on the pattern display device. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various parts tables. (a1) to (a3), (b1) to (b3) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the variable display time determined by the parts table. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. (a) to (e2) are time charts showing how an effect for a game cycle is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing performed by display CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by a display CPU; 4A to 4C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a drawing list; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed in VDP; (a) to (f) are time charts showing an example of a variable display mode of symbols. 4A and 4B are explanatory diagrams for explaining display contents on the display surface of the pattern display device; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a work RAM; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for an acceleration period, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for a first high speed period. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for the first low speed period; (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the values set in the first adjustment counter and the third adjustment counter and the type of symbol, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the value set in the second adjustment counter and the type of symbol. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for an acceleration period, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for a first high speed period. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an execution target table for the first low speed period; 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed by a display CPU; 4 is a flow chart showing normal fluctuation calculation processing executed by a display CPU. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of loop display production|presentation. (a) to (d) are time charts showing the flow of loop display effects. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a work RAM; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining a character staying table, (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a character moving table, and (c) an explanatory diagram for explaining a background table. 4 is a flowchart showing arithmetic processing for a character loop executed by a display CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for background loops performed by display CPU. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of group display production|presentation. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining moving image data for group display; (a1) to (a3) are time charts showing the relationship between the image update cycle and the cycle in which still image data can be used, and (b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the same decoded image data is drawn in a different drawing range in a drawing target frame region. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for group display effect executed by the display CPU; FIG. 4(a) is a flowchart showing decoding processing executed by a video decoder, and (b) is a flowchart showing group display setting processing executed by VDP. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the effective period display effect|presentation. (a), (b) is a time chart showing a comparative example of effective period display effect. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a band display table; (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a blinking display table; (a1), (b1), (a2), and (b2) are time charts showing how the effective period display effect is executed using both the band display table and the flashing display table. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for an effective period display performed by display CPU. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the number display effect. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing number display effect. It is a front view of the said inner frame which expands and shows the lower side area|region of an inner frame. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing counting processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing output setting processing of a measurement command executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing a measurement command response process executed by a display CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for a measurement display performed by display CPU. (a) to (c) are time charts showing how the number display effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for an increase display performed by display CPU. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module; FIG. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first character image, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an effect image, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a second character image. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the range to be drawn in the frame area to be drawn is changed in each image data; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a pseudo moving image table; FIG. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how a pseudo moving image effect is executed. 4 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for pseudo moving image effect executed by a display CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for round production|presentation performed by display CPU. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining another example of the pseudo moving image effect. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interrupt processing performed by display CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing task processing executed by a display CPU; 4A to 4C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of a drawing list; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed in VDP; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how drawing data is created along with the execution of drawing processing; (a) to (c) are time charts showing how time-based effects are executed. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device during the normal period, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device during the preparation period, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device during the special period. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device when it is time to start the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the game cycle is being executed; (a) to (h) are time charts showing how time-based effects are executed in relation to the execution status of effects for game rounds. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the sound and light side ROM, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a data table for time-based effects. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing RTC-compatible processing executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing for starting a preparatory period, which is executed by the MPU on the sound and light side; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing command response processing executed by a display CPU; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing during the preparation period executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting processing during a special period executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing table setting processing executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining another example of display contents of the symbol display device during the preparation period; FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of setting processing for starting the preparation period executed by the sound and light side MPU; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing another example of command response processing executed by the display CPU; FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing another example of setting processing during the preparation period executed by the sound and light MPU; FIG. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of another preservation|save effect. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a comparative example of another save effect. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how different save effects are performed. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the specific contents of another save effect. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for another preservation|save effects performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during the operation effective period performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during operation corresponding production|presentation performed by display CPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing setting processing for separate storage display executed in VDP; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing drawing data creation processing for separately saved display executed in VDP; FIG. (a), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific display content of angle display production|presentation. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a memory module; FIG. (a) to (i) are explanatory diagrams for explaining various moving image data groups. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how the angle display effect progresses. 4 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for angle display effects executed by a display CPU; It is a flowchart which shows the process for openings performed by display CPU. 4 is a flowchart showing decoding processing executed in VDP; (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining a moving image correspondence table corresponding to the A angle, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining a switching reference table. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing setting processing for angle display effect executed in VDP; FIG. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of normal moving image data, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of special moving image data. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how a special moving image use effect is executed. It is a flowchart which shows the arithmetic processing for special moving image use effects performed by display CPU. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing setting processing for a special moving image use effect executed in VDP; FIG.

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The game machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. - 特許庁The inner frame 13 of the game machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 . More specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view. In addition, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with the left side as the rotation base end and the right side as the rotation tip side in a front view.

The game machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at its rotating tip, and has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by unlocking the cylinder lock 17 exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlock key.

A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. - 特許庁FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24. As shown in FIG.

An inner rail part 25 and an outer rail part 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA, and the inner rail part 25 and the outer rail part 26 constitute a guide rail as a guide means. A game ball shot from a game ball shooting mechanism (not shown) attached below the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by the guide rail. The game ball shooting mechanism shoots game balls by manually operating a shooting operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14 .

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general prize winning port 31, a special electric prize winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special figure unit 37, a general figure unit 38, and the like.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, no game ball is put out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33 and the second operating hole 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, when a ball enters the first operating port 33 or enters the second operating port 34, 3 prize balls are paid out, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, 10 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the special electric winning device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out.

The number of prize balls is arbitrary, and for example, the second operation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first operation port 33, and the second operation port 34 may have a larger number of prize balls than the first operation port 33.

In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that do not enter various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. Further, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members such as windmills.

Here, the entering ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and includes not only a mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also a mode in which the game ball continues to flow down the game area PA without being discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the game ball entering the out hole 24a, the general winning hole 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating hole 33, the second operating hole 34, and the through gate 35 are also expressed as winning.

The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and installed on the game board 24 . Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are open upward. Further, the two operating ports 33 and 34 are vertically aligned with the first operating port 33 facing upward. The second operating port 34 is provided with a universal electrical accessory 34a as a guide piece consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. A game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34 when the universal electrical role 34a is closed, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal electrical role 34a is in the open state.

A through gate 35 is provided upstream of the second operation port 34 in the direction in which the game ball flows. The through-gate 35 has a through-hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball entering the through-gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. - 特許庁

Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the universal electrical accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger, and the variable display of the pattern is performed in the normal pattern display part 38a of the normal pattern unit 38 provided in the lower right corner which is the area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electric power open winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display of the universal diagram display section 38a ends, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the common electric open state, the common electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, the normal figure display unit 38a is configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as the pattern variably displayed in the normal figure display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are switched and displayed can be considered.

In the normal pattern unit 38, a normal pattern holding display portion 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the normal pattern display portion 38a. The number of winning game balls in the through gate 35 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the normal figure reservation display section 38b.

A winning lottery is performed with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, the result of the lottery is clearly indicated through the display effect on the special figure unit 37 and the symbol display device 41 of the variable display unit 36. - 特許庁

In detail, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display section 37a. The display area of the special figure display part 37a is narrower than the display surface P of the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁In the special figure display part 37a, the variable display of the pattern is performed by performing a jackpot occurrence lottery with the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34 as a trigger. Then, as a result of stopping after the variable display of the pattern is performed, a display corresponding to the result of the big win generation lottery is performed. In addition, the special figure display unit 37a is configured by a segment display device in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and may be configured by a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or other type of display device such as a dot matrix display. In addition, as the pattern displayed in the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are displayed, or a configuration in which multiple types of colors are displayed can be considered.

In the special figure unit 37, a special figure reservation display section 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display section 37a. The number of game balls winning the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is reserved up to four, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting of the special figure reservation display part 37b.

More specifically, the pattern display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device, which will be described later. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or other display device having a display surface, or a dot matrix display device.

In the symbol display device 41, when the special figure display part 37a performs the variable display of the pattern based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34, the variable display of the pattern is performed accordingly. That is, when the variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in a game turn in which the result of the jackpot generating lottery is the jackpot result, the symbols of a predetermined combination are displayed stopped on the activated line set in advance in the symbol display device 41 .

The display contents of the pattern display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. FIGS. 3(a) to 3(j) are diagrams individually showing symbols variably displayed by the symbol display device 41, and FIGS. 4(a) and 4(b) are diagrams showing the display surface P of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in FIGS. 3(a) to 3(j), the pattern, which is one type of pattern, consists of 9 types of main patterns to which numbers "1" to "9" are respectively attached, and secondary patterns consisting of shell-shaped patterns. More specifically, nine types of character patterns, such as an octopus, are assigned numerals "1" to "9", respectively, to form the main pattern.

As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41, three pattern rows Z1, Z2 and Z3, ie upper, middle and lower rows, are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is constructed by arranging main symbols and sub-symbols in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower pattern row Z3, 9 kinds of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol.

That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle pattern row Z2, 9 kinds of main patterns of '1' to '9' are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then '4' main pattern is additionally arranged between the '9' main pattern and the '1' main pattern, and one sub-pattern is arranged between each of these main patterns. In other words, only the middle pattern row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols with 10 main symbols arranged. On the display surface P, the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

As shown in FIG. 4(b), the display surface P is designed to stop-display three symbols for each row of symbols, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3×3 are stopped-displayed. Also, five effective lines are set on the display surface P, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper pattern row Z1→lower pattern row Z3→middle pattern row Z2, and when the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in a state in which a combination of symbols with the same number is formed on any of the effective lines, a big win animation is displayed as the occurrence of a normal big win result or a 15R probability variable big win result to be described later.

In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols". When a 15R probability variable jackpot result occurs, a combination of the same specific symbols or a combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Also, when a normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of the result of the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot, which will be described later, the variable display of all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in a state in which a predetermined pattern combination different from the same pattern combination is formed, and then the explicit moving image is displayed.

It should be noted that the pattern display device 41 is not limited to the one described above, and may be arbitrarily changed. Further, the patterns displayed variably on the pattern display device 41 are not limited to the above-described patterns, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the patterns.

Also, based on the winning of any of the operation ports 33 and 34, the variable display is started in the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, and the predetermined stop result is displayed until the variable display is stopped corresponds to one game cycle.

Returning to the description of FIG. 2, when a jackpot is won in a jackpot generation lottery based on the winning to the first operating port 33 or the winning to the second operating port 34, the operation shifts to the opening/closing execution mode in which the prize to the special electric prize winning device 32 is possible. The special electric prize winning device 32 has a large prize winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24, and has an opening/closing door 32a for opening and closing the big winning opening. The opening/closing door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the opening/closing door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win prizes, and is switched to an open state in which game balls can win prizes when the internal lottery wins the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. Incidentally, the open/close execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a winning result is obtained. It should be noted that although it is not impossible to win a prize in the closed state, it may be configured to be in a state in which it is more difficult to win a prize than in the open state. Further, in the opening/closing execution mode, the symbol display device 41 executes a display effect corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode.

As shown in FIG. 1, a front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 having the above configuration. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 that allows almost the entire area of the game area PA to be visually recognized from the front. The window portion 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 43 is fitted therein. The window panel 43 is made of glass in a colorless and transparent manner, but is not limited to this, and may be made of a synthetic resin in a colorless and transparent manner, or may be formed in a colored and transparent manner as long as the game area PA can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 43.

A display light-emitting portion 44 is provided above the window portion 42 . A pair of left and right speaker units 45 are provided for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state. An upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 that bulge forward are arranged vertically below the window portion 42 . An upper plate 46a which opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower plate 47a which likewise opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. As shown in FIG. The upper tray 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball shooting mechanism side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 46a.

In the area of the lower bulging portion 47 outside the lower plate 47a, a performance operation device 48 having an operation portion manually operated by the player is provided. The operation unit of the operation device 48 for performance is manually operated by the player to set the content of the performance on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41 or the like to the content of the predetermined performance.

A main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 . In addition, the back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power source/fire control device. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described below.

<Electrical Configuration of Pachinko Machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 has a main control board 51 that controls the main game. In the main controller 50, the board box housing the main control board 51 and the like may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its opening. As the trace means, it is conceivable to use a structure in which a plurality of case bodies constituting the circuit board box are inseparably connected and a joint portion (crimped portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined portion upon separation, or a structure in which an adhesive layer is left on the adhesion target when peeled off, leaving a trace of the peeled seal across the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Further, as the trace structure, a structure in which an adhesive is applied to the boundary between a plurality of case bodies forming the board box is conceivable.

An MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51 . The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 52, a RAM 54 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 53, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

As the ROM 53, memory means (that is, non-volatile memory means) is used, which allows random access when reading the control program and fixed value data and does not require external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as long as random access is possible. Also, the configuration in which the control and calculation part, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, or a part of the functions may be mounted as a separate chip.

The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power/launch control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52 . The power/emission control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game arcade or the like. Operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 70 which will be described later.

A blackout monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power/launch control device 57 . In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52, so that the MPU 52 can execute processing for power failure.

Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52 . As a part of the various sensors, detection sensors provided one-to-one with respect to the winning-corresponding ball-entering portions such as the general prize-winning port 31, the special electric prize-winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are included, and the MPU 52 makes a prize-winning judgment (ball-entering judgment) for each ball-entering portion. In addition, the MPU 52 executes a big winning generation lottery and a big winning result type lottery based on winnings to the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, and also executes a reach generation lottery and a variable display time determination lottery for each game cycle.

Here, a configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 52 will be described.

During the game, the MPU 52 uses various counter information to set the jackpot occurrence lottery, the display setting of the special figure display unit 37a, the pattern display setting of the pattern display device 41, the display setting of the normal figure display unit 38a, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. , The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the pattern display device 41 fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41. Furthermore, it is decided to use the general electric role release counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the general electric role 34a of the second operation port 34 is in the electric role open state. These counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter buffer 54a.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. Information corresponding to the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in a reserved storage area 54b as an acquired information storage means when a prize is won in the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.

The reserved storage area 54b comprises a reserved area RE and an execution area AE. The reservation area RE includes a first reservation area RE1, a second reservation area RE2, a third reservation area RE3, and a fourth reservation area RE4. In accordance with the winning history of the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34, each numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, the big winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as the reservation information in one of the reservation areas RE1 to RE4.

In the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, each numerical information is stored chronologically in the order of the first reservation area RE1→the second reservation area RE2→the third reservation area RE3→the fourth reservation area RE4 when the winning to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 occurs a plurality of times in succession. By providing the four reservation areas RE1 to RE4 in this way, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are retained and stored. It should be noted that the number that can be retained and stored is not limited to four, and may be any number, such as two, three, or five or more, or may be singular. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first reservation area RE1 of the reservation area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display part 37a, and at the time of starting one game round, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

More specifically, the hit random number counter C1 is configured such that it is incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and stored in the reservation storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加

Random number values for winning a jackpot are stored in the ROM 53 as a success/failure table. As the success/failure table, a success/failure table for the low-probability mode and a success/failure table for the high-probability mode are set. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode set as the lottery mode in the jackpot generating lottery means.

Under the game state in which the success/failure table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, under the gaming state in which the success/failure table for the high-probability mode is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is twenty. As long as the probability of winning is higher in the high-probability mode than in the low-probability mode, the number of random numbers for winning is arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by "1" within the range of 0 to 29, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reservation storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are set by providing differences in three conditions: (1) opening/closing control mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode, (2) lottery mode in the jackpot generating lottery means after the opening/closing execution mode ends, and (3) support mode in the general electric accessory 34a of the second operation port 34 after the opening/closing execution mode ends.

A high frequency prize winning mode and a low frequency prize winning mode are set as modes of opening/closing control of the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening/closing execution mode so that the frequency of occurrence of prizes to the special electric prize winning device 32 is relatively high or low during the period from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the large winning opening is performed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode, and one opening is continued until 30 seconds elapse or until the number of winnings to the large winning opening reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening and closing of the big winning opening is performed twice from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode, and one opening is continued until 0.2 sec elapses or until the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening reaches six.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball shooting mechanism 58 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is shot toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the big winning opening is 0.2 sec as described above. In other words, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening time of the large winning opening is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, substantially no winning of game balls occurs in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

Note that the number of openings and closings of the large winning openings in the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are not limited to the above values and are arbitrary as long as the frequency of winning to the special electric winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode should be set such that the number of times of opening and closing is larger than that of the low-frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or the number of opening limits for one opening is set larger.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the special electric winning device 32 is preferably configured not to substantially win a prize. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the game ball shooting period and the limited number of openings is set shorter than the opening time limit for one opening, while in the low-frequency winning mode, the product of the game ball shooting period and the number of opening limits is set longer than the opening time limit. In addition, even if the game ball shooting interval and the opening time of the big winning hole at one time are not as described above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set shorter than the former, so that the special electric winning device 32 can be easily constructed to substantially prevent the winning of a prize.

As the support mode for the general electrical role 34a of the second operating port 34, a low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the general electrical role 34a of the second operating port 34 being in the open state per unit time is relatively high and low when compared with the situation where the game ball is continued to be shot in the same manner to the game area PA.

Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role open state winning in the electric role open lottery using the general electric role item open counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5). However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the general electric role item 34a is in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. In this case, when the open state of the electric role is won in the high-frequency support mode and the open state of the general electric role item 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closed time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is set shorter than the one time open time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, a shorter time is selected than in the low-frequency support mode as the minimum secured time for performing the next electric accessory open lottery after one electric accessory open lottery is performed.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first operation port 33 is higher than that of the second operation port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second operation port 34 is higher than that of the first operation port 33. When a winning to the second operation port 34 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls are put out, so in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game without reducing the number of balls in his hand too much.

The configuration for increasing the frequency of the electric role open state per unit time in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, it may be configured to increase the probability of winning the electric role open state in the electric accessory open lottery. In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of secured time (for example, time of variable display executed by the normal figure display unit 38a based on the winning of the through gate 35) are prepared after one electric accessory open lottery is performed and the next electric accessory open lottery is performed, it may be set so that a shorter secured time is more likely to be selected in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode, or the average secured time is shorter. Furthermore, by increasing the number of times of opening, lengthening the opening time, shortening the secured time secured after one electric accessory open lottery is performed and then performing the next electric accessory open lottery (that is, shortening the fluctuation display time of one time in the normal figure display unit 38a), shortening the average time of the securing time, and increasing the winning probability By applying any one condition or any combination of conditions, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. And, as such a distribution destination, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, and a 15R probability variable jackpot result are set.

The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes a low-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. However, this high-frequency support mode transitions to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number of times (specifically, 100 times) after transition. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the normal jackpot state.

The explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result of the big-hit generation lottery results in winning the big-hit state and the state shifts to the big-hit state. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the game state to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot state.

The 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening/closing execution mode becomes a high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes a high-probability mode and the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result of the big-hit generation lottery results in winning the big-hit state and the state shifts to the big-hit state. In other words, the 15R probability variable jackpot result is a jackpot result that shifts the gaming state to the 15R probability variable jackpot state.

In relation to each game state, the normal game state means a state in which the jackpot occurrence lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of ``0 to 29'', ``0 to 9'' correspond to the normal jackpot result, ``10 to 14'' correspond to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result, and ``15 to 29'' correspond to the 15R probability variable jackpot result.

As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result is set as the probability variable jackpot result, the aspect of the probability variable jackpot result is diversified. That is, when two types of variable probability jackpot results are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is highest in the 15R variable probability jackpot result in which the high frequency prize winning mode is set in the opening/closing execution mode and the high frequency support mode in the support mode, and lowest in the explicit 2R variable probability jackpot result which is the high frequency support mode in the support mode although the low frequency prize winning mode is set in the opening/closing execution mode. As a result, the monotony of the game can be suppressed, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game.

As a kind of the probability variable jackpot result, the open/close execution mode becomes the low-frequency prize winning mode, and after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the jackpot generating lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. In this case, further diversification of the probability variable jackpot results is achieved.

Furthermore, as a kind of loss result in the jackpot generation lottery, there may be included a special loss result in which transition to the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and transition to the jackpot generation lottery mode and the support mode do not occur after the end. In the configuration in which both the non-explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result and the special loss result are set as described above, the opening/closing execution mode shifts to the low-frequency winning mode and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. becomes.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the reservation storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34.例文帳に追加

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the pattern display device 41. - 特許庁In a gaming machine having a pattern display device 41 capable of variable display of patterns, and in a game cycle in which the opening/closing execution mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the variable display is the special display result, the expected performance is a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in the special display result after the start of the variable display of the symbols in the pattern display device 41 and before the stop display result is derived and displayed.

There are two types of expected effects, namely, the ready-to-win effect and an announcement effect for expecting the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect and the special display result in the stage before the ready-to-win effect occurs.

The ready-to-win performance includes a display state in which patterns of some of the plurality of pattern rows displayed on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41 are stopped and displayed to display a combination of ready-to-win patterns in which there is a possibility that a combination of jackpot patterns corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established, and in that state, patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner. Further, in a state where the combination of the ready-to-win patterns is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to perform the ready-to-win effect.

Specifically, the ready-to-win performance is performed, as a stage prior to ending the variable display of symbols, by stop-displaying combinations of ready-to-win symbols that have the possibility of establishing a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode on a preset effective line in the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, to form a ready-to-win line, and performing variable display of symbols by the final stop pattern row under the condition that the ready-to-win pattern is formed.

Specifically, the display contents of FIG. 4 will be described in detail. First, when the variable display of symbols is completed in the upper symbol row Z1 and then the variable display of symbols is completed in the lower symbol row Z3, a ready-to-win line is formed by stop-displaying the main symbols with the same number on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and when the ready-to-win line is formed, the variable display of symbols is performed in the middle symbol row Z2 to achieve a ready-to-win effect. Then, when a high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main patterns attached with the same numbers as the main patterns forming the reach line are stop-displayed on the reach line, and the fluctuation display of the patterns in the middle pattern row Z2 is terminated.

The advance notice performance includes a mode of displaying a character separately from the patterns on the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a situation where the patterns are variably displayed in all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 after the pattern display is started on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41, or in a situation where the patterns are variably displayed in a plurality of pattern rows in a part of the pattern rows. In addition, it also includes a background image in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode, and a pattern in the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. Such advance notice performance can occur in any game cycle when the ready-to-win performance is performed and when the ready-to-win performance is not performed.

The ready-to-win effect is executed regardless of the value of the ready-to-win random number counter C3 in the game times when the opening/closing execution mode is entered. Further, in a game round not shifting to the opening/closing execution mode, the reach table stored in the table storage area for the reach of the ROM 53 is referred to, and executed when the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing corresponds to the generation of the reach performance. On the other hand, the decision as to whether or not to perform the announcement effect is made not by the main controller 50 but by the sound emission control device 60 .

The fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by "1" in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used for determining the variation display time in the special figure display section 37a and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 in the MPU52. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process, which will be described later. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the special figure display unit 37a and at the start of variation in the design by the design display device 41. When determining the variable display time, a variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

For example, the universal electronic accessory release counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by "1" within the range of 0 to 250, and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The general electric role release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric role holding area 54c at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. - 特許庁Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general electric role item 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general electric role item opening counter C4.

The output side of the MPU 52 is connected with a payout control device 55 and a power supply/launch control device 57 . A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55, for example, based on the winning judgment result to the winning corresponding ball entering portion. The payout control device 55 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main controller 50 . A launch permission command is transmitted to the power supply/launch control device 57 based on the operation of the launch operation device 28 . The power/shooting control device 57 drives the game ball shooting mechanism 58 based on the shooting permission command received from the main controller 50 to shoot the game ball toward the game area PA.

In addition, the special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a are connected to the output side of the MPU52, and the display control of these special figure display section 37a and the general figure display section 38a is directly performed by the MPU52. In other words, display control of the special figure display section 37a is executed in the MPU 52 at each game round. Moreover, when the lottery result of whether or not to open the general electric accessory 34a is to be specified, the MPU 52 controls the display of the general pattern display unit 38a.

The output side of the MPU 52 is connected to a special electric prize driving unit that opens and closes the opening and closing door of the special electric prize winning device 32 and a general electric accessory driving unit that opens and closes the general electric accessory 34 a of the second operation port 34 . In other words, in the open/close execution mode, the MPU 52 executes the driving control of the special electric winning driving section so that the big winning opening is opened and closed. In addition, when the general electrical role 34a is won in the open state, the MPU 52 executes drive control of the general electrical role driving unit so that the general electrical role 34a is opened and closed. Further, the output side of the MPU 52 is connected to an audio emission control device 60, and various commands for effects are transmitted to the audio emission control device 60. FIG.

Here, processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described. The processing of the MPU 52 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 4 msec in this embodiment).

FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing main processing. In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without proceeding to the next process until a predetermined wait time (specifically, 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the pattern display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. In step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 52 is set.

After that, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power supply/launch control device 57 is manually operated. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed, and in the subsequent step S107, it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum saved at the time of power shutdown, that is, the validity of the stored data.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall starts operating, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on the occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality in the stored data is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. At step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. After that, the process proceeds to step S109.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, on condition that the power failure flag is set to "1" and the checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S109 without executing the processing of step S108. In step S109, power-on setting processing is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 54 is set to an initial value such as initialization of a power failure flag, and a command corresponding to the current game state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in order to recognize the current game state.

After that, the process proceeds to the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113. In other words, although the MPU 52 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing, there is a residual time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. Although this remaining time varies according to the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, the remaining processing of steps S110 to S113 is repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this respect, it can be said that the remaining processes of steps S110 to S113 are irregular processes that are executed irregularly.

In the remaining process, first, in step S110, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and in step S112, a fluctuation counter update process for updating the fluctuation type counter CS is executed. In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read out from the corresponding counter in the RAM 54, and after executing the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information, the process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting is performed to switch from a state in which the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S113, the process returns to step S110, and the processes of steps S110 to S113 are repeated.

Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Timer interrupt processing is executed periodically (for example, every 4 msec). First, in step S201, power failure information storage processing is executed. In the power failure information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of a power failure is received from the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is specified, the power failure process is executed.

In subsequent step S202, random number update processing for lottery is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electrical role release counter C4, and after executing the processing of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, the processing of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. After that, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

In subsequent step S205, fraud detection processing is executed to monitor whether or not a predetermined event set as a monitoring target for fraud has occurred. In the fraud detection process, the game stop flag provided in the RAM 54 is set to "1" by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred.

In the following step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not the game stop flag is set to "1". When a negative determination is made in step S206, the processes after step S207 are executed.

In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when the output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for outputting corresponding to the output information to various drive units is executed. For example, when the information for switching the special electric prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the driving signal to the special electric prize driving part is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set, the output of the driving signal is stopped. In addition, when the information for switching the general electrical function 34a of the second operation port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the driving signal to the general electrical function driving part is started, and when the information for switching to the closed state is set, the output of the driving signal is stopped.

In the following step S208, read processing is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

In the subsequent step S209, winning detection processing is executed. In the winning detection process, the signal received from each winning detection sensor is read, and the processing for specifying whether or not there is a winning to the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, and the through gate 35 is executed.

In the following step S210, a timer update process is executed to collectively update numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54. FIG. In this case, the timer counters that are updated by subtracting the stored numerical information are handled collectively.

In the subsequent step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of game balls is executed. In a situation where the shooting operation to the shooting operation device 28 is continued, as already explained, one game ball is shot at a predetermined shooting cycle of 0.6 sec.

In the subsequent step S212, as the input state monitoring process, based on the information read in the reading process of step S208, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and open confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed.

In the following step S213, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game cycle and execution control of the opening and closing execution mode is executed. In the special special electric control process, when the winning to the first operation opening 33 or the second operation opening 34 occurs in a situation where the number of the reservation information stored in the reservation storage area 54b is less than the upper limit number, the numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at that time is stored as the reservation information in the reservation storage area 54b in time series. In addition, in the special special electric control process, on the condition that the reservation information is stored and not during the game run and the opening/closing execution mode, the jackpot occurrence lottery process for deciding whether or not the reservation information corresponds to the jackpot winning, and the distribution determination process for deciding which jackpot result the reservation information corresponds to when the jackpot winning is supported are executed. In addition, in the special special electric control process, not only the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the allocation determination process, but also when the reservation information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, the reach determination process for determining whether or not the reservation information corresponds to the reach occurrence is executed, and the process for selecting the variation display time of the game cycle is executed using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time. In this case, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence or absence of the jackpot winning, the type of the jackpot and the presence or absence of the occurrence of ready-to-win is read from the ROM 53, and the variable display time of the current game round is determined from the read variable display time table and the numerical information of the variable type counter CS at that timing. Then, a variation command including information on the determined variation display time of the game round and a type command including information on the game result are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and variation display of the pattern in the special figure display section 37a is started. As a result, one game round is started, and the effect for the game round is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41. - 特許庁Also, the MPU 52 starts measuring the variable display time when it transmits the variable command and the type command.

In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when the variation display time corresponding to the game round has elapsed during the execution of one game round, the special figure display unit 37a displays the stop result corresponding to the result of the jackpot generation lottery process and the distribution determination process of the current game round, and furthermore starts measuring the fixed display time (specifically 0.5 sec). Then, the state in which the stop result is displayed on the special figure display unit 37a is maintained over the fixed display time. When the fixed display time elapses, if the current game round corresponds to the result of losing, the processing for starting a new game round is executed under the condition that the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 54b. If the hold information is not stored, it waits until the hold information is newly acquired.

On the other hand, if the game round this time corresponds to the big win result, the processing for starting the opening/closing execution mode is executed. At the time of starting, an opening command indicating that the opening/closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 . Moreover, in the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and a close command that indicates that the round game is terminated is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening/closing execution mode is terminated, an ending command indicating that is transmitted to the voice emission control device 60, and a process for setting a jackpot generating lottery mode or a support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In the opening/closing execution mode, an opening period occurs over a period of, for example, 3 seconds, and an effect is executed in which the player can recognize that the opening/closing execution mode has occurred during the opening period. After that, a round game in which opening and closing of the special electric prize winning device 32 is executed is executed a predetermined number of times. After the round game is executed a predetermined number of times, an ending period occurs over a period of, for example, 5 seconds, and an effect is executed that enables the player to recognize that the opening/closing execution mode will end during the ending period.

After performing the special figure special electric control processing of step S213 in timer interrupt processing, the general figure general electric control processing is performed in step S214. In the general pattern/general electric control processing, processing for acquiring reservation information on the general pattern side is executed when winning to the through gate 35 is generated, and when the reservation information on the general pattern side is stored, open determination is made for the reservation information, and further, processing for performance for the general pattern is executed with the open determination as a trigger. Moreover, based on the result of open determination, the process which opens and closes the universal electrical accessory 34a of the 2nd operation|movement opening 34 is performed.

In the subsequent step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information corresponding to the special figure display unit 37a in the special figure pending display unit 37b, along with setting the output information for reflecting the increase or decrease number of pending information corresponding to the general figure display unit 38a in the general figure pending display unit 38b. In addition, in step S215, based on the processing results of step S213 and step S214 immediately before, along with setting the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a, set the output information for updating the display content of the normal figure display unit 38a.

In the following step S216, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 55 are confirmed, and payout state reception processing for performing processing corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. Also, in step S217, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. In subsequent step S218, an external information setting process is executed for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process. After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Audio emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

The sound emission control device 60 has a sound emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted, as shown in FIG. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 62, a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 63, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like.

As the ROM 63, memory means (that is, non-volatile memory means) is used, which allows random access when reading control programs and fixed value data, and does not require external power supply for memory retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is not limited to this, and any type of memory can be used as long as random access is possible. Also, the configuration in which the control and calculation part, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, or a part of the functions may be mounted as a separate chip.

The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to the main control device 50 and the effect operating device 48 . The display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and a display CPU 72, which will be described later, of the display control device 70 is connected.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

The display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted, as shown in FIG.

The display CPU 72 functions as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected via a bus to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71, and various commands transmitted from the audio emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. Receiving a command from the sound emission control device 60 in the display CPU 72 is not limited to the configuration of directly receiving the command from the sound emission control device 60, and includes a configuration of receiving a command relayed to the relay board.

The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74 and the VRAM 75 via a bus, and based on the command received from the sound emission control device 60, issues a transfer instruction to transfer various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73. Also, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and based on the command received from the sound emission control device 60, instructs the pattern display device 41 to output an image signal. The memory module 74, work RAM 73, VRAM 75 and VDP 76 will be described below.

The memory module 74 pre-stores control data including control programs and fixed value data, and also pre-stores various image data including sprite data such as patterns and characters to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, background data, and moving image data. The memory module 74 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require an external power supply to retain data. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the memory module 74 is used as a non-writeable read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image. The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in which the still image data is compressed. Moving image data will be described later in detail.

The work RAM 73 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read from the memory module 74 and transferred, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing data, and more specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Although the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74 . Then, the display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 75 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the pattern display device 41 . The VRAM 75 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires power supply from the outside for storing data, and more specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 75 has an expansion buffer 81 . Image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74 . The VRAM 75 is also provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76 . Note that the VRAM 75 may be incorporated in the VDP 76 .

The VDP 76 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the pattern display device 41 by processing, specifically, data stored in the expansion buffer 81 based on drawing instructions from the display CPU 72, and is a type of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 41b that is incorporated in the pattern display device 41 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display section 41a. Since the VDP 76 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control section 91 , a register 92 , a video decoder 93 and a display circuit 94 . These circuits are interconnected via a bus, and are also connected to the I/F 95 for the display CPU 72 and the I/F 96 for the VRAM 75 .

The VDP 76 causes the register 92 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72 . By storing the drawing list in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. All of the control programs for the operation of the control unit 91 may be provided by the drawing list, or the control unit 91 may have a built-in memory in which the control programs are stored in advance, and the control unit 91 may execute predetermined processing according to the contents of the control program and the drawing list. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 74 in advance.

As the above processing, the control unit 91 reads the image data stored in the memory module 74 to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 . Also, the control unit 91 uses (or processes) the image data read out to the expansion buffer 81 to create drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 . Drawing data for one frame means data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame region 82a and a second frame region 82b are provided. Each of these frame areas 82a and 82b is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full-color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each color of RGB in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system, and for example, in a configuration in which each dot can display only 256 colors, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 82 is provided with the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b, in a situation where drawing data created in one frame area is used to perform drawing on the pattern display device 41, drawing data to be used in the future for the other frame area is created. That is, the frame buffer 82 employs a double buffer system.

In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b, and the image signal is output to the pattern display device 41 through the output port 78 connected to the display circuit 94. Specifically, drawing data is transferred to the display circuit 94 from the frame regions 82a and 82b to be output. The transferred drawing data is adjusted in resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 41 and converted into gradation data. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the pattern display device 41 is generated and output. The display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal. The video decoder 93 also decodes the video data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 .

<Processing configuration of MPU 62 of sound emission control device 60>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 62 of the sound emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound and light side MPU 62) will be described. FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing which is repeatedly executed in the sound and light side MPU 62 at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec).

First, in step S301, table setting processing for setting a control table used for executing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44, sound output control of the speaker unit 45, and control of the display control device 70 is executed. In the table setting process, for example, a control pattern table is set for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 (hereinafter referred to as the main side MPU 52). In subsequent step S302, a command selection process for instructing the display CPU 72 about the content of the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the command selection process, a command is output to the display CPU 72 according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301.

After that, in step S303, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the display light emitting section 44 is performed according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301. Further, in step S304, sound output control processing for controlling the sound output of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In the sound output control process, sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed according to the control table read out in the table setting process of step S301. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed in step S305. In the pointer update process, the current pointer information in the control table is updated to the next pointer information.

<Table setting processing>
FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the table setting process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

If the variation command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 52 (step S401: YES), a game result storage process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the information indicating the result of the big winning generation lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main side MPU 52 at the start of the current game cycle is specified, and the specified information is written in the RAM 64.例文帳に追加

After that, on the condition that the variable display time corresponding to the command for variation received this time from the main side MPU 52 is the variable display time corresponding to the possible state of occurrence of the previous notice performance (step S403: YES), the notice lottery process is executed (step S404). In the advance notice lottery process, it is decided by lottery whether or not the symbol display device 41 is to perform the advance notice effect in the current game round. As already explained, such an advance notice effect is to display characters separately from the patterns on the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 in a situation where all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed after the pattern display device 41 starts to variably display the symbols, or in a situation in which the symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of pattern rows in a part of the pattern rows, to display a character separately from the symbols on the pattern rows Z1 to Z3; It also includes those in which the above pattern is in a predetermined mode different from the previous modes. The advance notice performance can occur in any game cycle when the ready-to-win performance is performed and when the ready-to-win performance is not performed, but is set to occur with a higher probability when the ready-to-win performance is performed than when the ready-to-win performance is not performed. The advance notice performance is set so that the game rounds corresponding to any of the big winning results are more likely to occur than the game rounds corresponding to the result of losing, and the advance notice performance having a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur in the game rounds corresponding to the big winning result.

In the announcement lottery process, the announcement lottery table T1 pre-stored in the ROM 63 of the sound emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as sound and light side ROM 63) is read out to the RAM 64 of the audio emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as sound and light side RAM 64). The advance notice lottery table T1 is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with combinations of variation commands and type commands. Therefore, in the announcement lottery process, the announcement lottery table T1 corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time from the main side MPU 52 is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 .

FIG. 11(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the preliminary lottery table T1. The advance lottery result and the numerical range of the advance lottery counter are associated with each other in the advance lottery table T1. As the results of the advance notice lottery, non-occurrence of no advance notice performance, a first notice performance in which the notice performance is executed in the first mode, and a second notice performance in which the notice performance is executed in the second mode are set. In the first notice performance, for example, an individual image for the first notice performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41 so as to operate in a prescribed manner, and in the second notice performance, for example, the individual image for the second notice performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41 so as to operate in the prescribed manner. The announcement lottery counter is provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 . The advance notice lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from "0" to "239", is incremented by "1" periodically (for example, 4 msec), and returns to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. As shown in FIG. 11(a), in the advance lottery table T1, possible values of the advance lottery counter are assigned to any of the advance lottery results.

It should be noted that, depending on the type of the advance notice lottery table T1, the type of advance notice effect to be the lottery target may differ. In this case, there are cases where the selection rate of the advance notice performance to be the lottery target is different between the different types of advance notice lottery tables T1 although the types of the advance notice performance to be the lottery target are the same, and there are also cases where the different types of advance notice lottery tables T1 are different in part or all of the types of the advance notice performance to be the lottery object.

In the advance notice lottery process, the current value of the advance notice lottery counter is acquired, and the acquired value is checked against the advance notice lottery table T1 read this time. Then, the result of the advance notice lottery corresponding to the value obtained from the counter for advance notice lottery is acquired as the result of the present advance notice lottery process.

Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), if a negative determination is made in step S403 or if the process of step S404 is executed, the ready-to-win effect lottery process is executed on the condition that the change display time corresponding to the change command received this time from the main side MPU 52 is the change display time corresponding to the occurrence of the ready-to-win effect (step S405: YES) (step S406). That is, when the variable display time of the game times determined by the main side MPU 52 corresponds to the occurrence of the ready-to-win performance, the kind of the ready-to-win performance to be executed is determined in the ready-to-win performance lottery processing, and when the variable display time of the game times determined by the main side MPU 52 does not correspond to the occurrence of the ready-to-win performance, the ready-to-win performance lottery processing is not executed.

As already explained, the ready-to-win performance includes a display state in which the patterns of some of the plurality of pattern rows displayed on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41 are stopped and displayed to display a combination of ready-to-win patterns with the possibility of establishing a combination of jackpot patterns corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode, and in that state, the remaining pattern rows are subjected to variable display of patterns. Further, in a state where the combination of the ready-to-win patterns is displayed as described above, the patterns are displayed in the remaining pattern rows in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background image to perform the ready-to-win effect. The ready-to-win performance is set so that the game rounds corresponding to any of the big win results are more likely to occur than the game rounds corresponding to the result of losing, and the ready-to-win performance with a lower appearance rate is more likely to occur in the game rounds corresponding to the big winning results.

In the ready-to-win effect lottery process, the ready-to-win lottery table T2 stored in advance in the sound and light side ROM 63 is read out to the sound and light side RAM 64. - 特許庁The ready-to-win lottery table T2 is prepared in one-to-one correspondence with combinations of variation commands and type commands. Therefore, in the ready-to-win effect lottery process, the ready-to-win lottery table T2 corresponding to the variation command and the type command received this time from the main side MPU 52 is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 .

FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the reach lottery table T2. The ready-to-win lottery result and the numerical range of the ready-to-win lottery counter are associated with each other in the ready-to-win lottery table T2. As a result of the ready-to-win lottery, a first ready-to-win performance in which the ready-to-win performance is executed in the first mode, a second ready-to-win performance in which the ready-to-win performance is executed in the second mode, and a third ready-to-win performance in which the ready-to-win performance is executed in the third mode are set. In the first ready-to-win performance, for example, an individual image for the first ready-to-win performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner, in the second ready-to-win performance, for example, an individual image for the second ready-to-win performance is displayed in the pattern display device 41 to operate in a predetermined manner, and in the third ready-to-win performance, for example, an individual image for the third ready-to-win performance is displayed in the pattern display device 41 to operate in a predetermined manner. The reach lottery counter is provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 . The ready-to-win lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from "0" to "239", is periodically (for example, 4 msec) incremented by "1", and returns to "0" when it reaches the maximum value. As shown in FIG. 11(b), in the ready-to-win lottery table T2, possible values of the ready-to-win lottery counter are assigned to any of the ready-to-win lottery results.

It should be noted that the type of ready-to-win effect to be selected by lottery may differ depending on the type of the ready-to-win lottery table T2. In this case, although the types of ready-to-win performances to be the lottery objects are the same between the ready-to-win lottery tables T2 of different kinds, the selection rates of the ready-to-win performances to be lottery objects may differ, or part or all of the types of ready-to-win performances to be the lottery objects may differ between the different kinds of the ready-to-win lottery tables T2.

In the ready-to-win effect lottery process, the value of the ready-to-win lottery counter at that time is acquired, and the acquired value is checked against the ready-to-win lottery table T2 read this time. Then, the ready-to-win lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the ready-to-win lottery counter is acquired as the result of the current ready-to-win effect lottery process.

Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), when a negative determination is made in step S405, or when the process of step S406 is executed, the stop symbol determination process is executed (step S407). In the stop pattern determination processing, if the game result of the current game cycle is either the normal jackpot result or the 15R probability variable jackpot result, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same pattern combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is decided as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the same odd symbol combination is selected for the 15R probability variable jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination can be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variable jackpot result. The active lines L1 to L5 on which the same combination of symbols are stop-displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, even if the result is a normal jackpot, the same combination of odd-numbered symbols may be selected.

In the stop pattern determination processing, if the game result of the current game cycle is the result of the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not formed on all the effective lines L1 to L5 and the specific pattern combination ("3.4.1") is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. In this case, the valid lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a loss result, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect is specified from the content of the combination of the variation command and the type command. Then, when the ready-to-win performance is generated, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same pattern and the specific pattern does not materialize on all of the effective lines L1 to L5 and the combination of the ready-to-win patterns on one or two effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when the ready-to-win performance is not generated, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same pattern and the specific pattern does not materialize on all the effective lines L1 to L5 and the combination of the ready-to-win patterns does not materialize on all the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the information of the current stop result.

After that, a control pattern table setting process is executed (step S408). In the setting processing of the control pattern table, the control pattern table corresponding to the combination of the result of the notice lottery processing (step S404), whether or not the ready-to-win performance is generated, the result of the ready-to-win performance lottery processing (step S406) and the result of the stop pattern determination processing (step S407) when the ready-to-win performance is generated is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound and light side RAM 64.

The control pattern table T3 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the control pattern table T3 that can be set when the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect are executed in the game round resulting in the 15R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 12, the pointer information for the number of frames corresponding to the variable display time of the target game round is set in the control pattern table T3, and the information on the content of the task and the information on the presence or absence of command output are set in association with each piece of pointer information.

Information on the content of the task is information set for performing light emission control and sound output control corresponding to the current game cycle, and in each frame, light emission control of the display light emitting part 44 is performed and sound output control of the speaker part 45 is performed in a manner corresponding to the information of the task content. Specifically, in the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, pointer information "0" is set with data at the start of fluctuation, pointer information "200" is set with data at the start of the notice effect, pointer information "300" is set with data at the end of the notice effect, pointer information "400" is set with data at the start of normal reach, pointer information "700" is set with data at the start of super reach, and pointer information "1000". The pointer information is set with the data at the start of the fixed effect, and the pointer information of "1400" is set with the data at the start of the standby display. Each of these pieces of pointer information corresponds to delimitation timings such as the start of an effect, the switching of the effect, and the end of the effect. In addition, data for enabling light emission control and sound output control between break timings is set in pointer information other than these.

The information on the presence/absence of command output is information indicating the presence/absence of command output from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 and the type of the command. By outputting a command to the display CPU 72 according to the control pattern table T3 in the command selection process (step S302) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), it is possible to associate the content of the image on the pattern display device 41, the light emission content of the display light emission unit 44, and the sound output content of the speaker unit 45. That is, in accordance with the content of the moving image on the pattern display device 41, the display light-emitting section 44 performs light production, and the speaker section 45 performs sound output production. Specifically, in the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, command data is set for pointer information of "0" in which data at the start of fluctuation is set in the contents of the task. Therefore, when the game cycle starts to fluctuate, display control is started in the display CPU 72 based on command transmission from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 . In addition, in the contents of the task, command data is set for each pointer information in which data at the start of notice performance, data at the start of normal reach, data at the start of super reach, data at the start of fixed performance and data at the start of standby display are respectively set, specifically, each pointer information of ``200'', ``400'', ``700'', ``1000'' and ``1400''. Therefore, when the type of the performance division included in the performance for the game cycle changes within the range of the performance for the game cycle which is started by the generation of a predetermined start opportunity of transmitting the variation command and the type command from the main side MPU 52, the display CPU 72 starts the display control corresponding to the new performance segment based on the command transmission from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. - 特許庁

The control pattern table T3 is provided so as to correspond to an effect for the opening/closing execution mode and an effect for demonstration display in a situation where neither the effect for the game time nor the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is executed in addition to the effect for the game cycle. By setting the control pattern table T3 corresponding to various situations in this manner, some control pattern table T3 is read out to the sound and light side RAM 64 in a situation where operating power is supplied to the sound and light side MPU 62.

After that, determination processing of the variable display time is executed (step S409). In this process, information on the variable display time of the current game cycle is specified from the content of the variable command received from the main side MPU 52 this time, and the specified variable display time information is set in the variable time counter 64a provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 11(c). The variable time counter 64a is a counter for the sound and light side MPU 62 to specify the timing of ending the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and starting the fixed display of the symbols in the current game round. The value set in the variable time counter 64a is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started in the sound and light side MPU 62, that is, each time 4 msec elapses.

The variable display mode of the symbols when the effect for the game round is executed will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 13(a) and 13(b). FIG. 13(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a pattern is oscillatingly displayed on the pattern display device 41, and FIG. 13(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how a pattern is confirmed and displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In a game cycle in which a game cycle resulting in a complete failure (a game cycle in which a failure result is obtained without generating a ready-to-win effect) or a normal ready-to-win display (display content in which a ready-to-win effect is performed using the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 without displaying a ready-to-win effect character), variable display of the symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is started in the low identification mode high speed variation display, and thereafter, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is in a high identification mode low speed variation display in a predetermined order. As soon as it is switched, standby display is started in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in the predetermined order. After the state in which standby display is performed in all the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is continued for a predetermined period, each pattern that has been standby displayed is fixedly displayed as a final stop display, and the fixed display state is continued over the fixed display time.

As shown in FIG. 13(a), the standby display is a display state in which symbols are waiting in standby areas SA1 to SA9 which are virtually set such that each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has three symbols on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. In a state where only the upper pattern row Z1 is standby-displayed and the remaining pattern rows Z2 and Z3 continue to be scroll-displayed, one pattern is waiting in each of standby areas SA1 to SA3 corresponding to the upper pattern row Z1. In addition, when the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 are displayed on standby and the scroll display of the patterns is continued in the middle pattern row Z2, one pattern is waiting in each of the waiting areas SA1 to SA3 corresponding to the upper pattern row Z1 and the waiting areas SA7 to SA9 corresponding to the lower pattern row Z3. Further, in a state where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on standby, one symbol is waiting in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. In the standby display, the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are not displayed statically, but are variably displayed within the same standby areas SA1 to SA9. Specifically, each pattern to be displayed on standby swings up and down or left and right in a range including the stop position and sandwiching the stop position in the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9.

As shown in FIG. 13(b), the fixed display is a display state in which each one of the symbols that had been standby-displayed in the standby areas SA1-SA9 of each of the symbol rows Z1-Z3 ends the variable display within the range of the corresponding standby areas SA1-SA9, and the corresponding symbols are stop-displayed at the stop positions of the respective standby areas SA1-SA9. By performing the confirmation display in this way, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize the stop result of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 in the current game round.

On the other hand, in a game cycle in which the super ready-to-win display is performed, the variable display of patterns is started, and after the patterns of the upper pattern row Z1 and the lower pattern row Z3 which are part of the pattern rows are standby-displayed in the standby areas SA1 to SA3 and SA7 to SA9 to form the ready-to-win lines, the image for the super ready-to-win is displayed. After that, in a state in which a combination of jackpot symbols or a combination of winning reach symbols is formed, symbols are displayed in a standby state in each standby area on all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 for a predetermined period. Then, these symbols are confirmed and displayed, and the confirmed display state is continued for the confirmation display time.

Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), in a situation where the performance execution control is performed according to the control pattern table set in step S408 (step S410: YES), and the value of the variable time counter 64a of the sound and light side RAM 64 in step S409 is "0" (step S411: YES), the fixed display time (specifically 0.5 sec) information is stored in the fixed time counter 64b provided in the sound and light side RAM 64. set (step S412). The value set in the fixed time counter 64b is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started in the sound and light side MPU 62, that is, each time 4 msec elapses. Further, the confirmation display table that determines the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 45 during the confirmation display time is read from the sound and light ROM 63 and stored in the sound and light RAM 64 (step S413). Control data for executing light emission control and sound output control for the fixed display time are set in the fixed display table, but in practice, the display light emitting part 44 is turned off and the speaker part 45 is turned off during the fixed display time. After that, a fixed display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S414). Thereby, the display CPU 72 controls the display of the pattern display device 41 so that each pattern waiting and displayed on the pattern display device 41 is fixedly displayed as it is, and further, the fixed display state is maintained over the fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec).

Here, in the master side MPU 52, when the variation display time corresponding to the variation command and the type command has passed, the special figure display part 37a displays the stop result corresponding to the results of the jackpot generation lottery processing and the allocation determination processing of the current game round and maintains the state over the fixed display time. The variable display time measured by the main MPU 52 is the same as the variable display time set in the sound and light MPU 62 in step S409, and the fixed display time measured in the main MPU 52 is the same as the fixed display time set in the sound and light MPU 62 in step S412. Therefore, at the timing when the master side MPU 52 confirms the lapse of the variable display time, the pattern display device 41 starts the fixed display of the pattern, and at the timing when the master side MPU 52 confirms the lapse of the fixed display time, the pattern display device 41 finishes the fixed display of the pattern.

In the table setting process, other processes are executed in step S415 in addition to the above processes. In other processing, for example, when an opening command is received from the main side MPU 52, a control pattern table for executing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is read, and when the ending command is received from the main side MPU 52, processing for ending the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is executed. In addition, in a situation where neither the effect for the game round nor the effect for the open/close execution mode is being executed, the control pattern table for executing the demonstration display effect is read.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the sound and light side MPU 62 executes notice lottery processing (step S404) for determining presence/absence and contents of the notice performance and ready-to-win performance lottery processing (step S406) for determining the content of the ready-to-win performance. As a result, it is not necessary for the main side MPU 52 to determine the presence or absence and contents of the notice performance, and furthermore, it is not necessary to determine the contents of the ready-to-win performance, so that the processing load of the main side MPU 52 can be reduced with respect to the execution control of the performance for the game cycle.

However, due to the fact that both the advance notice performance and the ready-to-win performance are determined by lottery in the sound and light side MPU 62, the variable display time determined by the control pattern table T3 selected by the sound and light side MPU 62 may not match the variable display time determined by the main side MPU 52.例文帳に追加In other words, when the lottery for advance notice performance and the lottery for ready-to-win performance are to be executed while perfectly matching the variable display time determined by the main side MPU 52, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of types of advance notice performance and a plurality of types of ready-to-win performance in the design stage of the Pachinko machine 10 corresponding to each variable display time determined by the main side MPU 52.例文帳に追加In this case, the types of advance notice effects and the types of ready-to-win effects become enormous. Further, even if a plurality of types of advance notice performance and a plurality of types of ready-to-win performance are prepared in the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to each variable display time that can be determined by the main side MPU 52, if the lottery for the notice performance and the ready-to-win performance are executed while completely matching the variable display time determined by the main side MPU 52, the design of the notice performance and the ready-to-win performance will be restricted. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to favorably perform the standby display and final display at the end of the performance for the game round while allowing the variation display time determined by the control pattern table T3 not to coincide with the variation display time determined by the main side MPU 52.例文帳に追加The configuration will be described below.

FIGS. 14A and 14B are explanatory diagrams for explaining various parts tables T4 to T9 used when setting the control pattern table T3 in the control pattern table setting process (step S408) in the table setting process (FIG. 10).

The parts tables T4 to T9 are tables for generating part or all of one control pattern table T3, and are pre-stored in the sound and light side ROM 63. FIG. The part tables T4 to T9 are classified into a plurality of table groups, and one parts table read from one table group may be used as it is as one control pattern table T3, or one control pattern table T3 may be generated by combining the part tables read from each table group.

As the table group, there are a table group TG1 for the first period and a table group TG2 for the second period. The table group TG1 for the first period includes a parts table corresponding to the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the standby display in the lower symbol row Z3 when the variable display of symbols is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in the game round production, and the entire period of the game round production when all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are simultaneously switched to the standby display in the game round production. A corresponding parts table is included. When the notice effect is executed as the effect for the game round, the control data for executing the notice effect are set in the parts tables T5 and T6 included in the table group TG1 for the first period. For example, control data for executing the first notice performance are set in a parts table T5 for the first notice performance, and control data for executing the second notice performance are set in the parts table T6 for the second notice performance. Further, the control data corresponding to the period until the standby display is started in the lower symbol row Z3 of the game round when the advance notice effect does not occur is set in the parts table T4 for the notice effect non-occurrence. The table group TG1 for the first period includes part tables other than the part tables T4 to T6 illustrated above.

A table group TG2 for the second period includes a parts table corresponding to a period from the start of standby display in the lower pattern row Z3 to the end of the standby display in the middle pattern row Z2 when the variable display of symbols is switched from scroll display to standby display in the order of the upper pattern row Z1→lower pattern row Z3→middle pattern row Z2 in the performance for the game round. When the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game-time effect, the control data for executing the ready-to-win effect is set in the parts tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period. For example, the control data for executing the first ready-to-win performance are set in the parts table T7 for the first ready-to-win performance, the control data for executing the second ready-to-win performance are set in the parts table T8 for the second ready-to-win performance, and the control data for executing the third ready-to-win performance are set in the parts table T9 for the third ready-to-win performance. The table group TG2 for the second period includes part tables other than the part tables T7 to T9 illustrated above. The parts table also includes a parts table when the ready-to-win effect is not executed.

In the setting process of the control pattern table in step S408 of the table setting process (FIG. 10), one parts table is read from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound and light side ROM 63. FIG. In this case, for example, when the variable display time of the current game round corresponds to the variable display time in which switching of the variable display of symbols from scroll display to standby display occurs simultaneously in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, for example, the game round results in a loss and the number of pieces of pending information stored in the pending storage area 54b is four, which is the upper limit number. set.

On the other hand, when the variable display time of the current game cycle corresponds to the variable display time that occurs sequentially in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 when switching the variable display of the symbols to the standby display, one parts table corresponding to the result of the notice lottery processing (step S404) is read from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound and light side ROM 63. In addition, if the ready-to-win performance does not occur, one parts table corresponding to the current variable display time is read from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound and light side ROM 63, and if the game time to generate the ready-to-win performance, one parts table corresponding to the result of the ready-to-win performance lottery processing (step S405) is read from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound and light side ROM 63. By combining the parts table read from the table group TG1 for the first period and the parts table read from the table group TG2 for the second period, one control pattern table T3 is set.

In a situation where one parts table is directly set as one control pattern table T3, the type of control pattern table T3 corresponding to one variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 is uniquely determined. On the other hand, in a situation where one control pattern table T3 is created by combining a plurality of parts tables, there are a plurality of types of control pattern table T3 corresponding to one variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. For example, in a situation in which the advance notice lottery process (step S404) is executed using the advance notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11(a) and the ready-to-win effect lottery process (step S406) is executed using the ready-to-win lottery table T2 shown in FIG. Any one of the parts table T7 for the first ready-to-win effect, the parts table T8 for the second ready-to-win effect, and the parts table T9 for the third ready-to-win effect is selected from the table group TG2 for two periods.

FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable display time determined by the parts tables T4-T9. FIG. 15(a1) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T4 for not generating the advance notice effect, FIG. 15(a2) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first notice effect, and FIG. 15(a3) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T6 for the second notice effect. 15(b1) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T7 for the first ready-to-win effect, FIG. 15(b2) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second ready-to-win effect, and FIG. 15(b3) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T9 for the third ready-to-win effect.

As shown in FIGS. 15(a1) to 15(a3), the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first notice effect is longer than the variable display time determined by the parts table T4 for not generating the notice effect by the time (Ta1), and the variable display time determined by the parts table T6 for the second notice effect is longer by the time (Ta2-Ta1) than the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first notice effect. Further, as shown in FIGS. 15(b1) to 15(b3), the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second ready-to-win effect is longer than the variable display time determined by the parts table T7 for the first ready-to-win effect by the time (Tb1), and the variable display time determined by the parts table T9 for the third ready-to-win effect is longer by the time (Tb2-Tb1) than the variable display time determined by the parts table T8 for the second ready-to-win effect.

In the above configuration, when the advance notice lottery process (step S404) is executed using the advance notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11(a) and the reach effect lottery process (step S406) is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. Specifically, the variable display time is shortest when the combination of the part table T4 for not generating the advance notice effect and the part table T7 for the first ready-to-win effect is selected, and the variable display time is longest when the combination of the part table T6 for the second advance notice effect and the part table T9 for the third ready-to-win effect is selected, but the difference between these variable display times is (Ta2+Tb2). Therefore, the variation display time determined by the sound and light side MPU 62 can be different for one variation command transmitted from the master side MPU 52 .

However, the advance lottery table T1 and reach lottery table T2 selected for the combination of the variation command and the type command are set so that the longest variation display time among the variation display times that can be selected for one variation command is equal to or less than the variation display time corresponding to the variation command, that is, the variation display time determined by the main side MPU 52. That is, no matter which table T1 for notice lottery is used and which table T2 for reach lottery is used, the variable display time corresponding to the control pattern table created by combining a plurality of parts tables is less than or equal to the variable display time determined by the main side MPU 52.例文帳に追加

In a configuration in which the longest variation display time among the variation display times that can be selected for one variation command is equal to or less than the variation display time determined by the main side MPU 52, the control corresponding to the final pointer set in the control pattern table ends before the variation display time measured using the variation time counter 64a of the sound and light side RAM 64 elapses. On the other hand, when the control corresponding to the final pointer ends before the variable display time measured using the variable time counter 64a elapses, the value of the pointer to be controlled is returned and the standby display is continued. Processing for returning the value of the pointer will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing pointer update processing executed in step S305 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9).

In the pointer update process, 1 is added to the value of the pointer information to be referenced among the pointer information used to specify the control data to be used in the currently set control table (for example, the control pattern table) (step S501). As a result, the command selection process (step S302), the light emission control process (step S303), and the sound output control process (step S304) in the next process of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) use the control data corresponding to the value of the pointer information updated this time.

After that, on the condition that the value of the pointer information to be referred to is greater than the value of the final pointer defined in the control table, and that the currently set control table is the control pattern table for game play (steps S502 and S503: YES), pointer information correction processing is executed (step S504). In the pointer information correction process, the value of the pointer information to be referenced is corrected so that the control data corresponding to the pointer information corresponding to the timing at which the standby display is started is used in the command selection process (step S302), the light emission control process (step S303), and the sound output control process (step S304) in the next processing of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). Thus, even if the control corresponding to the final pointer ends before the variable display time measured using the variable time counter 64a elapses, the standby display is continued until the variable display time elapses.

Further, when the pointer information correction processing (step S504) is executed, a standby extension command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S505). When the display CPU 72 receives the standby extension command, the display CPU 72 sets the data table for continuing the standby display so that the standby display is continued on the pattern display device 41 .

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 17, a description will be given of how the effect for the game cycle is executed. FIG. 17(a) shows the execution period of the game round, FIGS. 17(b1) and 17(b2) show the first period during which execution control of the performance using the parts table read out from the table group TG1 for the first period is performed, and FIGS. 7(d1) and FIG. 17(d2) show standby display periods, and FIGS. 17(e1) and 17(e2) show fixed display periods. 17(b1), FIG. 17(c1), FIG. 17(d1), and FIG. 17(e1) are cases in which the advance lottery process (step S404) is executed using the advance lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11(a) and the ready-to-win effect lottery process (step S406) is executed using the ready-to-win lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 11(b). FIG. 17(b2), FIG. 17(c2), FIG. 17(d2), and FIG. 17(e2) are when the advance notice lottery process (step S404) is executed using the notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11(a) and the reach effect lottery process (step S406) is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. indicate.

Regardless of whether the shortest correspondence table is used or the longest correspondence table is used, at timing t1, a game round is started as shown in FIG. 17(a), and the first period is started as shown in FIGS. 17(b1) and 17(b2). After that, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the first period ends and the second period starts at the timing t11 as shown in FIGS. 17(b1) and 17(c1), and when the longest correspondence table is used, the first period ends and the second period starts at the timing t21 as shown in FIGS. 17(b2) and 17(c2).

Thereafter, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the second period ends and the standby display period starts at timing t12 as shown in FIGS. 17(c1) and 17(d1), and when the longest correspondence table is used, the second period ends and the standby display period starts at timing t22 as shown in FIGS. 17(c2) and 17(d2). In this case, in a situation where the shortest correspondence table is used, the end timing of standby display determined in the control pattern table is earlier than the elapsed timing of the variable display time.

After that, regardless of whether the shortest correspondence table or the longest correspondence table is used, the variation display time measured using the variation time counter 64a of the sound and light side RAM 64 elapses at the timing of t2. Therefore, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the standby display period ends and the fixed display period starts as shown in FIGS. 17(d1) and 17(e1), and when the longest correspondence table is used, the standby display period ends and the fixed display period starts as shown in FIGS. 17(d2) and 17(e2). Then, when the fixed display time elapses at the timing t3, the fixed display period ends as shown in FIGS. 17(e1) and 17(e2), and the current game round ends as shown in FIG. 17(a).

As described above, the light-side MPU 62 executes the advance notice lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence and content of the advance notice effect and the ready-to-win effect lottery process (step S406) for determining the content of the ready-to-win effect. As a result, the main MPU 52 does not need to determine the presence or absence and contents of the advance notice performance, and furthermore, it does not need to determine the contents of the ready-to-win performance, so that the processing load of the main MPU 52 can be reduced in relation to the execution control of the performance for the game cycle. In addition, it is possible to diversify the effect mode set for one combination of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the main MPU 52 .

A control pattern table corresponding to the result of advance notice lottery processing and the result of ready-to-win performance lottery processing is set so that the variation display time determined by the control pattern table can be different even when the same command for variation is received from the main side MPU 52.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the main MPU 52 and diversify the mode of presentation while making it possible to suitably design the advance notice presentation and the ready-to-win presentation.

Even in the configuration where the variation display time determined by the control pattern table selected with the same command for variation as a trigger can be different, at the timing corresponding to the variation display time determined by the main side MPU 52, the pattern variation display mode in the pattern display device 41 is switched from the standby display to the fixed display. Thus, even if the variation display time determined by the control pattern table can be different, it is possible to end the performance for the game round in the pattern display device 41 at the timing corresponding to the variation display time determined by the main side MPU 52.例文帳に追加

In a configuration where control pattern tables to be used can be different even when the same command for variation is received from the main side MPU 52, the longest variation display time among the variation display times determined by the control pattern tables corresponds to the variation display time determined by the main side MPU 52 or less. When the control pattern table corresponding to the variable display time shorter than the variable display time determined by the main side MPU 52 is used, the variable display mode of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 is maintained in standby display until the timing when the variable display time determined by the main side MPU 52 elapses. As a result, even when any of the control pattern tables is used, the pattern display device 41 switches from the standby display to the final display at the end of the game round, and it is possible to prevent, for example, the phenomenon that the final display is suddenly started in the middle of the predetermined performance or the final display of the pattern continues for a longer period than the normal final display period.

A variable time counter 64a is provided in a sound and light side RAM 64, a variable display time corresponding to a variable command received from a main side MPU 52 is set in the variable time counter 64a, and when the variable display time measured using the variable time counter 64a elapses, the variable display mode of the pattern in the pattern display device 41 is switched to a fixed display. As a result, even when the same variation command is received from the main side MPU 52, in a configuration where the variation display time determined by the control pattern table can be different, the fixed display can be started at the timing corresponding to the variation display time determined by the main side MPU 52 without transmitting the command indicating the start timing of the fixed display from the main side MPU 52. - 特許庁

As a configuration in which the variation display times determined by the control pattern table can differ even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the following configuration may be applied.

The various parts tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period may be configured such that control data corresponding to a time longer than the longest variable display time assumed as the situation in which these parts tables T7 to T9 are used is set, and control data for executing standby display is set as control data corresponding to the period after the end timing. In this case, there is no need to perform correction processing on the control pattern table for extending the execution period of the standby display. However, it is necessary to end the use of the control pattern table at the timing when the variation display time of the game cycle has passed.

A control pattern table for controlling the execution of the effect after the start of the standby display is provided separately from the control pattern table for controlling the execution of the effect before the start of the standby display, and when the standby display is started, it may be configured to switch to a state in which the execution control of the effect is performed based on the control pattern table for the standby display. In this case, by using the same control pattern table for standby display in any game round, the control pattern table for standby display can be used in various situations. In this configuration, the control pattern table for standby display is set as a table for performing standby display over a predetermined period, and when it is necessary to perform standby display over a period longer than the predetermined period, the control pattern table for standby display may be used in a loop. Further, the control pattern table for standby display may be set as a table that enables the execution of standby display over the longest period or longer assumed as the period during which the standby display is executed, and the use of the control pattern table for standby display may be terminated halfway when the variable display time of the game cycle has passed.

The measurement of the time for starting the confirmed display is not limited to the configuration in which the sound and light side MPU 62 executes the measurement of the time to start the confirmed display, and when the timing to start the confirmed display comes, the master side MPU 52 transmits a command corresponding to the command to the sound and light side MPU 62, and when the sound and light side MPU 62 receives the command, the sound and light side MPU 62 may perform processing for starting the confirmed display.

In a configuration in which the control pattern table to be used may differ even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, instead of the configuration in which the longest variation display time among the variation display times determined by the control pattern tables corresponds to the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52 or less, the longest variation display time among the variation display times determined by the control pattern table may be longer than the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52. In this case, it is necessary to end the effect during the execution of the effect for the game round. Therefore, in such a case, an effect for forced termination is generated, and the contents corresponding to the results of the jackpot generation lottery and the type lottery of the corresponding game round in the effect for forced termination, more specifically, the contents corresponding to the determination result of the stop symbol determination process (step S407) in the table setting process (FIG. 10) of the game round may be notified. More specifically, even during execution of a performance such as a ready-to-win performance corresponding to a period before the standby display on the pattern display device 41, the combination of symbols determined as a result of stopping the game cycle may be suddenly stop-displayed at the timing when the variable display time elapses, and fixed display may be performed in the state in which the combination of symbols is stop-displayed.

<Processing Configuration of Display CPU 72>
Next, processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing the V interrupt process which is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle by the display CPU 72, specifically at a cycle of 20 msec.

When the VDP 76 outputs image signals for one frame to the pattern display device 41, the VDP 76 starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the display surface P, sequentially outputs the image signal to the dots arranged on the horizontal line including the dot at one end, and sequentially outputs the image signal to the dots from the left to the right for each horizontal line. Finally, an image signal is output for the dot at the lower right corner of the display surface P. FIG. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing of outputting the image signal for the last dot, and makes the display CPU 72 recognize that the update of the image for one frame is completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, which is the same as the update cycle of the image for one frame. In this respect, the V interrupt process can be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal has not been received, if 20 msec has passed since the previous V interrupt process was started, a new V interrupt process is started.

In the V interrupt process, command analysis processing is first executed (step S601). Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 73 is analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 72 receives the strobe signal from the sound and light side MPU 62, it executes the command interrupt processing regardless of the processing being executed at that time. In command interrupt processing, commands received at the input port 77 are transferred to a command buffer provided in the work RAM 73 .

After that, on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving the new command (step S602: YES), the command correspondence process is executed (step S603). In the command correspondence processing, an execution target table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 74 . The execution target table is a group of information defining the processing necessary to display one frame of image at each update timing of the image when displaying the moving image corresponding to the received command on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41.

The commands received by the display CPU 72 from the sound and light side MPU 62 include the already explained command at the start of fluctuation, the command at the start of notice effect, the command at the start of normal reach, the command at the start of super reach, the command at the start of fixed effect, the command at the start of standby display, the standby extension command, the fixed display start command, and the like. When these commands are received, an execution object table necessary for executing the game round effects corresponding to each of these commands on the symbol display device 41 is read.

When a negative determination is made in step S602, or when the processing of step S603 is executed, task processing is executed (step S604). In the task processing, by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the execution object table set as the object to be used, various data necessary for giving drawing instructions to the VDP 76 in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time are set. Specifically, the various data include address information of the area in which the image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 74, address information of the area to which the image data to be controlled is transferred in the VRAM 75, information on the target frame areas 82a and 82b in which drawing data is to be created using the control target image data, information on coordinates when writing the control target image data in the creation target frame areas 82a and 82b, information on the scale when writing the image data, and a uniform α value when writing the image data ( Translucent value) information, etc. exist.

After that, drawing list output processing is executed (step S605). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76 . In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped by the immediately preceding task processing becomes the drawing target, and the parameter information updated by the task processing is also set. The VDP 76 creates drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list. The processing in this VDP 76 will be described later in detail.

The task processing of step S604 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, a setting process for starting control is executed (step S701). In the control start setting process, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current processing, based on the currently set execution target table. When it exists, the work RAM 73 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and the empty buffer area is secured so as to correspond one-to-one with the individual image grasped as the control start target. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the secured empty buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control corresponding to the individual image is set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

After that, the control update target is grasped (step S702). This control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed and which may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing.

After that, a background calculation process is executed (step S703). In the background arithmetic processing, the control update target of this time among the backmost still image and the background sprite that constitute the background image is grasped. In addition, for the grasped control update target, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates on a virtual two-dimensional plane, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data designation are calculated and derived. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73 .

After that, a production calculation process is executed (step S704). In the effect arithmetic processing, the current control update target is grasped among the effect sprites constituting the image of the effect to be displayed in various effects such as the ready-to-win effect, the advance notice effect and the jackpot effect. In addition, the above various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73 .

After that, the symbol arithmetic processing is executed (step S705). In the symbol calculation process, among the symbols to be changed and displayed in each game round, the current control update target is grasped. In addition, the above various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the information for control is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured corresponding to each individual image in the work RAM 73 .

After that, a drawing instruction target grasping process is executed (step S706). In the drawing instruction target grasping process, among the individual images targeted for control update by the arithmetic processing in steps S703, S704, and S705, processing for grasping the individual image included in the one-frame image corresponding to the current drawing data creation instruction is executed. The grasping is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to the information on the coordinates, rotation angles and scales of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, the individual images specified in the drawing list are not all the individual images whose control has been started, but only the individual images to be displayed, so that the VDP 76 does not need to sort out the individual images to be displayed, and even if they are not sorted, it is not necessary to wastefully draw the individual images that are not to be displayed. This reduces the processing load on the VDP 76 .

<Basic processing in VDP 76>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

The VDP 76 executes a process of setting the value of the register 92 based on the command sent from the display CPU 72, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 72, and a process of outputting an image signal to the pattern display device 41 based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) associated with the I/F 95 for the display CPU 72 . Further, the process of creating drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

The processing for creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Prior to the description of this process, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. 20(a) to 20(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. The header information includes target buffer information indicating in which of the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b the drawing data for displaying the image for one frame corresponding to the drawing list is to be drawn. The header information includes whether or not decoding is specified and information about the address of moving image data to be decoded.

In addition to the header information, a plurality of types of image data used for displaying an image of one frame are set in the drawing list, and further information on the drawing order of each image data and parameter information of each image data are set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set to be serial numerical information, and the image data information to be used is set in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. Further, parameter information is set in one-to-one correspondence with the information of each image data.

The drawing order is set so that the individual images to be displayed so as to be positioned on the back side of the display surface P in the image for one frame are drawn first. The individual image is one still image defined by still image data such as background data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as design sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 20(a), the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and then the sprite data B is written. In the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed in the order of background image→effect image→design so as to be on the front side.

A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3), . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 20B, the background data parameter P(1) is written in the frame areas 82a and 82b with respect to the size set as the initial state of the background data, as shown in FIG. Scale information that indicates the actual magnification, uniform α value information that indicates the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when writing background data, and α data designation information that indicates whether or not α data is applied and the application target are set. The types of the above parameters are the same for the sprite data A as shown in FIG. 20(c).

Coordinate information is not individually set for all pixels forming image data, but one coordinate information is set for one piece of image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. The VDP 76 can recognize that the specified coordinate information is one pixel at the center of the image data, and arranges the image data so that the one pixel at the center is on the specified coordinates. As a result, it is possible to suppress the information volume (that is, the data volume) of the coordinate information to be specified for one image data in the display CPU 72 . In addition, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 do not need to be able to recognize the coordinates of all the pixels of the image data, so the program can be simplified.

Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to the center pixel, and may be, for example, a corner pixel such as an upper left or upper right pixel. Since sprite data and still image data are basically defined as rectangular, by using corner pixels as reference pixels, the display CPU 72 and VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixels.

Further, the uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72 . The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of background data and sprite data, and is pre-stored in the memory module 74 as image data. The α data can vary the transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting the uniform α value.

By setting the uniform α value and α data as described above, in situations where the transparency of background data and sprite data should be uniformly controlled for all pixels instead of finely controlling the transparency for each pixel, the uniform α value can be applied, thereby reducing the required data volume, and by applying the α data, it is possible to finely control the transparency for each pixel.

Drawing processing in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the rendering data specified in the already received rendering list has been created. If the creation of drawing data has been completed, it is determined in step S802 whether or not a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72 . If a new rendering list has been received, then in step S803 processing for handling the reception is executed.

In the receiving process, from the information of the target buffer included in the drawing list, it is determined in which frame area 82a or 82b the drawing data for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is to be drawn.

In the subsequent step S804, a content comprehension process is executed. In the content grasping process, the image data set as the object to be read in the drawing list is read from the memory module 74 and written to the development buffer 81 of the VRAM 75 . In the content grasping process, the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameter information of the image data is grasped. In the writing process, image data to be drawn this time is written in the frame areas 82a and 82b set as creation targets based on the grasping result of the content grasping process in step S804.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the rendering data indicated by the already received rendering list is being created, the processing for updating the rendering list counter is executed in step S806. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the next image data in the drawing order. Then, the processing of steps S804 and S805 is executed for the switched image data. In other words, by executing the drawing process a plurality of times, the drawing data of the image for one frame designated by one drawing list is created.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which only one piece of image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of pieces of image data are processed in one drawing process is also possible. The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each drawing process, and a different number of image data may be processed in each drawing process.

If a negative determination is made in step S802 or after the processing of step S805 is executed, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the display circuit 94 has completed outputting image signals for one frame. If not completed, the drawing process is terminated, and if completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72 in step S808, and then the drawing process is terminated.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within a period of 20 msec. An image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the pattern display device 41 based on the generated drawing data, but since the double-buffer system is adopted as already explained, the output of the image signal is performed in parallel with the generation of the drawing data corresponding to the update timing one frame after the frame corresponding to the output. The display circuit 94 has a selector circuit that alternately switches between the frame areas 82a and 82b to be referred to each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. By switching by the selector circuit, the frame areas 82a and 82b that are drawing data drawing targets in the control unit 91 are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting the image signal.

<Configuration for sharing execution target table>
Next, a configuration for sharing the execution target table will be described.

In this pachinko machine 10, symbols are variably displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 set in the symbol display device 41 in each game round (see FIG. 4(a)). The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set in a plurality of rows such as upper row, middle row and lower row. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, nine types of main patterns '1' to '9' are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and one sub pattern with no number is arranged between each main pattern. Then, when a game cycle is started, the patterns are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in a predetermined direction according to the arrangement order of the patterns in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 from the display mode of the patterns finally stopped and displayed in the previous game cycle. After that, the variable display of the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped. In this case, since the display mode of the finally stop-displayed symbols may be different in each game cycle, the types of symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be different when the game cycle is started.

An example of the variable display mode of the pattern will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 22(a) shows the execution period of the game cycle, FIG. 22(b) shows the acceleration period for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, FIG. 22(c) shows the high speed period for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, FIG. 22(d) shows the low speed period for the upper symbol row Z1, FIG. 22(e) shows the low speed period for the lower symbol row Z3, and FIG.

At the timing of t1, a game round is started as shown in FIG. 22(a). At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 22(b), moving image display is performed such that the fluctuation display speed of symbols in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 gradually increases. The variable display speed in this case is a variable display speed at which the types of symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be identified or easily identified. Since the acceleration period exists in this way, it is possible to set the start mode when the variable display of patterns is started in each game round to a fixed mode, and the player can easily recognize that the game round has started.

After that, at timing t2, the acceleration period ends as shown in FIG. 22(b), and a high-speed period is entered in which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 22(c). In the high-speed period, the variable display speeds of the symbols in all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variable display speeds at which the types of symbols cannot be identified or are difficult to identify. The type of pattern displayed on the display surface P is adjusted during the high speed period. Thus, in a structure in which the stop result of the current game round is determined regardless of the kind of the symbols displayed on the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the start of the current game round, it is possible to adjust the kinds of symbols to be standby-displayed and statically displayed in the respective symbol rows Z1-Z3 while preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display mode of the symbol display device 41.例文帳に追加

After that, at timing t3, as shown in FIG. 22(d), the variable display speed of symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from high speed to low speed. When the low-speed display is performed, the variable display of the symbols is performed at a variable display speed at which the type of symbols can be identified or easily identified. In this case, the low speed display is performed only in the upper symbol row Z1, and the high speed display is continued in the medium symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3.

After that, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 22(d), the low-speed period of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, thereby ending the scrolling display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and starting standby display. Further, at the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 22(e), the variable display speed of symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 is switched from high speed to low speed. In this case, the low speed display is performed only in the lower symbol row Z3, the high speed display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2, and the standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1.

After that, as shown in timing t5 in FIG. 22(e), the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3 ends, and the scrolling display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 ends and standby display starts. Further, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 22(f), the variable display speed of symbols in the medium symbol row Z2 is switched from high speed to low speed. In this case, the low-speed display is performed only in the middle symbol row Z2, and the standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3.

Thereafter, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 22(f), the low speed period of the medium symbol row Z2 ends, whereby the scroll display of the symbols in the medium symbol row Z2 ends and the standby display starts. In this case, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in standby mode, and then all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are statically displayed.

When the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner, an execution object table pre-stored in the memory module 74 is read out, and the display CPU 72 determines the types of symbols to be displayed on the display surface P according to the execution object table, and also determines various parameters such as the arrangement positions of the symbols to be displayed. Here, the kind of symbols stopped and displayed in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 at the start of each game round and the kind of symbols stopped and displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the end of each game round can be different for each game round. For example, the variable display of symbols may be started from the stopped display mode as shown in FIG. 23(a), or the variable display of the symbols may be started from the stopped display mode as shown in FIG. 23(b). Further, for example, the game round may end in the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23(a), or the game round may end in the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23(b). In this case, if an execution object table is to be prepared in advance according to each pattern, it becomes necessary to prepare an execution object table corresponding to each possible mode of the stop display mode at the start of the variable display of the game round, and to prepare an execution object table corresponding to each of the possible modes of the stop display mode at the end of the game round. As a result, the number of types of execution target tables becomes extremely large, and the storage capacity required to store the execution target tables in advance increases.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, a common execution object table is used regardless of the stop display mode at the start of the variable display of the game round, and a common execution object table is used regardless of the stop display mode at the end of the game round. The common execution target table will be described.

The execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the acceleration period, the high speed period and the low speed period. In this case, for the acceleration period, an execution object table is provided so as to be common to all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. On the other hand, the high-speed period and the low-speed period are not shared among the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and an execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The table to be executed is used regardless of whether or not the ready-to-win performance occurs during the acceleration period of all the symbol rows Z1-Z3, the high-speed period of all the symbol rows Z1-Z3, the low-speed period of the upper symbol row Z1 and the low-speed period of the lower symbol row Z3, but the low-speed period of the middle symbol row Z2 is used only when the ready-to-win performance does not occur. When a ready-to-win effect occurs, a dedicated table to be executed corresponding to each ready-to-win effect is used during the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2 without using a common table for execution.

The execution target table is pre-stored in the memory module 74 . Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24(a), the memory module 74 includes an acceleration period storage area 101 prestored with an execution object table for controlling the variable display of the symbols of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the acceleration period, a first high speed period storage area 102 prestored with an execution object table for controlling the variable display of the symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 during the high speed period, and a memory module 74 for controlling the variable display of the symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 during the low speed period. a second high speed period storage area 104 prestored with an execution object table for controlling the variable display of the symbols of the middle symbol row Z2 during the high speed period; a second low speed period storage area 105 prestored with an execution object table for controlling the variable display of the symbols of the middle symbol row Z2 during the low speed period; A third high-speed period storage area 106 pre-stored with a table and a third low-speed period storage area 107 pre-stored with an execution object table for controlling the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 during the low-speed period are provided.

The acceleration period, the high speed period, and the low speed period are not fixed in relation to the variable display time of the game round, and there are a plurality of types, each having a longer or shorter period. In this case, only one type of execution object table for the acceleration period is stored in the acceleration period storage area 101, and the acceleration period controllable by the execution object table for the acceleration period is longer than or equal to the longest acceleration period among the plurality of types of acceleration periods determined in relation to the variable display time of the game round. As a result, even if any type of acceleration period is selected in relation to the variable display time of the game cycle, it is possible to use the execution target table for that one type of acceleration period.

Each of the first high-speed period storage area 102, the second high-speed period storage area 104, and the third high-speed period storage area 106 stores only one type of execution target table for the high-speed period. A high-speed period controllable by a first high-speed period execution object table stored in a first high-speed period storage area 102 is a period equal to or longer than the longest high-speed period among a plurality of types of high-speed periods of the upper symbol row Z1 determined in relation to the variable display time of game rounds. The high speed period controllable by the second high speed period execution object table stored in the second high speed period storage area 104 is longer than the longest high speed period among the plurality of kinds of high speed periods of the medium symbol row Z2 determined in relation to the variable display time of the game cycle. Further, the high speed period controllable by the execution object table for the third high speed period stored in the storage area 106 for the third high speed period is longer than the longest high speed period among the plurality of types of high speed periods of the lower symbol row Z3 determined in relation to the variable display time of the game round. Thus, even if any kind of high-speed period is selected in each of the pattern rows Z1-Z3 in relation to the variable display time of the game cycle, one kind of execution object table for the high-speed period can be used for each of the pattern rows Z1-Z3.

The first low-speed period storage area 103, the second low-speed period storage area 105, and the third low-speed period storage area 107 each store a plurality of types of low-speed period execution target tables. That is, the first low-speed period storage area 103 stores a plurality of types of execution target tables for the first low-speed period so as to correspond one-to-one with the types of low-speed periods of the upper symbol column Z1, the second low-speed period storage area 105 stores a plurality of types of execution-target tables for the second low-speed period so as to correspond one-to-one with the types of low-speed periods of the middle symbol column Z2, and the third low-speed period storage area 107 stores one type of low-speed period of the lower symbol column Z3. A plurality of types of execution target tables for the third low speed period are stored so as to correspond to one another. Since the execution object table for the low speed period is prepared for each type of the low speed period in this way, the standby display of the pattern and the static display of the pattern can be executed at the timing corresponding to each low speed period by controlling the variable display of the pattern using the execution object table for the low speed period.

25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution object table T10 for the acceleration period pre-stored in the acceleration period storage area 101, FIG. 25B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first high-speed period execution object table T11 pre-stored in the first high-speed period storage area 102, and FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first low-speed period execution object table T12 pre-stored in the first low-speed period storage area 103. is. Although the execution object table for the second high-speed period and the execution object table for the third high-speed period differ from the execution object table T11 for the first high-speed period in terms of the maximum value of the pointer information, they are otherwise the same as the execution object table T11 for the first high-speed period. Also, an execution object table of a type different from the first low speed period execution object table T12 stored in the first low speed period storage area 103, a second low speed period execution object table, and a third low speed period execution object table are different from the first low speed period execution object table T12 in terms of the maximum value of the pointer information, but are otherwise the same as the first low speed period execution object table T12.

As shown in FIGS. 25(a), 25(b), and 26, each execution target table T10 to T12 is set with pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame, and in association with each piece of pointer information, a display pattern adjustment area and task content information are set.

Information for specifying the type of pattern to be displayed is set in the display pattern adjustment area. Specifically, information corresponding to one symbol in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set in the displayed symbol adjustment area. Here, three patterns are displayed simultaneously in each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the information set in the adjustment area of the display pattern corresponds to the information of the type of pattern existing at the head in the moving direction of the pattern. Further, as already explained, the total number of symbols arranged in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is different. Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged with 18 symbols including the main symbols and the sub symbols, while the middle symbol row Z2 is arranged with 20 symbols including the main symbols and the sub symbols. Therefore, when the execution object table is used to control the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the information corresponding to any one of "1" to "18" is set in the display symbol adjustment area, and when the execution object table is used to control the variation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, the information corresponding to any one of "1" to "20" is set to the display symbol adjustment area.

For example, when "1" is set in the adjustment area of the display pattern corresponding to the predetermined pointer information in the execution object table for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the main symbol "1", the sub-symbol between "1" and "9", and the main symbol "9" are to be displayed in the frame corresponding to the predetermined pointer information. When '2' is set in the display pattern adjustment area, the sub-pattern between '1' and '9', the main pattern between '9' and the sub-pattern between '9' and '8' are to be displayed in the frame corresponding to the specified pointer information.

In the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols are scroll-displayed as already described, but the types of symbols to be scrolled are the same over a plurality of frames. Therefore, in the display pattern adjustment area, the same pattern information is set over a plurality of consecutive pieces of pointer information. By changing the information set in the display pattern adjustment area as the value of the pointer information increases, the type of pattern to be displayed in the corresponding pattern rows Z1 to Z3 is changed.

The task content information includes parameter information such as coordinate information indicating the arrangement position of the pattern to be used in each frame (that is, the drawing position in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be written in the frame buffer 82) and scale information indicating the size of the pattern to be used. In this case, the coordinate information includes information that determines the arrangement position of each of the three patterns to be displayed in the corresponding frame. Therefore, it is possible to specify information on the coordinates corresponding to each of the three patterns to be displayed specified from the information on the display pattern adjustment area from the information on the content of the task. For example, when "1" is set in the display pattern adjustment area of a plurality of continuous pointer information in the execution object table applied to the upper pattern row Z1, the information of the content of the task corresponding to the plurality of pointer information is set with coordinate information such that the arrangement positions of the main pattern "1", the sub-pattern between "1" and "9", and the main pattern "9" in the corresponding pattern row gradually change in the scroll display direction.

As described above, a plurality of patterns corresponding to the information set in the display pattern adjustment area are to be displayed, and the parameter information of the plurality of patterns is set in the task content information. This rewriting is performed according to the type of symbols to be displayed in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the timing when the use of the corresponding execution object table is started. Further, by scrolling the symbols, the types of the three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 change with the lapse of time. The switching timing of the types of the three symbols to be displayed is predetermined in each of the execution object tables T10 to T12. Therefore, when the adjustment area of the display pattern is rewritten, the pointer information corresponding to the next switching timing from the first pointer information is set as one pointer group, and the pointer information included between one switching timing and the next switching timing is set as one pointer group, the same pattern information is set in the display pattern adjustment area corresponding to each pointer information included in the one pointer group, and different pattern information is set between different pointer groups.

Information for specifying the type of pattern to be displayed is set in the display pattern adjustment area in each of the execution target tables T10 to T12 as already described. As an area for specifying the information to be set in the display pattern adjustment area by the display CPU 72, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. The first adjustment counter 111 corresponds to the upper symbol row Z1, the second adjustment counter 112 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2, and the third adjustment counter 113 corresponds to the lower symbol row Z3.

In each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113, information on the type of symbol present at the head of the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3 when the symbol moves from right to left is set. A display CPU 72 updates the values of adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 to the information of the type of pattern after the change every time the pattern existing at the head of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 is changed to the pattern of the next order. As a result, the information set in each of the adjustment counters 111-113 always corresponds to the type of symbol present at the head of the corresponding symbol sequence Z1-Z3. The display CPU 72 sets information corresponding to the information on the type of symbols set in the adjustment counters 111 to 113 in the display pattern adjustment area of the predetermined execution object table when starting the control of the variable display of the symbols by the predetermined execution object table.

When the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 is started and the top symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 is the main symbol "3" as shown in FIG. 23(a), the value of the first adjustment counter 111 becomes "5". Here, the relationship between the values set in the adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the type of top symbol will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. As already explained, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 have a total of 18 symbols including the main symbols and the sub symbols, whereas the middle symbol row Z2 has a total of 20 symbols including the main symbols and the sub symbols.

In the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113, as shown in FIG. 27(a), values "1" to "18" can be taken, and each value corresponds to a total of 18 symbols in each of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 on a one-to-one basis. In this case, odd numbers correspond to main symbols, and even numbers correspond to sub symbols. In the upper symbol row Z1, the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the right-to-left scrolling direction, whereas in the lower symbol row Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the right-to-left scrolling direction.

In the case of the second adjustment counter 112, as shown in FIG. 27(b), values "1" to "20" can be taken, and each value corresponds one-to-one with each of the total 20 symbols in the middle symbol row Z2. In this case, the relationship between the values of "1" to "18" and the type of leading symbol is the same as in the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113. FIG. The value of '19' corresponds to the main pattern of '4' additionally arranged between the main pattern of '9' and the main pattern of '1', and the value of '20' corresponds to the sub-pattern between the main pattern of '4' and the main pattern of '1'.

The manner of setting information for the adjustment area of the displayed symbols will be described by taking as an example the case of setting the manner of variable display of the symbols during the acceleration period, the high speed period and the low speed period in the upper symbol row Z1. 28A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution object table T10 for the acceleration period, FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution object table T11 for the first high speed period, and FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution object table T12 for the first low speed period. The setting manner of information for the display pattern adjustment area of the execution object table corresponding to each of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 is the same as the setting manner of the information for the adjustment area of the display pattern of the execution object table corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1, although the upper symbol row Z1 has the symbols arranged in descending order, whereas the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 differ in that the symbols are arranged in ascending order.

When the game round effect is started in the state shown in FIG. 23(a), the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is "5". In the upper symbol row Z1, the symbols are arranged so that the main symbols are arranged in descending order with respect to the scroll direction from right to left. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28(a), "5" corresponding to the current top symbol is set for the first pointer group in the display symbol adjustment area in the acceleration period execution object table T10 read from the acceleration period storage area 101 and corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1, and the symbols to be controlled in this case are the "3" main symbol, the sub-symbols between "3" and "2", and the "2" main symbol. For the next-order pointer group, "4" corresponding to the next-order pattern is set for the current head pattern, for the next-order pointer group, "3" corresponding to the next-order pattern is set for the next-order pattern, and for the next-order pointer group, "2" corresponding to the next-order pattern is set for the next-order pattern. That is, numerical values are set for the adjustment area of the display pattern so that the numbers are in descending order toward the pointer group on the rear side.

When control of the acceleration period of the upper symbol row Z1 by the acceleration period execution object table T10 in which the display symbol adjustment area is set as described above is completed, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is "1". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28(b), "1" corresponding to the current top symbol is set for the first pointer group, and "18" corresponding to the next-order symbol to the current top symbol is set for the next-order pointer group, as shown in FIG. 28(b). That is, since 18 patterns circulate while scrolling from right to left in the upper pattern row Z1, "18" is set in the display pattern adjustment area in the pointer group existing in the next order to the pointer group in which "1" is set in the display pattern adjustment area. Further, values are set in the adjustment area of the display pattern so as to be serial numbers and in descending numerical order for the subsequent pointer groups.

Here, as already explained, the high speed period that can be controlled by the execution object table T11 for the first high speed period is a period that is equal to or longer than the longest high speed period among the plurality of types of high speed periods of the upper symbol row Z1 that are determined in relation to the variable display time of the game cycle. In this case, when it is time to use the first high-speed period execution object table T11, values are set for all display pattern adjustment areas in the first high-speed period execution object table T11 regardless of the current high-speed period. However, when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high-speed period is completed, the control by the first high-speed period execution object table T11 is ended, and the control is switched to the first low-speed period execution object table T12. In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high speed period is completed, the control by the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period ends.

Note that this also applies to the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period. In other words, as already explained, the acceleration period that can be controlled by the execution object table T10 for the acceleration period is longer than the longest acceleration period among the plurality of types of acceleration periods of each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 that are determined in relation to the variable display time of the game cycle. In this case, when it is time to use the execution object table T10 for the acceleration period, values are set for all display pattern adjustment areas in the execution object table T10 for the acceleration period, regardless of the current acceleration period. In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period ends.

In FIG. 28(b), when the pointer group with "17" set in the adjustment area of the display pattern corresponds to the end timing of the current high speed period, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is "16". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 29, "16" corresponding to the current top symbol is set for the first pointer group in the display pattern adjustment area in the execution object table T12 for the first low speed period read out from the first low speed period storage area 103, and values are set in the display pattern adjustment area so as to be consecutive and in descending numerical order for the subsequent pointer groups.

As described above, the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 are used to set the values of the display pattern adjustment areas in the execution object tables T10 to T12. Thus, even if the execution object tables T10 to T12 are used for a plurality of types of situations, it is possible to control the variable display of the pattern in a mode corresponding to the type of the pattern displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加

A specific processing configuration for controlling the variable display of symbols while also using the execution object table will be described below. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing command handling processing executed by the display CPU 72 . Note that command handling processing is executed at step S603 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 18).

If a command for starting variation has been received from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 (step S901: YES), the execution target table for the acceleration period is read from the acceleration period storage area 101 to the work RAM 73 (step S902). In this case, since the execution object table for the acceleration period is read corresponding to each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, a total of three execution object tables for the acceleration period are read into the work RAM 73. However, all of these three acceleration period execution target tables are of the same type.

After that, for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3, the execution target table for the high speed period is read from the storage areas 102, 104 and 106 for the high speed period to the work RAM 73 (step S903). Specifically, the execution object table for the first high speed period corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 is read from the first high speed period storage area 102, the execution object table for the second high speed period corresponding to the middle symbol row Z2 is read from the second high speed period storage area 104, and the execution object table for the third high speed period corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3 is read from the storage area 106 for the third high speed period.

After that, it is determined whether or not the ready-to-win effect will occur in the current game round from the information of the variable display time in the current game round included in the command for starting the variation (step S904). When the ready-to-win effect does not occur (step S904: NO), the execution object table for the low speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game round is read out from the storage areas 103, 105 and 107 for the low speed period to the work RAM 73 for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 (step S905). As already explained, a plurality of types of low-speed periods are set for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the low-speed periods correspond to the variable display times of game rounds. Therefore, in step S905, the execution target table for the low speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game round is read. Specifically, the execution target table for the first low speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the current low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1) is read out from the first low speed period storage area 103, the execution target table for the second low speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the current low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2) is read from the second low speed period storage area 105, and the current variable display time (that is, the current low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3) is read from the third low speed period storage area 107. The execution object table for the corresponding third low speed period is read.

When the ready-to-win effect occurs (step S904: YES), the execution object table for the low speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game round is read from the first low speed period storage area 103 and the third low speed period storage area 107 to the work RAM 73 for each of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 (step S906). Specifically, the first low speed period execution table corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the current low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1) is read from the first low speed period storage area 103, and the execution target table for the third low speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the current low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3) is read from the third low speed period storage area 107. After that, a dedicated execution object table corresponding to the present ready-to-win effect is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S907).

When the processing of step S905 or step S907 is executed, information setting processing corresponding to the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 is executed for the display pattern adjustment area in the execution target table for each acceleration period read out in step S902 (step S908). In the setting process, with respect to the execution object table for the acceleration period read out for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is set for the display symbol adjustment area corresponding to the first pointer group, and for the subsequent pointer groups, the values are set in the display symbol adjustment areas so that the numbers are consecutive and in descending numerical order for each pointer group. In addition, in the execution object table for the acceleration period read out for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, the value of the second adjustment counter 112 is set for the display symbol adjustment area corresponding to the first pointer group, and for the subsequent pointer groups, the values are set in the display symbol adjustment areas so that the numbers are consecutive for each pointer group and are in ascending numerical order. Further, in the execution object table for the acceleration period read out for controlling the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3, the value of the third adjustment counter 113 is set for the display symbol adjustment area corresponding to the first pointer group, and for the subsequent pointer groups, the values are set in the display symbol adjustment areas so that the numbers are consecutive and in ascending numerical order for each pointer group.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, or if the process of step S908 is executed, other processes are executed (step S909). In other processing, when a command different from the command for starting fluctuation is received, processing corresponding to the received command is executed.

Next, normal fluctuation calculation processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal variation arithmetic processing is executed in the symbol arithmetic processing of step S705 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the game round effect is being executed and the ready-to-win effect is not being performed.

First, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001). The update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 corresponds to the case where the pointer information currently being referred to in the execution object table used for the upper symbol row Z1 is the pointer information of the last order in one pointer group. If it is time to update the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1002). If the value of the first adjustment counter 111 after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S1003: YES), the maximum value "18" is set in the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1004).

In step S1005, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113 . The update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 corresponds to the case where the pointer information currently being referred to in the execution object table used for the middle symbol row Z2 is the last pointer information in one pointer group. The update timing of the third adjustment counter 113 corresponds to the case where the pointer information currently being referred to in the execution object table used for the lower symbol row Z3 is the pointer information of the last order in one pointer group.

If it is time to update the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113 (step S1005: YES), 1 is added to the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated this time (step S1006). In this case, only one of the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 may be updated, or both the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 may be updated. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated after the addition of 1 have exceeded the maximum value (step S1007). In this case, the maximum value of the second adjustment counter 112 is "20", and the maximum value of the third adjustment counter 113 is "18". When the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated exceed the maximum values, the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 exceeding the maximum values are set to the minimum value "1" (step S1008).

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not there is a table at the switching timing among the execution target tables used in each of the upper symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2 and lower symbol row Z3. If the switching timing is the acceleration period, the current pointer information in the execution object table for the acceleration period corresponds to the last pointer information of the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the acceleration period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game round. Since the acceleration period is constant for all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the timing of switching from the execution object table for the acceleration period to the execution object table for the high speed period occurs simultaneously for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. If the switching timing is a high-speed period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the high-speed period corresponds to the last pointer information of the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the high-speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game round in the corresponding pattern rows Z1 to Z3. Since the high speed period is different for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the switching timing from the execution object table for the high speed period to the execution object table for the low speed period occurs individually for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

When it is time to switch the table to be executed for any one of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 (step S1009: YES), the execution object table to be used is changed (step S1010). In this case, the execution target table to be used is changed for all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the switching timing. In the change processing, if the execution object table for the acceleration period is to be used, the object to be used is changed to the execution object table for the high speed period that has already been read into the work RAM 73 in step S903 in the command handling process (FIG. 30).

After that, a setting process based on the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the execution target table is executed for the adjustment area of the display pattern in the execution target table newly determined to be used. The contents of the setting process are as described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. As a result, the content of the execution target table newly determined as the target to be used is changed to correspond to the current display content of the symbol.

When a negative determination is made in step S1009, or when the processing of step S1011 is executed, pointer update processing is executed (step S1012). In the pointer update process, the pointer information to be referenced in the execution target table to be used is updated to the pointer information in the next order for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3. However, the pointer information update process is not executed for the pattern columns Z1 to Z3 whose execution target table to be used has been changed in the current process of the normal fluctuation calculation process.

After that, the type of image data corresponding to the pattern to be displayed is grasped for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3 (step S1013). At the time of grasping, from the value of the adjustment area of the display pattern corresponding to the current pointer information in the execution object table used in each of the pattern strings Z1 to Z3, the head pattern type in the pattern strings Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the execution object table is grasped, and the following two kinds of pattern types are grasped. Further, such grasping of the types of symbols is performed for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

After that, various parameter information of all symbols to be displayed this time is grasped from the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the execution object table used in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The parameter information includes coordinates of three symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, coordinates of three symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, and coordinates of three symbols in the lower symbol row Z3.

When the normal variation arithmetic processing is executed as described above, the pattern recognized in step S1013 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Also, parameter information to be applied to these patterns is set in the drawing list.

As described above, since the execution target table for controlling the variable display of symbols is used in various situations, the number of execution target tables stored in advance in the memory module 74 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for pre-storing the execution target table in the memory module 74 . Further, even if the execution object table is shared, the types of symbols to be displayed are adjusted using the adjustment counters 111 to 113, so that the variable display of the symbols can be appropriately controlled.

There is only one type of execution object table for the acceleration period, and the acceleration period controllable by the execution object table for the acceleration period is longer than or equal to the longest acceleration period among a plurality of types of acceleration periods determined in relation to the variable display time of game rounds. Then, regardless of the type of acceleration period, the execution object table for the acceleration period is used, and the range of pointer information referred to in the execution object table is changed in relation to the type of acceleration period to be executed. As a result, the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period can be reduced, and the memory capacity required for pre-storing the execution target tables in the memory module 74 can be reduced. In particular, one type of execution object table for the acceleration period is commonly used for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period.

Only one type of execution object table for the high speed period is prepared for each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, and the high speed period controllable by the execution object table for each high speed period is longer than the longest high speed period among a plurality of kinds of high speed periods determined in relation to the variable display time of the game rounds for the corresponding pattern rows Z1 to Z3. Then, for one pattern sequence Z1 to Z3, one type of execution object table for the high speed period is used regardless of the kind of high speed period, and the range of pointer information referred to in the execution object table is changed in relation to the type of the high speed period to be executed. This makes it possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the high-speed period, and to reduce the storage capacity required for pre-storing the execution target tables in the memory module 74 .

Even in the configuration in which the numbers of the execution target tables for the acceleration period and the number of the execution target tables for the high speed period are suppressed as described above, the switching of the execution target tables is performed at the timing when the control by the pointer information of the last order in the pointer group to be referenced is completed. As a result, control can be started from the pointer information of the first order in one pointer group in the newly used execution object table, so that the execution object table can be appropriately switched.

In each execution object table, a display pattern adjustment area is set in one-to-one correspondence with the content of the task in each piece of pointer information. By adjusting the information set in the display pattern adjustment area, the type of pattern to which the content of each task is applied is changed. This makes it possible to grasp the type of pattern to which the task content information is applied at each update timing simply by referring to each execution target table.

Further, when starting to use the execution target table, information on the type of pattern is set for each of the display pattern adjustment areas included in the execution target table. As a result, it is not necessary to execute the processing for changing the information of the adjustment area of the display pattern for the table to be executed during the execution of the control using the table to be executed, so that the processing configuration during the execution of the performance for the game cycle can be simplified.

<Alternative form regarding shared use of execution target table>
- The table to be executed may not have a display pattern adjustment area. In this case, by setting at least the information on the trigger for switching the values of the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the information on the task in the execution object table, the types of patterns to be displayed can be grasped from the adjustment counters 111 to 113. According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the data volume of the execution target table in that it is not necessary to set the display pattern adjustment area in the execution target table.

・When all types of individual images are subject to control during a control period using one execution target table, the types of individual images to which the execution target table is applied are always the same, but the order of the individual images to which the execution target table is applied may differ from game to game. Therefore, in this case, although the types of individual images to which the execution target table is applied are not adjusted, the order of the individual images to which the execution target table is applied is adjusted.

The above-described configuration that shares the execution target table may be applied to the configuration in which only one type of individual image out of a plurality of types of individual images is used to perform the specific variation display. In this case, in the execution target table, information is set in chronological order for determining the operation content of the individual image to be the execution target of the specific variable display, and the type of the individual image to which the information is applied is adjusted.

Instead of the structure in which the execution object table for the acceleration period is provided in common for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the structure may be such that the execution object table for the acceleration period is provided for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Further, the execution target table for the high speed period may be provided so as to be commonly used for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

The switching between the execution target table for the acceleration period and the execution target table for the high speed period is not limited to the timing at which the control by the pointer information of the last order in the pointer group to be referenced is completed, and may be performed at the timing when the control by other pointer information is completed. However, the timing at which the switching occurs is preferably set as the timing at which the control based on the pointer information in the predetermined order in the pointer group is completed, regardless of which acceleration period or high speed period.

<Configuration for performing loop display effects>
Next, a configuration for performing a loop display effect will be described.

32(a) and 32(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the loop display effect. In the loop display effect, as shown in FIG. 32(a), a loop display character G4 is displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3 that enable notification of the content corresponding to the result of the determination by the MPU 62 of the main control device 50, and a loop display background G5 is displayed behind the loop display character G4. In addition, in the loop display effect, the types of symbols G1 to G3 are different from those in FIG. 4(b), and the variation display of symbols in a plurality of symbol rows is also different from that in FIG. 4(b). Specifically, three cubic base pattern images G6 to G8 are displayed side by side, and numerical patterns G1 to G3 are displayed in front of each of the base pattern images G6 to G8. When the patterns are varied and displayed, the base pattern images G6 to G8 are rotated in the vertical direction around a rotation axis extending horizontally so as to pass through the centers of the base pattern images G6 to G8, and the patterns G1 to G3 displayed in front of the respective base pattern images G6 to G8 are changed along with the rotation. 4(b) and the pattern display mode shown in FIG. 32(a) are arbitrary, for example, there are a plurality of types of display modes, and the first display mode may be the pattern display mode shown in FIG. 4(b), and the second display mode may be the pattern display mode shown in FIG. 32(a).

In the loop display effect, the loop display character G4 is displayed so as to repeat a series of actions. Specifically, in a situation where the base symbol images G6 to G8 are not rotated, as shown in FIG. 32(a), the loop display character G4 is displayed so as to repeat the stationary action over the stationary unit period in the stationary display state (this display content is also referred to as the stationary display). For example, the motion while stationary is such that the loop display character G4 moves up and down with its arms folded. On the other hand, when one of the base symbol images G6 to G8 is displayed in rotation, as shown in FIG. 32(b), the loop display character G4 is displayed so as to repeat the moving action over the moving unit period in a display state in which the character is moving in a predetermined direction (this display content is also referred to as "moving display"). As the action during movement, for example, an action in which the loop display character G4 is running in a predetermined direction can be considered.

In the loop display effect, the background G5 for loop display is displayed so that the player can recognize that the background is continuously displayed at one place without causing scrolling of the background as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in a situation where the loop display character G4 is moving, as shown in FIG. 32(b), the loop display background G5 is displayed as if the background image is scrolling in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction as the loop display character G4 is displayed as if it were moving in a predetermined direction. In this case, the loop display background G5 is displayed such that a series of background images scrolls over the background movement unit period, and the series of background images are displayed such that the scrolling of the series of background images is repeated each time the background movement unit period elapses.

The flow of the loop display effects will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 33(a) shows the execution period of the game cycle, FIG. 33(b) shows the flow of periodic display of the loop display character G4 in a situation in which the moving action is being performed, FIG. 33(c) shows the flow of periodic display of the loop display character G4 in a situation in which the stationary action is being performed, and FIG. 33(d) shows the flow of scroll display of the loop display background G5.

At the timing of t1, the game cycle is started as shown in FIG. 33(a), thereby starting the variable display of the symbols G1 to G3. Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIGS. 33(b) and 33(c), the loop display character G4 starts the moving action from the state in which the stationary action is being performed, and as shown in FIG. 33(d), the loop display background G5 also starts scroll display.

After that, until timing t6, which is the timing at which the current game cycle ends, the loop display character G4 repeats the motion during movement, and the loop display background G5 repeats a series of scroll display of the background images. Specifically, the loop display character G4 performs one moving action in each of the moving unit periods Tc1 from timing t1 to timing t2, from timing t2 to timing t3, and from timing t3 to timing t4. In this case, the next one execution of the motion during movement is started at the timing of t2 when one execution of the motion during movement is completed, the next execution of the motion during movement is started at the timing of t3 when one execution of the motion during movement is completed, and the next execution of the motion during movement is started at the timing of t4 when one execution of the motion during movement is completed. In addition, the display mode of the loop display character G4 is the same at the start timing of each execution of the motion during movement, and the display mode of the loop display character G4 is the same at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution of the motion during movement.

In addition, the loop display background G5 performs one scroll display of a series of background images during the background movement unit period Tc2 from timing t1 to timing t5. In this case, at the timing t5 when one execution of the scroll display of the series of background images ends, the next one execution of the scroll display is started. Further, the display mode of the loop display background G5 is the same at the start timing of each execution of the scroll display, and the display mode of the loop display background G5 is the same at the timing when the same time has passed from the start timing of the execution of the scroll display.

In the above configuration, the moving unit period Tc1 is shorter than the background moving unit period Tc2. Therefore, even if one execution of the moving action in the loop display character G4 and one execution of the scroll display of the series of background images in the loop display background G5 are started at the same time, the end timing of each execution is different. In addition, the number of times the movement action is performed once in one game cycle may be different from the number of times the scrolling display of the series of background images is performed once in one game time.

After that, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the game round ends, so that the loop display character G4 is switched from the moving action to the stationary action as shown in FIGS. In this case, although the timing t6 is the timing in the middle of one execution of the moving action of the loop display character G4, the moving action ends at the middle timing and the stationary action starts. Further, the timing t6 is the timing in the middle of one execution in the scroll display of a series of background images in the loop display background G5, and the stop display of the loop display background G5 is started in the displayed state at the timing t6.

At the timing t6, the loop display character G4 starts the stationary action, and the loop display character G4 repeats the stationary action until the timing t10 at which the next game round is started. Specifically, the loop display character G4 performs one stop action during each of the stop unit periods Tc3 from timing t6 to timing t7, from timing t7 to timing t8, and from timing t8 to timing t9. In this case, the next execution of the motion during suspension is started at the timing of t7 when one execution of the motion during suspension is completed, the next execution of the motion during suspension is started at the timing of t8 when one execution of the motion during suspension is completed, and the next execution of the motion during suspension is started at the timing of t9 when one execution of the motion during suspension is completed. In addition, the display mode of the loop display character G4 is the same at the start timing of each execution time of the action while stationary, and the display mode of the loop display character G4 is the same at the timing when the same time has passed since the start timing of the execution time of the action while stationary. The stationary unit period Tc3 is shorter than the moving unit period Tc1. Therefore, in the case of comparison in the same execution period, the number of times one execution of the action during stationary is performed is greater than the number of times one execution of the action during movement is performed.

After that, at the timing of t10, a new game round is started as shown in FIG. 33(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the timing t10 is the timing in which the loop display character G4 is in the middle of one execution of the stationary motion, but the loop display character G4 starts the moving motion from the state in which it is performing the stationary motion. Then, the loop display character G4 repeats the motion while moving in the same manner as in the case of timing t1 to timing t6.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33(d), the loop display background G5 is stop-displayed with the contents of the background image at that time when the previous game round ends at the timing t6, and the stop-display state continues until the timing t10. Therefore, at the timing of t10 when a new game round is started, the series of scroll display of the background images is restarted from the stopped display state. In other words, the scroll display of the series of background images is temporarily stopped from the timing of t6 to the timing of t10, and the scroll display of the series of background images is resumed at the timing of t10 while continuing the flow up to the timing of t6.

When the scroll display effect is executed as described above, both the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 are displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3, and while the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 both repeat a series of displays for a predetermined period during the execution of the game round, the loop display character G4 repeats the stationary action in a situation where the game round is not executed, whereas the scrolling display of the series of background images is stopped in the loop display background G5. be done. In this case, if a table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 is set as the same table, it is necessary to prepare a table during a non-game turn and prepare a number of times corresponding to all the timings at which the table during the non-game turn can be stop-displayed in the loop display background G5, or to fix the timing at which the loop display background G5 is stop-displayed. If the number of tables during non-game rounds is prepared corresponding to all the timings that can be stop-displayed in the loop display background G5, the number of the tables increases and the memory capacity of the memory module 74 is squeezed, and if the timing of stop-displaying in the loop display background G5 is fixed, the display mode of the loop display background G5 during the non-game rounds becomes uniform regardless of the timing at which the game rounds end.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and a table for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are prepared separately. The contents of the data pre-stored in the memory module 74 for executing the loop display effects will be described below with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. 34(a).

As shown in FIG. 34(a), an image data group 121 for loop display is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as data for performing a loop display effect. The loop display image data group 121 includes image data for displaying the base pattern images G6 to G8, image data for displaying the patterns G1 to G3 in the base pattern images G6 to G8, image data for displaying the loop display character G4, and image data for displaying the loop display background G5. In this case, the image data for displaying the loop display character G4 includes a plurality of types of image data used when performing the stationary motion and a plurality of types of image data used when performing the moving motion. There are also multiple types of image data for displaying the loop display background G5.

In the memory module 74, in addition to the image data group 121 for loop display, a character stopping table 122, a character moving table 123, and a background table 124 are stored in advance. The character dwelling table 122 is a table referred to in order to cause the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform the dwelling motion. The character movement table 123 is a table referred to in order to cause the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform the action during movement. The background table 124 is a table referred to for scrolling a series of background images when the loop display character G4 is moving.

35(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character staying table 122, FIG. 35(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character moving table 123, and FIG. 35(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the background table 124. As shown in FIGS. 35(a) to 35(c), each of the tables 122 to 124 has pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame set therein, and task content information is set in association with each piece of pointer information. The task content information includes information for specifying the type of image data to be displayed in each corresponding frame, and parameter information such as coordinate information indicating the arrangement position of the image data set as the display target (that is, the drawing position in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be written in the frame buffer 82) and scale information indicating the size of the image data set as the display target.

Specifically, in the character dwell table 122, pointer information (“0” to “99”) for the number of frames corresponding to the dwell unit period Tc3 is set. The contents of the task corresponding to each piece of pointer information are set with the type of image data of the loop display character G4 and parameter information to be applied to the image data for displaying the loop display character G4 at one timing of the motion during stop in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. When the timing of drawing an image for one frame comes, the pointer information next to the pointer information that was the reference target at the previous drawing timing becomes the current reference target, and display control of the loop display character G4 is executed according to the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information, so that the loop display character G4 performs an action during suspension. Further, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the character dwelling table 122 is completed during the period in which the loop display character G4 is made to perform the dwelling action, the pointer information to be referred to returns to the first pointer information of the character dwelling table 122.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to repeatedly execute the motion while stationary by using the character dwell table 122 in which display control data corresponding to one execution of the motion while stationary is set.

In the character movement table 123, pointer information (“0” to “199”) for the number of frames corresponding to the moving unit period Tc1 is set. The contents of the task corresponding to each piece of pointer information are set with the type of image data of the loop display character G4 and parameter information to be applied to the image data for displaying the loop display character G4 at one timing during movement in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. When it is time to draw an image for one frame, pointer information next to the pointer information referred to at the previous drawing timing becomes a current reference target, and display control of the loop display character G4 is executed in accordance with the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information, whereby the loop display character G4 moves during movement. In addition, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the character movement table 123 is completed during the period in which the loop display character G4 is caused to perform the moving action, the pointer information to be referred to returns to the first pointer information of the character movement table 123.例文帳に追加As a result, by using the character movement table 123 in which display control data corresponding to one execution of the moving action is set, the moving action can be repeatedly executed.

The background table 124 is set with pointer information (“0” to “599”) for the number of frames corresponding to the background moving unit period Tc2. In the content of the task corresponding to each piece of pointer information, the type of image data of the loop display background G5 for displaying at one timing of the scroll display in the loop display background G5 in the frame corresponding to the pointer information and the parameter information for applying to the image data are set. When the drawing timing of the image for one frame comes, the pointer information next to the pointer information referred to at the previous drawing timing becomes the current reference target, and the display control of the loop display background G5 is executed according to the content of the task corresponding to the pointer information, whereby a series of background images are scrolled and displayed in the loop display background G5. Further, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information of the background table 124 is completed during the period of scrolling the loop display background G5, the pointer information to be referred to returns to the first pointer information of the background table 124.例文帳に追加As a result, scroll display can be repeatedly executed using the background table 124 in which display control data corresponding to one execution of scroll display is set.

In the configuration in which the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately provided, in order to synchronize the start of the motion of the loop display character G4 while stationary and the stop of the scroll display of the loop display background G5, and to synchronize the start of the motion of the loop display character G4 and the start of the scroll display of the loop display background G5, as shown in FIG. The RAM 73 is provided with an interlocking flag 125 . A state in which "1" is set to the interlocking flag 125 corresponds to a situation in which the loop display character G4 is moving and in a situation in which "1" is set to the interlocking flag 125, scroll display of the loop display background G5 is performed. On the other hand, the state in which the interlocking flag is "0" corresponds to the state in which the loop display character G4 is performing the stationary action, and in the state in which the interlocking flag 125 is "0", the scrolling display of the loop display background G5 is stopped.

As described above, the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared, so that when the timing comes to end the game round, updating of the pointer information of the background table 124 is stopped to stop and display the loop display background G5. It is possible to cause the character G4 to perform a stationary display. Therefore, it is possible to end the scroll display of the loop display background G5 at an arbitrary timing and start the stop display in accordance with the timing of the end of the game cycle. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of types of tables during non-game times corresponding to the arbitrary timing, the number of tables for controlling loop display performance can be suppressed, and the storage capacity for pre-storing the tables can be suppressed.

It should be noted that there are four or more types of timings at which the scrolling display of the loop display background G5 is stopped in relation to the timing at which the game cycle ends.

A specific processing configuration for executing the loop display effect will be described below. FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing character loop arithmetic processing executed by the display CPU 72 . Note that the arithmetic processing for the character loop is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the loop display effect should be executed.

If it is determined that it is time to start a game cycle based on the currently read execution target table (step S1101: YES), the character movement table 123 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as the target table (step S1102). Thereafter, "1" is set in the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1103), and the pointer information to be referenced in the character movement table 123 is cleared to "0" (step S1104). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the contents of the task corresponding to the first pointer information in the character movement table 123 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. In step S1113, information set in the contents of the task corresponding to the first pointer information in the character movement table 123 is used to derive and comprehend the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time.

If it is determined that it is time to end the game cycle based on the currently read execution target table (step S1105: YES), the character stop table 122 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as the target table (step S1106). After that, the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1107), and the pointer information to be referenced in the character stop table 122 is cleared to "0" (step S1108). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information in the character stop table 122 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. In step S1113, information set in the contents of the task corresponding to the first pointer information in the character dwell table 122 is used to derive and comprehend the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time.

If this time is neither the start timing nor the end timing of the game cycle (steps S1101 and S1105: NO), the pointer information of the table to be used out of the character movement table 123 and the character stop table 122 is updated (step S1109). Specifically, update processing is performed so as to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. If the updated pointer information exceeds the maximum value of pointer information in the table to be used (step S1110: YES), "0" is cleared to return the pointer information to the initial value (step S1111). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the tables 122 and 123 to be used is grasped as the image data to be used this time. In step S1113, information set in the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the tables 122 and 123 to be used is used to derive and comprehend the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time.

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for a background loop executed by the display CPU 72. As shown in FIG. Note that the arithmetic processing for the background loop is executed in the arithmetic processing for the background in step S703 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the loop display effect should be executed.

If "1" is set in the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1201: YES), the pointer information to be referenced in the background table 124 is updated (step S1202). Specifically, update processing is performed so as to add 1 to the value of the pointer information. If the updated pointer information exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the background table 124 (step S1203: YES), the pointer information is cleared to the initial value (step S1204). After that, the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1205). Also, using the information set in the task contents corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124, the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time is derived and grasped (step S1206).

If "1" is not set in the interlocking flag (step S1201: NO), the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124 is grasped as the image data to be used this time, so that the image data of the same loop display background G5 as the previous time is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1207). Further, by grasping the parameter information set in the area for storing the parameter information to be applied to the image data in the work RAM 73 as it is as the parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time, the same parameter information of the loop display background G5 as the previous time is grasped as the parameter information to be used this time (step S1208).

When the arithmetic processing for the character loop and the arithmetic processing for the background loop are executed as described above, the image data ascertained in steps S1112 and S1205 or S1207 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Parameter information to be applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

As described above, the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately prepared, so that when the timing comes to end the game round, updating of the pointer information of the background table 124 is stopped to stop and display the loop display background G5. It is possible to cause the character G4 to perform a stationary display. Therefore, it is possible to end the scroll display of the loop display background G5 at an arbitrary timing and start the stop display in accordance with the timing of the end of the game cycle. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of types of tables during non-game times corresponding to the arbitrary timing, the number of tables for controlling loop display performance can be suppressed, and the storage capacity for pre-storing the tables can be suppressed.

Dedicated pointer information is set in the tables 122, 123 for display control of the loop display character G4, and dedicated pointer information is set in the table 124 for display control of the loop display background G5, so that while one of the tables 122, 123, 124 is not used, the other pointer information can be continuously updated or the other pointer information can be held as predetermined information.

As tables for performing display control of the loop display character G4, a character stop table 122 for causing the loop display character G4 to display during stop and a character movement table 123 for causing the loop display character G4 to display during movement are separately provided. As a result, when switching the variable display mode of the loop display character G4, it is only necessary to switch the tables 122 and 123 to be used, and it is possible to suitably switch the variable display mode. Further, as the switching timing, it is possible to set arbitrary timing while suppressing the number of tables.

By repeatedly looping and using the character stopping table 122, the loop displaying character G4 is repeatedly displayed during stopping, and by repeatedly looping and using the character moving table 123, the loop displaying character G4 is repeatedly displayed during movement. This makes it possible to suppress the data capacity of these tables 122 and 123 .

By repeatedly looping and using the background table 124, the scroll display of the loop display background G5 is repeated. In this case, the number of image update timings required for the loop display background G5 to make one rotation differs from the number of image update timings required for the moving display of the loop display character G4 to make one rotation. In this configuration, a character movement table 123 for displaying the loop display character G4 during movement and a background table 124 for scrolling the loop display background G5 are separately provided, so that only information corresponding to one round can be set in each of the tables 123 and 124, and unnecessary information exceeding one round does not need to be set.

When the moving display of the loop display character G4 is started by using the character moving table 123, the scroll display of the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is started by setting "1" to the interlocking flag 125, and the scrolling display of the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is finished by clearing the interlocking flag 125 to "0" when ending the moving display of the loop display character G4. Thus, in an execution object table for controlling the overall flow of the loop display presentation, it is only necessary to set the information of the start timing and end timing of the moving display for the loop display character G4, and the information of the start timing and end timing of the scroll display for the loop display background G5 need not be set. Therefore, it is possible to interlock the movements of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 while suppressing the amount of data preset in the data table.

<Another form of loop display effects>
When the loop display character G4 is performing a stationary action, the relative position of the building image with respect to the loop display character G4 in the loop display background G5 is not changed, but the display mode such as the degree of lighting of the building image, the color of the sky scenery image, the presence or absence of the sky cloud image, and the display position may be changed. In this case, since the display mode of the loop display background G5 is changed even in a situation where the scroll display is stopped in the loop display background G5, it is preferable to separately provide a table for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 in this situation.

The scroll display of the loop display background G5 may be continued regardless of whether or not the loop display character G4 is being displayed during movement. Even in this case, by differentiating the table between the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5, it is possible to prepare a table corresponding to the operation of the individual images G4 and G5 for one round, eliminating the need to set useless information exceeding one round. This is the same even when the loop display character G4 continues to be displayed during movement and the loop display background G5 continues to scroll.

- In a situation where the loop display character G4 continues to be displayed while moving, the type of the loop display background G5 may be changed. Even with this configuration, by separately providing a table for controlling the loop display character G4 and a table for controlling the loop display background G5, it is only necessary to switch the table for controlling the loop display background G5 when switching the loop display background G5, and the table for controlling the loop display character G4 can be used as it is.

The interlocking flag 125 may not be provided, and in the execution target table for controlling the entire loop display effect, information on the switching timing between the stop display and the moving display in the loop display character G4 and information on the start timing and stop timing of the scroll display in the loop display background G5 may be set.

<Structure for performing group display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a group display effect will be described.

38(a) and 38(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the group display effect. The group display effect is an effect in which a large number of group display characters G11 are displayed as if they are grouped together and move in the group display direction. The group display character G11 is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as representing a person having a face, a body, both hands, and both legs. Also, each group display character G11 is displayed so as to be recognized by the player as being the same or similar characters, although the contents of actions such as limbs are different. The group display characters G11 are displayed as a group across the pattern display device 41 in one direction for a group display period (for example, 3 seconds). Comparing the case of FIG. 38(a) with the case of FIG. 38(b), the display position of the group display character G11 shown in FIG. 38(a) is shifted leftward as a whole in FIG. 38(b). Also, each group display character G11 is displayed in a shape that allows the player to recognize that they are moving as a group in the moving direction.

The moving direction of the group display characters G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction. Some of the group display characters G11 may move from a predetermined end of the pattern display device 41 toward the center, and the remaining group display characters G11 may be displayed so as to move from the end opposite to the predetermined end of the pattern display device 41 toward the center.

The moving image data 131 for group display is used as image data for displaying the group display character G11 in the group display effect. Moving image data is image data that is interframe-compressed so as to have a plurality of differential data based on one frame of still image data, and is encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 system. When the moving image data is decoded, it is developed into still image data for a plurality of frames.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the moving image data 131 for group display. As shown in FIG. 39, in moving image data 131 for group display, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data of each frame. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data includes one frame of I-picture data corresponding to reference data, a plurality of frames of P-picture data corresponding to first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B-picture data corresponding to second difference data.

The I-picture data is data capable of creating one frame of still image data by itself when decoding. The P-picture data is data capable of generating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data of one frame or a plurality of frames before when decoding. B-picture data is data that can generate still image data for one frame by performing bi-directional prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames before and I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames after when decoding.

In the compressed data in the moving image data 131 for group display, I picture data is set as the first frame data. Also, B picture data is set as the data of the 2nd frame, . . . , m−1th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the m-th frame data. Also, B picture data is set as the m+1th frame, . . . , n−1th frame data. Also, P picture data is set as the n-th frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of picture data is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary.

By executing decoding processing on the moving image data 131 for group display, still image data for a plurality of update timings (hereinafter also referred to as decoded image data) is created from the moving image data 131 for group display. In this case, the moving image data 131 for group display has a longer cycle than the image update cycle in the pattern display device 41 because of the compression rate of the image data.

The relationship between the update cycle of the image and the cycle in which still image data can be used will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 40(a). 40(a1) shows the update timing of the image in the pattern display device 41, FIG. 40(a2) shows the use timing of the image data previously stored in the memory module 74 as still image data, and FIG. 40(a3) shows the use timing of the decoded image data based on the moving image data 131 for group display.

The update cycle Td1 of the image in the pattern display device 41 is 20 msec as already explained, and as shown in FIG. 40(a1), the image in the pattern display device 41 is updated at timing t1, timing t2, timing t3, timing t4, timing t5, timing t6, and timing t7. In addition, since the image data pre-stored in the memory module 74 as still image data can be used as it is, it can be used at each timing from t1 to t7 as shown in FIG. 40(a2).

On the other hand, the usable cycle Td2 of the decoded image data based on the moving image data 131 for group display is twice the update cycle Td1 of the image in the pattern display device 41, as shown in FIG. 40(a3). Therefore, although the decoded image data can be used at timings t1, t3, t5, and t7, new decoded image data cannot be used at timings t2, t4, and t6.

In this case, at each of the timings t2, t4, and t6, it is possible to use the same decoded image data as that used at the immediately preceding timings t1, t3, and t5. However, if the same decoded image data is simply used, there is a risk that the image will be jerky, making it impossible to display a smooth moving image. On the other hand, at two successive update timings using the same decoded image data, the same decoded image data is drawn in different ranges in the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b, thereby reducing the occurrence of image jerks.

FIGS. 40(b) and 40(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how the ranges to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn are made different in the same decoded image data 132. FIG.

When drawing data is created in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the data is written in all unit areas of the frame regions 82a and 82b, and the resolution of each frame region 82a and 82b is 800×600 dots. On the other hand, each decoded image data 132 obtained by executing the decoding process on the moving image data 131 for group display has a larger number of pixels than the number of dots of the frame areas 82a and 82b at the size of the initial magnification after the decoding process. The range that can be drawn by each decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification is larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b in both horizontal and vertical dimensions. As a result, the group display character G11 can be displayed on the entire pattern display device 41 even if the drawing ranges of the frame areas 82a and 82b are changed in accordance with the moving direction of the group display character G11 at two successive update timings of the same decoded image data 132.例文帳に追加

However, the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 is set wider than the direction in the frame areas 82a and 82b.

At the front update timing of the two consecutive update timings using the same decoded image data 132, as shown in FIG. 40(b), the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b is set toward the front end in the direction in which the group display characters G11 move in the decoded image data 132 as a group, that is, toward the left end. On the other hand, at the update timing on the rear side, as shown in FIG. 40(c), the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b is set so as to be closer to the end on the original side in the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group in the decoded image data 132, that is, to the right end. That is, at the update timing on the rear side with respect to the update timing on the front side, the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b in the decoded image data 132 moves in the direction opposite to the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group. As a result, the group display character G11, which was displayed at a predetermined position at the front update timing, is displayed at a position moved to the left of the predetermined position at the rear update timing. Therefore, even if the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, it is possible to perform a display as if the group display characters G11 moved as a group between the two update timings. In the decoded image data 132, the range outside the drawing range for the frame areas 82a and 82b is excluded from the drawing target.

Here, when the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, the movement amount of the group display character G11 at the rear update timing with respect to the group display character G11 at the front update timing is a predetermined movement amount. On the other hand, in the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the next usage timing for the group display character G11 at the rear update timing, the movement amount of the group display character G11 at the front update timing is also the same as the predetermined movement amount.

That is, for the first decoded image data 132 at one use timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next use timing, the movement amount of the group display character G11 between two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one use timing and the movement amount of the group display character G11 between the rear update timing displayed using the first decoded image data 132 and the front update timing displayed using the second decoded image data 132 are the same with a predetermined movement amount. is set to be More specifically, when the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 to be displayed is compared in both the case of using the first decoded image data 132 and the case of using the second decoded image data 132, the movement from the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the front update timing when using the first decoded image data 132 to the predetermined display position of the group display character G11 at the front update timing when the second decoded image data 132 is used. The amount is twice the movement amount from the predetermined display position of the group display character G11 at the front update timing when the first decoded image data 132 is used to the predetermined display position of the group display character G11 at the rear update timing when the first decoded image data 132 is used. Further, in order to enable setting of such a movement amount, at least the dimension in the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group (specifically, the horizontal dimension) in the horizontal and vertical directions within the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification is set to be larger than the dimension in the direction in the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b by at least the predetermined movement amount. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the amount of movement of the group display character G11 constant between one update timing and the next update timing, and it is possible to smoothly move the group display character G11.

A specific processing configuration for executing the group display effect will be described below. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the arithmetic processing for the group display effect executed by the display CPU 72. As shown in FIG. Note that the arithmetic processing for the group display effect is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the group display effect should be executed.

When it is time to decode the moving image data 131 for group display (step S1301: YES), the address of the moving image data 131 for group display in the memory module 74 is grasped (step S1302), the address of the work RAM 73 for developing the moving image data 131 for group display as decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1303), and the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S1303). 304). Also, the value of the same use flag provided in the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1305). The same use flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify whether or not the same decoded image data 132 as at the previous update timing is used at one update timing. If the same use flag has a value of "0", it specifies that new decoded image data 132 is to be used, and if the same use flag has a value of "1", it specifies that the same decoded image data 132 as at the previous update timing is to be used.

When the processing of steps S1302 to S1305 is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) is set with address information of the moving image data 131 for group display, information of the destination address of the moving image data 131 for group display, and decoding designation information. When receiving the drawing list, the video decoder 93 of the VDP 76 executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42(a). Specifically, the address of the moving image data 131 for group display is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S1401), and the address of the area where the moving image data 131 for group display is developed as decoded image data 132 is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S1402). Then, the moving image data 131 for group display is read from the address of the memory module 74 grasped in step S1401, and the moving image data 131 for group display is decoded. Then, each decoded image data 132 of the decoding result is written in each area of the address grasped in step S1402 (step S1403).

Returning to the explanation of the arithmetic processing for group display effect (FIG. 41), if a negative determination is made in step S1301 or if the processing of step S1305 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the same use flag in the work RAM 73 is "0" (step S1306). If the value of the same use flag is "0" (step S1306: YES), this means that it is update timing for using new decoded image data 132 this time. In this case, first, the address of the work RAM 73 where the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the current use order among the plurality of decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1307).

After that, "A, A" coordinates are grasped as coordinate information (step S1308). Here, the coordinate information is information for determining at which position the central pixel in the image data to be used should be arranged with respect to the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn. In the case of "A, B" coordinates, the set positions of the decoded image data 132 for the frame regions 82a and 82b are the positions shown in FIG. Note that the value of A and the value of B are the same for any type of decoded image data 132 . Thereafter, after updating and grasping the parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1309), the same use flag of the work RAM 73 is set to "1" (step S1310). As a result, at the next update timing, the same decoded image data 132 as at the current update timing will be used.

If the same use flag is set to "1" (step S1306: NO), this means that the current update timing uses the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing. In this case, the address of the work RAM 73 where the same decoded image data 132 as the previous time is developed is grasped (step S1311).

After that, "A-1, B" coordinates are grasped as coordinate information (step S1312). In the case of "A-1, B" coordinates, the set positions of the decoded image data 132 for the frame areas 82a and 82b are the positions shown in FIG. Thereafter, after grasping the parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1313), the same use flag of the work RAM 73 is cleared to "0" (step S1314). As a result, the new decoded image data 132 will be used at the next update timing.

When the processing of steps S1307 to S1310 or steps S1311 to S1314 is executed, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) is set with address information of the work RAM 73 where the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is stored, and parameter information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 including coordinate information. When the drawing list is received, the VDP 76 executes group display setting processing as part of the content grasping processing executed in step S804 of the drawing processing (FIG. 21). FIG. 42(b) is a flow chart showing setting processing for group display.

In the group display setting process, first, information on the address where the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list (step S1501). Also, coordinate information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is grasped from the drawing list (step S1502), and other parameter information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 is grasped from the drawing list (step S1503).

By executing the group display setting process as described above, the current decoded image data 132 is drawn with the parameters applied to the drawing target frame areas 82a and 82b in the subsequent writing process (step S805). In this case, if the coordinate information is "A, B", the range shown in FIG. 40B is drawn, and if the coordinate information is "A-1, B", the range shown in FIG. 40C is drawn. Then, by outputting an image signal to the pattern display device 41 based on the drawing data, a group display effect is executed.

As described above, even if the cycle in which the decoded image data 132 based on the moving image data 131 for group display can be used is twice the update cycle of the image in the pattern display device 41, the ranges of the same decoded image data 132 to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b differ at two consecutive update timings when the same decoded image data 132 is used. This makes it possible to reduce the occurrence of image jerks.

At two consecutive update timings using the same decoded image data 132, the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the front update timing partially overlaps with the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the rear update timing. As a result, it is possible to generate a slight image change between two consecutive update timings while using the same decoded image data 132 .

In two successive update timings using the same decoded image data 132, the range of drawing in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the same decoded image data 132 is changed in the group display image at the rear update timing with respect to the group display image at the front update timing so that each group display character G11 is shifted to the front side in the moving direction. As a result, even with a configuration in which the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, it is possible to give continuity to the movement of the group display character G11.

At least the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group, out of the horizontal direction and the vertical direction within the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification, is set wider than that direction in the frame areas 82a and 82b. As a result, the group display character G11 can be displayed on the entire pattern display device 41 even if the drawing ranges of the frame areas 82a and 82b are changed in accordance with the movement direction of the group display character G11 at two successive update timings of the same decoded image data 132.例文帳に追加

The first decoded image data 132 at one use timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next use timing are set so that the movement amount of the group display character G11 between two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one use timing is the same as the movement amount of the group display character G11 between the rear update timing displayed using the first decoded image data 132 and the front update timing displayed using the second decoded image data 132. . This makes it possible to keep the amount of movement of the group display character G11 constant between one update timing and the next update timing, so that the group display character G11 can be smoothly moved.

An image displayed by using the same decoded image data 132 at two consecutive update timings is an image in which a large number of group display characters G11 move in the same direction. This makes it less noticeable that the same decoded image data 132 is used at two successive update timings.

<Another form regarding group display effect>
The dimension in the specific direction (more specifically, the dimension in the horizontal direction) in which at least the group display characters G11 move as a group out of the horizontal and vertical directions in the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification is not limited to the configuration in which the dimension in the specific direction in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b is set to be larger than the dimension in the specific direction in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b by at least a predetermined amount of movement. It may be configured to be set to be larger than the dimension in the specific direction in the rendering range of b by at least a predetermined amount of movement. In this case, although it is necessary to perform size enlargement processing on the decoded image data 132, it is possible to change the display position of the group display character G11 by a predetermined amount of movement between two consecutive update timings using the same decoded image data 132.

- The moving direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction. In this case, at least the vertical dimension of the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification or the decoded image data 132 after the enlargement processing from the size at the initial magnification must be set larger than the vertical dimension of the drawing range of the frame areas 82a and 82b by at least a predetermined amount of movement.

- The group display character G11 is not limited to humans, and may be other animals such as cats, fish, and dogs, or may be pictographic objects other than animals.

The configuration in which the same image data is used at a plurality of consecutive update timings and the drawing ranges in the frame areas 82a and 82b are changed at each update timing may be applied to images other than an image in which a plurality of identical group display characters G11 move in the same direction as a whole. For example, the above configuration may be applied when a moving image is displayed in which a large single image exceeding the size of the liquid crystal display section 41a of the pattern display device 41 moves in a predetermined direction.

The configuration in which the same image data is used at a plurality of consecutive update timings and the rendering ranges in the frame areas 82a and 82b are different at each update timing may be applied to image data other than the decoded image data 132 obtained by decoding the moving image data 131. For example, the above configuration may be applied to still image data pre-stored in the memory module 74 .

<Configuration for performing effective period display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing the effective period display effect will be described.

43(a) and 43(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the effective period display effect. The effective period display performance is a performance of displaying the effective period on the pattern display device 41 when an operation corresponding performance for changing the performance contents depending on whether the operating device 48 for performance is operated or not is operated in the valid period during which the operation of the operating device 48 for performance is validated.

In the effective period display performance, an operation prompting image G21 for allowing the player to recognize the situation in which the operation device 48 for performance should be operated is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and an effective period image G22 for allowing the player to recognize the remaining period during which the operation of the operating device 48 for performance is valid is displayed. As the operation prompting image G21, specifically, an image representing the operating device 48 for performance is displayed, and an image that makes it possible to recognize that the operating device 48 for performance is being operated is displayed.

A frame image G23, a band image G24, and a blinking image G25 are displayed as the valid period image G22. The frame image G23 is an image for displaying the frame portion of the valid period image G22, and is displayed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The band image G24 is displayed so as to extend rightward within the frame portion of the frame image G23 with the left end of the frame portion as the base end, and when the effective period display effect is started as shown in FIG. It is displayed so that the range filled in the frame by 3 becomes narrower. The blinking image G25 is displayed so as to be added to the leading end position of the band image G24, and is displayed so as to move along with the leading end position of the band image G24 when the leading end position of the band image G24 gradually moves to the left end. Also, the flashing image G25 is displayed as if it were entirely flashing.

Here, in the case of the configuration in which the blinking display is performed while the blinking image G25 moves in accordance with the movement of the band image G24, if the data for controlling the movement of the blinking image G24 and the data for controlling the blinking display of the blinking image G25 are collectively set by one animation data or the like, if one of the movement speed of the tip portion of the belt image G24 and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is changed, the other is also changed in conjunction therewith. A case where the event occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 44(a) shows how the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 changes, and FIG. 44(b) shows how the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 changes.

By starting the effective period display effect, at the timing of t1, moving display of the tip portion of the band image G24 is started as shown in FIG. 44(a), and blinking display of the blinking image G25 is started as shown in FIG. 44(b). In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking period Te1. Then, from the timing of t1 to the timing of t5, the moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed.

After that, at timing t5, as shown in FIG. 44(a), the moving speed of the leading end portion of the strip image G24 is changed to a second speed that is faster than the first speed. The speed change is performed by shortening the time required from performing display control by referring to data in a predetermined order among reference data set in time series in the data for controlling the movement of the band image G24 to performing display control by referring to data in a specific order thereafter. Specifically, when pointer information set with a serial number and task content information are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the pointer information set as data for display control, the number of occurrences of image update timings generated from the time the display of the band image G24 is controlled by referring to the task content information corresponding to the pointer information in a predetermined order until the display control of the band image G24 is performed by referring to the task content information corresponding to the pointer information in a specific order that is later than the predetermined order. By varying, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed. In this case, if the data for controlling the display of the band image G24 and the data for controlling the display of the blinking image G25 are collectively set in the data for display control, the timing of updating the image occurs between the time the display is controlled by referring to the task content information corresponding to the pointer information in a predetermined order and the display control is performed by referring to the task content information corresponding to the pointer information in a specific order later than the predetermined order in order to change the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24. If the number of times is varied, the blinking period of the blinking image G25 will also be changed accordingly.

That is, when the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed from the first speed to the second speed at the timing t5 in FIG. 44(a), the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is also changed from the first blinking period Te1 to the second blinking period Te2 as shown in FIG. 44(b). This is the same when changing the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, and when the data for each display control is collectively set, if the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed, the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is also changed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the data for controlling the display contents of the band image G24 and the data for controlling the display contents of the flashing image G25 are provided individually rather than collectively. The contents of the data pre-stored in the memory module 74 for executing the effective period display effect will be described below with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 45, the memory module 74 stores in advance frame display image data 141 for displaying the frame image G23, band display image data 142 for displaying the band image G24, lighting image data 143 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the lighting state, and extinguishing image data 144 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the extinguished state. By drawing the frame display image data 141 in the drawing target frame areas 82 a and 82 b in the VDP 76 , the frame image G 23 can be displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

The band display image data 142 is set to a size capable of filling the entire frame of the frame image G23 at the initial magnification, and the coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b of the band display image data 142 at the initial magnification is set so that the left end of the band image G24 matches the left end of the frame of the frame image G23, whereby the band image G24 is displayed so as to fill the entire frame of the frame image G23. Then, while the horizontal size of the band display image data 142 is gradually reduced from the initial magnification, the coordinate information for the frame areas 82a and 82b of the band display image data 142 of the size is set such that the left end portion of the band display image G24 matches the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23.

Both the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for turning off 144 are image data for displaying the blinking image G25, and the images displayed by the image data for turning on 143 and the image data for turning off 144 have the same size and shape at the initial magnification. However, the lighting image data 143 causes a relatively bright blinking image G25 to be displayed, and the turning off image data 144 causes a relatively dark blinking image G25 to be displayed. Only one of the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144 is used at each update timing of the image, and the coordinate information for the frame regions 82a and 82b is set for the image data 143 and 144 to be used so that the blinking image G25 is superimposed on the front end portion of the band image G24 and displayed. By alternately repeating the period in which the lighting image data 143 is used and the period in which the light-off image data 144 is used, the display of the flashing image G25 in the lighting state and the display of the flashing image G25 in the light-off state are alternately repeated. This makes it possible to display the blinking image G25 as if the light were blinking.

In the memory module 74, in addition to various image data 141 to 144, a band display table 145 and a flashing display table 146 are stored in advance. The band display table 145 is data for executing display control of the band image G24, and more specifically, data in which horizontal size information of the band display image data 142 and position information of the tip portion of the band image G24 are defined. The blinking display table 146 is data for executing display control of the blinking image G25. Specifically, it is data that defines the image data to be used for the blinking image G25 among the image data for turning on 143 and the image data for turning off 144. The band display table 145 and blinking display table 146 will be described in detail.

FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the band display table 145. FIG. As shown in FIG. 46(a), the pointer information is set in the band display table 145 so as to have serial numbers, and a combination of the horizontal size information of the band display image data 142 and the position information of the tip portion of the band image G24 is set in association with each piece of pointer information. By reducing the size of the band display image data 142 by the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information to be referenced, the horizontal display range of the band image G24 is narrowed. Then, the band display image data 142 is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b so that the left end portion of the band image G24 overlaps the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23, thereby displaying an image in which the leading end portion of the band image G24 gradually moves toward the left end. Further, the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information to be referenced corresponds to the position of the tip portion of the band image G24 when the band display image data 142 is reduced and drawn by the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information. Then, by drawing the image data to be used out of the lighting image data 143 and the turning off image data 144 so as to be at the position corresponding to the tip position information, the blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap the leading end portion of the strip image G24 from the front side.

When the display of the band image G24 is controlled so that the leading end portion of the band image G24 moves at the first speed, the same size information and leading end position information corresponding to one piece of pointer information are referenced over a specified number of band-side image update timings, which is a plurality of times (for example, five times). Then, the pointer information is updated to pointer information in the next order at the next image update timing with respect to the image update timing specified times on the band side, and the size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are referred to over the image update timing specified times on the band side. In this way, pointer information is updated every time the image update timing of the band side specific number of times passes, so that the band image G24 is displayed so that the leading end portion moves at the first speed, and the blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap the leading end portion from the front side.

On the other hand, when the display of the band image G24 is controlled so that the leading end portion of the band image G24 moves at a second speed higher than the first speed, the same size information and leading end position information corresponding to one piece of pointer information are referred to over a predetermined number of band-side image update timings (for example, two times) which is smaller than the band-side specific number of times. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the timing of updating the image next to the timing of updating the image a predetermined number of times on the band side, and the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are referred to over the timing of updating the image a predetermined number of times on the band side. In this way, pointer information is updated each time the band-side predetermined number of image update timings elapse, so that the band image G24 is displayed so that the tip portion moves at a second speed faster than the first speed, and the blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap the tip portion from the front side.

FIG. 46(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the blinking display table 146. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 46(b), pointer information is set in the blinking display table 146 so as to have serial numbers, and the image data to be used out of the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for turning off 144 is set in association with each piece of pointer information. The image data 143, 144 set as the objects to be used in the pointer information to be referenced are drawn at the position of the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information to be referenced in the band display table 145 at the update timing of the image, so that the flashing image G25 in the state corresponding to the image data 143, 144 to be used is superimposed on the tip part of the band image G24 from the front side.

In the blinking display table 146, lighting image data 143 is set as image data to be used for pointer information "0" to "9", and turning off image data 144 is set as image data to be used for pointer information "10" to "19". When display control is performed using a blinking display table 146, 1 is added to the pointer information to be referenced each time the pointer information is updated, and when the value of the pointer information after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value "19", the value of the pointer information to be referenced is cleared to "0". That is, when the pointer information to be referred to in the table 146 for blinking display is referred to as one reference period from '0' to '19' while the effective period display performance is performed, the reference period is repeated a plurality of times. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of data in the blinking display table 146 .

When the display control of the blinking image G25 is performed so that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 becomes the first blinking cycle Te1, the same image data 143 and 144 to be used corresponding to one piece of pointer information is referenced over the image update timing of the blinking side specific number of times, which is a plurality of times (for example, twice). Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the next image update timing with respect to the image update timing of the blinking side specific number of times, and the same image data 143, 144 corresponding to the pointer information is referred to over the image update timing of the blinking side specific number of times. In this way, the pointer information is updated every time the image update timing of the flashing side specific number of times passes, so that the flashing image G25 displayed so as to overlap the leading end portion of the band image G24 from the front side is flashed at the first flashing period Te1.

On the other hand, when the display control of the blinking image G25 is performed so that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the second blinking cycle Te2, the same image data 143 and 144 to be used corresponding to one pointer information is referenced over the image update timing of the blinking side predetermined number of times (for example, once) which is smaller than the blinking side specific number of times. Then, the pointer information is updated to the pointer information in the next order at the next image update timing with respect to the image update timing of the predetermined number of times on the blinking side, and the same image data 143, 144 corresponding to the pointer information is referred to over the image update timing of the predetermined number of times on the blinking side. In this way, the pointer information is updated each time the image update timing of the predetermined number of times on the flashing side passes, so that the flashing image G25 displayed so as to overlap the leading end portion of the band image G24 from the front side is flashed at the second flashing period Te2.

How the effective period display effect is executed using both the band display table 145 and the flashing display table 146 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIGS. 47(a1) and 47(a2) show the movement speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24, and FIGS. 47(b1) and 47(b2) show the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25.

First, with reference to FIGS. 47(a1) and 47(b1), the case where the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed under the condition that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is constant will be described.

By starting the effective period display effect, at the timing of t11, moving display of the tip portion of the band image G24 is started as shown in FIG. 47(a1), and blinking display of the blinking image G25 is started as shown in FIG. 47(b1). In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking period Te1. Then, from the timing of t11 to the timing of t15, the moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed.

After that, at timing t15, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is changed to the band-side predetermined number of times which is smaller than the band-side specific number of times, so that the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed, which is faster than the first speed, as shown in FIG. 47(a1). On the other hand, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is maintained at the blinking-side specific number of times, so that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1 as shown in FIG. 47(b1).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 47(a2) and 47(b2), the case where the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed under the condition that the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is constant will be described.

By starting the effective period display effect, at the timing of t21, moving display of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is started as shown in FIG. 47(a2), and blinking display of the blinking image G25 is started as shown in FIG. 47(b2). In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking period Te1. Then, from the timing of t21 to the timing of t25, the moving display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed.

After that, at timing t25, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is changed to the blinking side predetermined number of times which is smaller than the blinking side specific number of times, so that the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking period Te2 shorter than the first blinking period Te1 as shown in FIG. 47(b2). On the other hand, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is maintained at the belt side specific number of times, so that the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed as shown in FIG. 47(a2).

As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for display control of the display content of the band image G24, and the flashing display table 146 is provided as data for display control of the display content of the flashing image G25. This makes it possible to change one of the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the flashing image G25 while not changing the other. As a result, it is possible to independently change the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking period of the blinking image G25, and it is possible to suitably realize the diversification of the display mode of the effective period display effect.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the display contents of the band image G24 and the flashing image G25 are associated with the degree of expectation that a special performance corresponding to the operation is executed when the operation device 48 for performance is operated during the valid period. Specifically, the first display content is when the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed until the end and the blinking cycle of the flashing image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1 until the end, the second display content is when the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed in the middle and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1 until the end, and the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed until the end. When the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking period Te2 in the middle as the third display contents, the second display contents are set to have a higher degree of expectation than the first display contents, and the third display contents are set to have a higher degree of expectation than the second display contents. Thus, by confirming the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation for execution of the special performance corresponding to the operation when the operating device 48 for performance is operated, and to increase the degree of attention of the player to the effective period display performance.

Further, the occurrence probability of the special performance corresponding to the operation is set so that the degree of expectation of a big winning result in the corresponding game round is higher when the operating device 48 for performance is operated and the special performance corresponding to the operation is executed than when the special performance corresponding to the operation is not executed when the operating device 48 for performance is operated. In this case, as described above, the display contents of the band image G24 and the flashing image G25 are associated with the degree of expectation of execution of the operation-responsive special effect, so the display contents of the band image G24 and the flashing image G25 are also associated with the degree of expectation of the big win result. Also from this point, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the effective period display effect.

It should be noted that any one of a plurality of types of operation corresponding effects including the first operation corresponding effect and the second operation corresponding effect may be executed when the effect operating device 48 is operated during the effective period.

A specific processing configuration for executing the effective period display effect will be described below. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for valid period display executed by the display CPU 72 . Note that the arithmetic processing for valid period display is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the valid period display effect should be executed.

If it is time to start the effective period display effect (step S1601: YES), the band display table 145 and blink display table 146 are read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S1602). Then, as the process of setting the movement speed of the band image G24, the update cycle of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the update cycle corresponding to the first speed (step S1603), and as the process of setting the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, the update cycle of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is set to the update cycle corresponding to the first blinking cycle Te1 (step S1604).

After that, among the image data for lighting 143 and the image data for turning off 144, the image data to be used set in association with the first pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is grasped as the image data for displaying the blinking image G25 this time (step S1613), and the frame display image data 141 and band display image data 142 are grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1614). After that, size information set corresponding to the first pointer information in the band display table 145 is grasped as size information to be applied to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), tip position information set in the band display table 145 corresponding to the first pointer information is grasped as position information for drawing the image data to be used this time among the lighting image data 143 and the turning off image data 144 (step S1616), and parameter information other than these is grasped. is grasped (step S1617).

When the arithmetic processing for valid period display is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605), the image data to be used, which is set in association with the first pointer information in the blinking display table 146 among the lighting image data 143 and the light-off image data 144, the frame display image data 141, and the band display image data 142 are set as drawing targets. Also, the parameter information grasped in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

If it is not the time to start the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is time to update the pointer information on the side of the band image G24 (step S1605). When the movement speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is set to the first speed, the timing of updating the pointer information of the band image G24 is determined when the number of occurrences of the image update timing since the last update of the pointer information of the band display table 145 is the specified number of times on the band side. If so, it is determined that it is time to update the pointer information on the band image G24 side. If it is time to update the pointer information on the band image G24 side (step S1605: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the band display table 145 is incremented by one (step S1606).

If it is not the time to start the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is time to update the pointer information on the flashing image G25 side (step S1607). When the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set to the first blinking cycle Te1, it is determined that it is time to update the pointer information of the blinking image G25 when the number of times the image update timing has occurred since the pointer information of the blinking display table 146 was last updated is the blinking specific number of times. , it is determined that it is time to update the pointer information on the flashing image G25 side. If it is time to update the pointer information on the flashing image G25 side (step S1607: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the flashing display table 146 is incremented by 1 (step S1608).

If it is not the timing to start the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to change the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 (step S1609). Whether or not the moving speed is changed and when the moving speed is to be changed, the change timing is determined at the start of the effective period display performance of this time, and the display CPU 72 determines whether or not it is the determined timing at the start. In addition, as a method of specifying the change timing, a method of determining the number of occurrences of the image update timing to be the change timing at the start of the current effective period display effect, and specifying the change timing when the determined number of occurrences of the image update timing is reached is conceivable. If it is time to change the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 (step S1609: YES), the update cycle of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the update cycle corresponding to the second speed as the process of setting the moving speed of the band image G24 (step S1610).

If it is not the timing to start the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611). Presence or absence of change of the blinking period and change timing of the blinking period when the blinking period is changed are determined at the time of starting the effective period display performance of this time, and a display CPU 72 determines whether or not it is the timing determined at the time of starting. In addition, as a method of specifying the change timing, a method of determining the number of occurrences of the image update timing to be the change timing at the start of the current effective period display effect, and specifying the change timing when the determined number of occurrences of the image update timing is reached is conceivable. If it is time to change the blinking period of the blinking image G25 (step S1611: YES), the update period of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is set to the update period corresponding to the second blinking period Te2 as the process of setting the blinking period of the blinking image G25 (step S1612).

After that, among the image data for turning on 143 and the image data for turning off 144, the image data to be used, which is set in correspondence with the pointer information of the current reference object in the blinking display table 146, is grasped as the image data for displaying the blinking image G25 this time (step S1613). In this case, if the processing of step S1608 has not been executed in the current processing cycle, the image data corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to in the previous processing cycle is grasped, and if the processing of step S1608 has been executed in the current processing cycle, the image data corresponding to the pointer information that has been newly updated and to be referred to is grasped. Also, the frame display image data 141 and band display image data 142 are grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1614).

After that, the size information set in the band display table 145 corresponding to the current pointer information to be referenced is grasped as size information for applying to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), and the tip position information set in the band display table 145 to correspond to the current reference target pointer information is grasped as the position information for drawing the image data to be used this time among the lighting image data 143 and the turning off image data 144. In this case, if the processing in step S1606 has not been executed in the current processing cycle, the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information that was the reference target in the previous processing cycle are grasped, and if the processing in step S1606 has been executed in the current processing cycle, the size information and the tip position information that correspond to the pointer information that has been newly updated and are the reference target in the current processing cycle are grasped. Also, parameter information other than these is grasped (step S1617).

When the arithmetic processing for valid period display is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605), the image data to be used set in the blinking display table 146 in association with the pointer information of the current reference target, the frame display image data 141, and the band display image data 142 are set as the drawing targets in the lighting image data 143 and the light-off image data 144. Also, the parameter information grasped in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for display control of the display content of the band image G24, and the blinking display table 146 is provided as data for display control of the display content of the blinking image G25. This makes it possible to change one of the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 while not changing the other. As a result, it is possible to independently change the moving speed of the band image G24 and the blinking period of the blinking image G25, and it is possible to suitably realize the diversification of the display mode of the effective period display effect.

In particular, when changing the movement speed of the leading end of the band image G24, the same band display table 145 is used regardless of the movement speed, since only the update period of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is changed. Similarly, when changing the blinking period of the blinking image G25, the same blinking display table 146 is used regardless of the blinking period, because only the updating period of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is changed. For example, in a configuration in which data for display control of the display contents of the band image G24 and data for display control of the display contents of the blinking image G25 are collectively set in one table, if one of the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 and the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is changed without affecting the other, it becomes necessary to separately prepare a corresponding table, and as many tables as the combinations of the moving speed and the blinking period are required. As a result, the storage capacity of the memory module 74 required to store the table in advance increases. On the other hand, since the same band display table 145 is used regardless of the moving speed and the same blinking display table 146 is used regardless of the blinking period, it is possible to realize diversification of the display mode of the effective period display performance while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the memory module 74.例文帳に追加

In the band display table 145, tip position information corresponding to position information for setting image data to be used among the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144 is set. As a result, information for arranging the blinking image G25 at the position of the tip portion of the band image G24 is set in association with the information that determines the display mode of the band image G24. Therefore, in the configuration in which the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are separately provided, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for adjusting the relative positions of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25.

<Another form of effective period display effect>
The pointer information of the blinking display table 146 is only "0" and "1", and one of the "0" and "1" corresponds to the lighting image data 143, and the other corresponds to the turning off image data 144. In this case, by adjusting the update cycle of the pointer information between "0" and "1", the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 can be set to either the first blinking cycle Te1 or the second blinking cycle Te2. According to this configuration, it is possible to further reduce the amount of data in the blinking display table 146 .

If the moving speed of the leading end of the band image G24 is the first speed, 1 may be added to the reference object pointer information in the band display table 145 at each image update timing, and if the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the second speed, a value of 2 or more may be added to the reference object pointer information in the band display table 145 at each image update timing. In other words, the value added to the pointer information to be referenced in the band display table 145 may differ between the first speed and the second speed at each image update timing. Even with this configuration, while using the same band display table 145, it is possible to change the movement speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 between the first speed and the second speed.

If the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1, 1 is added to the reference target pointer information in the blinking display table 146 at each image update timing, and if the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the second blinking cycle Te2, a value of 2 or more is added to the reference target pointer information in the blinking display table 146 at each image update timing. In other words, the value to be added to the reference target pointer information in the blink display table 146 may be different for each image update timing between the first blink period Te1 and the second blink period Te2. Even with this configuration, while using the same blinking display table 146, it is possible to change the blinking period of the blinking image G25 between the first blinking period Te1 and the second blinking period Te2.

The image data for displaying the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types and may be three or more types, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types and may be three or more types. Further, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.

Instead of using the blinking display table 146 to determine the type of image data used to display the blinking image G25, a configuration may be used in which the type of image data used to display the blinking image G25 is determined by program processing without using a table.

- In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the size of the band image G24 changes over time, at least one of the shape and color of the band image G24 may change over time. In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25 changes with the passage of time, at least one of the size, shape, and color of the blinking image G25 may change with the passage of time.

<Configuration for number display effect>
Next, the configuration for performing the number display effect will be described.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the number display effect. The number display effect is an effect of displaying the number of game balls acquired by the player from the start of the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode (hereinafter referred to as "acquired number") on the symbol display device 41. The acquired number is the difference between the total number of game balls put out to the player from the start of the opening/closing execution mode and the total number of game balls shot into the game area PA from the start of the opening/closing execution mode. The display of the acquired number by the number display performance is started when the opening period is started in the opening/closing execution mode, and the display contents are changed in accordance with the occurrence of the opportunity to put out the game balls to the player and the shooting of the game balls in the opening/closing execution mode. 49, the number display image G31 is displayed on the edge side of the pattern display device 41 while the display effect for the open/close execution mode is being executed on the pattern display device 41. As shown in FIG. By checking the number display image G31, the player can grasp the number of game balls obtained in the opening/closing execution mode.

FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing number display effects.

The MPU 52 of the main controller 50 is electrically connected to the winning detection sensors 151 to 154, the launched ball detection sensor 155 and the return ball detection sensor 156. FIG. The winning detection sensors 151 to 154 are sensors for detecting the occurrence of a winning that triggers the payout of game balls, and are provided in a plurality of types in one-to-one correspondence with the general winning opening 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34. The MPU 52 of the main controller 50 receives detection signals from each of the plurality of types of winning detection sensors 151-154. Then, when the MPU 52 receives a signal corresponding to the entry of the game ball in the corresponding ball entry part from one of the winning detection sensors 151 to 154, the MPU 52 transmits a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the number of game balls corresponding to the winning to the payout control device 55. - 特許庁

The payout control device 55 includes a payout control board 158 on which an MPU 159a is mounted. The MPU 159a includes a ROM 159b that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 159a, a RAM 159c that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 159b, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. A payout device 56 is electrically connected to an MPU 159a of a payout control device 55, and when the MPU 159a receives a prize ball command from the main control device 50, it starts outputting a driving signal to a payout motor 56a provided in the payout device 56, thereby starting payout of game balls. The MPU 159a stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 56a to stop the payout of the game balls when the number of game balls to be put out measured based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 56b provided in the payout device 56 becomes the number corresponding to the number information set in the prize ball command. Also, the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55 transmits a payout completion signal indicating that the payout of one game ball is completed to the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 each time the payout detection sensor 56b detects one game ball.

The shooting ball detection sensor 155 is provided in a game ball shooting mechanism 161 for shooting a game ball toward the game area PA when the shooting operation device 28 is operated. FIG. 51 is a front view of the inner frame 13 showing an enlarged lower region of the inner frame 13. FIG. The game ball shooting mechanism 161 is provided below the game board 24 on the front surface of the inner frame 13 . The game ball shooting mechanism 161 includes a shooting rail 162 extending toward the guide rail formed on the game board 24, a solenoid 163 which is an electric actuator for shooting the game ball supplied onto the shooting rail 162 from the upper tray 46a toward the guide rail, and a holding member 164 for holding one game ball B1 supplied onto the shooting rail 162 at a position that allows the solenoid 163 to shoot. When the shooting operation device 28 is operated, a drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 163 each time a predetermined shooting cycle (for example, 60 msec) is reached, and the solenoid 163 launches the game ball.

A shot ball detection sensor 155 in the game ball shooting mechanism 161 is provided so as to detect a game ball passing through the most downstream position of the shooting rail 162 . That is, the shooting ball detection sensor 155 is provided so as to detect the game ball shot toward the guide rail from the most downstream part of the shooting rail 162, and the game ball detected by the shooting ball detection sensor 155 does not flow backward on the shooting rail 162.例文帳に追加

The shot ball detection sensor 155 consists of an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and outputs a HI level signal as a shot ball detection signal when the game ball B1 exists within the detection range, and outputs a LOW level signal as a shot ball non-detection signal when the game ball B1 does not exist within the detection range. Therefore, by the shot ball detection sensor 155, it is possible to specify the number of game balls that have passed the position of the most downstream part of the shooting rail 162 and have been shot toward the guide rail. Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Also, the shot ball detection sensor 155 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method.

A return ball detection sensor 156 is provided in a return ball recovery part 165 for recovering a game ball that is launched from the most downstream part of the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail but flows backward on the guide rail without reaching the game area PA. The return ball recovery part 165 is formed in a region created by separating the guide rail and the launch rail 162 laterally on the front surface of the inner frame 13, and exists between both rails. The return ball collecting portion 165 is formed as a space having a predetermined depth dimension, and the space is formed to open upward. The return ball collecting portion 165 is communicated with the lower tray 47a, and the game ball B1 collected by the return ball collecting portion 165 is discharged to the lower tray 47a by its own weight.

The return ball detection sensor 156 in the return ball recovery section 165 is provided so as to detect a game ball passing through the most downstream position of the return ball recovery section 165 . In other words, the return ball detection sensor 156 is provided so as to detect game balls flowing down from the most downstream portion of the return ball collecting portion 165 toward the lower tray 47a.

The return ball detection sensor 156 is composed of an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, outputs a signal of HI level as a return ball detection signal when the game ball exists within the detection range, and outputs a signal of LOW level as a return ball non-detection signal when the game ball does not exist within the detection range. Therefore, the return ball detection sensor 156 makes it possible to specify the number of game balls collected by the return ball collection unit 165 . Note that the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the return ball detection sensor 156 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method.

Returning to the description referring to FIG. 50, the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 transmits commands corresponding to the reception result of the payout completion signal from the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, the reception result of the launch ball detection signal from the launch ball detection sensor 155, and the reception result of the return ball detection signal from the return ball detection sensor 156 to the sound and light side MPU 62. In detail about these commands, the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 counts the number of times the payout completion signal is received, and when the payout completion signal is received 10 times, a prize ball completion command in which information indicating that the payout of 10 game balls is completed is set is transmitted to the sound and light side MPU 62. Further, when the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 does not receive the next payout completion signal even after a reception standby period (for example, 2 sec) has passed after receiving the payout completion signal last time, it transmits the prize ball completion command to the sound and light side MPU 62 even if the number of times of receiving the payout completion signal since the previous transmission of the prize ball completion command does not reach 10 times. In this prize ball completion command, information indicating the number of payout completion signals received since the last transmission of the prize ball completion command is set. Further, the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 transmits a launch execution command indicating that one game ball has been shot to the sound and light side MPU 62 when receiving a shot ball detection signal from the shot ball detection sensor 155, and transmits a return ball generation command indicating that one return ball has been generated to the sound and light side MPU 62 when receiving a return ball detection signal from the return ball detection sensor 156.

When the sound and light side MPU 62 is in the open/close execution mode, each time it receives a prize ball completion command, a launch execution command, and a return ball generation command from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50, it performs measurement processing to enable display of the number of acquired balls. Then, a measurement command corresponding to the result of the measurement process is transmitted to the display CPU 72 of the display control device 70 when the transmission timing of the measurement command comes. The display CPU 72 causes the pattern display device 41 to display the number display image G31 in a state in which the content of the received measurement command is reflected.

The processing contents executed by the sound/light side MPU 62 and the display CPU 72 for performing the number display effect will be described below. First, the contents of processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 62 will be described.

FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing counting processing executed by the sound and light side MPU 62 . Note that the counting process is executed in the table setting process of step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

When the prize ball completion command is received in the open/close execution mode (steps S1701 and S1702: YES), a value corresponding to the number of completed game ball payouts set in the prize ball completion command received this time is added to the measurement counter 166 provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 (step S1703). The measurement counter 166 is a counter that is used to measure the number of acquisitions generated from the transmission timing of one measurement command to the transmission timing of the next measurement command in the opening/closing execution mode. For example, when a prize ball completion command indicating that the putting out of 10 game balls is completed is received, the value of ``10'' is added to the counter 166 for measurement, and when a prize ball completion command indicating that the putting out of 3 game balls is completed is received, the value of ``3'' is added to the counter 166 for measurement.

If a firing execution command is received in the opening/closing execution mode (steps S1701 and S1704: YES), "1" is subtracted from the measurement counter 166 (step S1705). The measurement counter 166 is configured to be able to measure both positive and negative values. For example, when the value of the measurement counter 166 is "5" and a launch execution command is received, the value of the measurement counter 166 becomes "4", and when the value of the measurement counter 166 is "0" and the launch execution command is received, the value of the measurement counter 166 becomes "-1". Also, when the return ball generation command is received in the opening/closing execution mode (steps S1701 and S1706: YES), "1" is added to the value of the measurement counter 166 (step S1707).

FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing the measurement command output setting process executed by the sound and light side MPU 62 . Note that the counting process is executed in the command selection process of step S302 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

In the measurement command output setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is time to output the measurement command (step S1801). The output timing of the measurement command occurs when the command output period elapses in the open/close execution mode. The command output period is set as a period longer than the update period of the number display image G31, more specifically, set as a period longer than the period obtained by doubling the update period of the number display image G31 and shorter than the period obtained by multiplying the update period of the number display image G31 by three. The update period of the number display image G31 is set to be longer than 20 msec, which is the update period of the image for one frame, and is set to 300 msec, for example. However, the update timing of the number display image G31 generated when the update cycle of the number display image G31 has passed corresponds to the update timing of the image for one frame.

If it is time to output a measurement command (step S1801: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter 166 is greater than or equal to "0", thereby determining whether or not the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to an increase in the number of acquisitions (step S1802). If the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to an increase in the acquired number (step S1802: YES), an increase measurement command is read from the sound and light side ROM 63, and information corresponding to the current value of the measurement counter 166 is set for the read increase measurement command (step S1803). Then, the measurement command for increase after setting the information is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1804). As a result, the display CPU 72 specifies that the acquired number has increased, and also specifies the number of the increase.

When it is time to output a measurement command and the value of the measurement counter 166 is less than "0" (step S1801: YES, step S1802: NO), it means that the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to a decrease in the number of acquisitions. In this case, the decrease measurement command is read from the sound and light side ROM 63, and information corresponding to the current value of the measurement counter 166 is set for the read decrease measurement command (step S1805). Then, the measurement command for decrease after setting the information is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1806). As a result, the display CPU 72 specifies that the acquired number has decreased, and also specifies the number of items corresponding to the decrease.

When the process of step S1804 or step S1806 is executed, the value of the measurement counter 166 is cleared to "0" (step S1807). As a result, the information on the number of acquisitions to be set in the measurement command is erased from the measurement counter 166 .

Next, the contents of processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing measurement command handling processing executed by the display CPU 72 . Note that the measurement command handling process is executed in the command handling process of step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

When the measurement command for increase is received from the sound and light side MPU 62 (step S1901: YES), a value corresponding to the increase in the acquired number set in the measurement command for increase received this time is added to the reflection counter 167 provided in the work RAM 73 (step S1902). The reflection counter 167 is a counter for specifying, by the display CPU 72, the number of increments and decrements to be reflected in the display of the acquired number currently displayed as the number display image G31. When the decrease measurement command is received from the sound and light side MPU 62 (step S1903: YES), the value corresponding to the decrease in the acquired number set in the decrease measurement command received this time is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167 (step S1904).

FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing calculation processing for measurement display executed by the display CPU 72 . Note that the arithmetic processing for measurement display is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19).

If it is time to update the number display image G31 (step S2001: YES), and if the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than 0 (step S2002: YES), the total counter 168 provided in the work RAM 73 is subtracted (step S2003). The total counter 168 is a counter that determines the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31, and the value stored in the total counter 168 is displayed as the number display image G31. Therefore, when the value of the total counter 168 fluctuates, the content of the number display image G31 fluctuates accordingly. In the subtraction processing of the total counter 168 , the value of the decrease in the acquired number set in the current reflection counter 167 is subtracted from the value of the current total counter 168 . In other words, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is a value corresponding to the decrease in the acquired number, all the values of the decrease in the acquired number set in the reflection counter 167 are reflected in the value of the total counter 168 regardless of the value. As a result, when the number of acquired items decreases, the entire amount of the decrease is collectively reflected in the display of the number of acquired items in the number display image G31. After that, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0" (step S2004).

When it is the update timing of the number display image G31 and the value of the reflection counter 167 is "0" or more (step S2001: YES, step S2002: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more (step S2005). If the value of the reflection counter 167 is not 1 or more (step S2005: NO), it means that the value of the reflection counter 167 is "0". In this case, the total counter 168 does not increase or decrease at this update timing of the number display image G31. Therefore, the display content of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is maintained as it is.

If the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more (step S2005: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the reflection counter 167 is the first reference value or more (step S2006). Here, when increasing the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31, the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the acquired number increases, the period in which the number display image G31 is updated so as to increase the display of the acquired number can be easily continued for a long time, and the player can be easily given an impression that the acquired number is increasing in the opening/closing execution mode.

A plurality of types of values to be added to the obtained number at one update timing of the number display image G31 are set. Specifically, as the values to be added, a first addition value "5", a second addition value "3" smaller than the first addition value, and a third addition value "1" smaller than the second addition value are set. When the value of the reflection counter 167 is greater than the value "12" preset as the first reference value, "5" is selected as the value to be added; when the value of the reflection counter 167 is greater than the value "5" preset as the second reference value which is smaller than the first reference value, "3" is selected as the value to be added; be done. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the increment of the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 from becoming extremely large without being reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31, and it is possible to diversify the mode of increasing the acquired number in the number display image G31.

Incidentally, when the payout motor 56a is operating at a normal speed, the payout device 56 pays out one game ball every 24 msec. Also, the shooting cycle of game balls is 60 msec. On the other hand, the output period of the measurement command by the sound and light side MPU 62 is approximately 720 msec. Then, since the value of the increase in the acquired number included in the increase measurement command is set to a maximum value of "18", a situation can occur in which the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes a value larger than the first reference value.

Specifically, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is greater than the first reference value (step S2006: YES), the first addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2007), and the first addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2008). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the first addition object value, and the value of the increment of the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is decreased by the first addition object value.

If the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than or equal to the first reference value and greater than the second reference value (step S2006: NO, step S2009: YES), the second addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2010), and the second addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2011). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the second addition target value, and the value of the increase in the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is decreased by the second addition target value.

When the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the second reference value (step S2009: NO), the third addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2012), and the third addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2013). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the third addition target value, and the value of the increase in the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is decreased by the third addition target value.

When the process of step S2004 is performed, when the determination of step S2005 is negative, when the process of step S2008 is performed, when the process of step S2011 is performed, or when the process of step S2013 is performed, the image data corresponding to the value of the total counter 168 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2014). Then, parameter information to be applied to the image data is grasped (step S2015). As a result, the image data for displaying the number display image G31 corresponding to the current value of the total counter 168 is set as a drawing object in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). Parameter information to be applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

Next, how the number display effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 56(a) shows the transmission timing of the measurement command from the sound and light side MPU 62, FIG. 56(b) shows how the value of the reflection counter 167 fluctuates, and FIG. 56(c) shows the update timing of the number display image G31.

At the timing of t1, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. 56(a). In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which "17" is set as the increment of the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing t1, the value of the reflection counter 167 is set to "17" as shown in FIG. 56(b). However, since the timing t1 is not the update timing of the number display image G31, the value set in the reflection counter 167 is not reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31.

After that, at the timing of t2, it becomes the update timing of the number display image G31 as shown in FIG. 56(c). In this case, the value of the reflection counter 167 is "17", which is a value larger than the first reference value, so as shown in FIG. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to the value obtained by adding the first addition target value to the value up to that point.

After that, at each of timing t3 and timing t4, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In these cases, the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the first reference value and is greater than the second reference value, so as shown in FIG. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to the value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the value up to that point.

Thereafter, at timing t5, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. 56(a). In this case, the measurement command is a decrease measurement command in which "3" is set as the decrease in the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing t5, the value of the reflection counter 167 is updated to "3" by subtracting "3" from "6" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

After that, at timing t6 and timing t7, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In these cases, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the second reference value, the third addition target value "1" is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG.

Thereafter, at timing t8, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. 56(a). In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which "5" is set as the increment of the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing t8, the value of the reflection counter 167 is updated to "6" by adding 5 from "1" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

After that, at timing t9, it is time to update the number display image G31 as shown in FIG. 56(c). In this case, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is again greater than the second reference value, the second addition target value "3" is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG. 56(b). Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to the value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the value up to that point.

After that, at timing t10, timing t12, and timing t13, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c). In these cases, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the second reference value, the third addition target value "1" is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG. Although the measurement command is transmitted at the timing t11 as shown in FIG. 56(a), the value of the reflection counter 167 is not changed because "0" is set in the measurement command as information on the increase/decrease in the acquired number.

After that, at the timing of t14, the number display image G31 is updated as shown in FIG. 56(c), but since the value of the reflection counter 167 is "0" as shown in FIG.

After that, at the timing of t15, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. 56(a). In this case, the measurement command is a decrement measurement command in which "5" is set as the decrement of the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing of t15, the value of the reflection counter 167 is updated to "-5" by subtracting 5 from "0" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

After that, at timing t16, it is time to update the number display image G31 as shown in FIG. 56(c). In this case, the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the acquired number. When the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquisitions, regardless of the value, it is reflected in the display of the number of acquisitions at once. Therefore, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 56(b).

As described above, the acquired number of game balls after the start of the opening/closing execution mode is displayed as the number display performance while being changed in accordance with the actual increase/decrease of the acquired number, so that the player can grasp the number of game balls acquired up to that time even during the opening/closing execution mode. In this case, when increasing the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31, the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the acquired number increases, the period in which the number display image G31 is updated so as to increase the display of the acquired number can be easily continued for a long time, and the player can be easily given an impression that the acquired number is increasing in the opening/closing execution mode.

A plurality of types of values to be added to the obtained number are set at one update timing of the number display image G31. The larger the value of the reflection counter 167, the larger the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31, and the smaller the value of the reflection counter 167, the smaller the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31. As a result, it is possible to prevent the value of the increment of the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 from becoming extremely large without being reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31, and it is possible to diversify the mode of increasing the acquired number in the number display image G31.

Even if the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes equal to or less than the first reference value and the second addition object value is added to the display of the acquired number of the number display image G31, when the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes larger than the first reference value after that, the situation returns to the situation of adding the first addition object value to the display of the acquisition number of the number display image G31. As a result, it is possible to update the display of the acquired number in an appropriate manner for the situation at each update timing of the number display image G31.

When the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the acquired number, regardless of the value of the reflection counter 167, the decremented value is collectively reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period in which the display of the acquired number is updated to decrease from continuing for a long time. Further, when the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes a negative value, the value of the reflection counter 167 can be cleared to "0" at one update timing of the number display image G31, and thereafter the value of the reflection counter 167 can easily become a positive value. Therefore, it is possible to generate many opportunities for the display of the acquired number to be updated so as to increase.

<Another form of number display effect>
Instead of the configuration in which the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 transmits the prize ball completion command to the sound and light side MPU 62, when the prize ball command is transmitted to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, the same prize ball command may be sent to the sound and light side MPU 62. In this case, the number of game balls that are not actually paid out but are scheduled to be paid out will be added to the display of the acquired number.

The number of game balls shot detected by the shooting ball detection sensor 155 and the number of returned game balls detected by the return ball detection sensor 156 are reflected in the display of the acquired number, but one or both of them may not be reflected in the display of the acquired number.

The number display effect is configured to start when the opening period starts in the open/close execution mode, but instead of this, it may be configured to start when the opening period ends and the first round game cycle starts.

The number display effect is terminated when one opening/closing execution mode ends, but when the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the number display effect is continued in the high-frequency support mode, and furthermore, when the opening/closing execution mode occurs a plurality of times without interposing the low-frequency support mode, the number of acquired game balls after the first opening/closing execution mode is started may be continuously displayed. Further, when the jackpot generating lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode, the number display performance is continued in the high probability mode, and furthermore, when the opening/closing execution mode is generated a plurality of times without inserting the low probability mode, the number of acquired game balls after the start of the first opening/closing execution mode may be continuously displayed.

A configuration may be adopted in which it is possible to specify whether or not a firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28, and the value to be added to the acquired number changes at one update timing of the number display image G31 depending on whether or not the firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28. For example, even if the value to be added to the acquired number is the same, the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31 may be larger or more likely to become larger when the firing operation is performed than when the shooting operation is not performed, or may be smaller or more likely to become smaller. As a configuration that can identify whether or not a firing operation is being performed on the firing operation device 28, a touch sensor may be provided to detect that the player is touching the firing operation device 28, and when the touch sensor is ON, it may be determined that the shooting operation is being performed. It may be configured to specify that the situation is that the shooting operation is being performed when the shooting operation is performed.

<Another form of number display effect>
· The object to which the number display effect is applied is not limited to the effect for displaying the acquired number of game balls in the open/close execution mode, and is arbitrary. For example, in a slot machine, when the number of remaining continuous games in an advantageous game state such as an RT game, an AT game or an ART game that is advantageous to a player can be increased in the middle of the advantageous game state, an increase display performance showing how the number of remaining continuous games is increasing may be executed as the number display performance. Arithmetic processing for increasing display executed by the display CPU 72 for performing the increasing display effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

When an opportunity to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state occurs, an increase display effect is started. If it is time to start the increase display effect (step S2101: YES), the target increase value is divided (step S2102). In the target increase value division process, the target increase value determined as the number of games to be increased to the remaining number of continuous games in the advantageous gaming state is divided by a predetermined division value of "100". A plurality of types of target increment values are set, and all of the plurality of types of target increment values are set so that the quotient value when divided by the division value is 8 or less, and the quotient values when divided by the division value are set to differ from each other. Specifically, "50", "100" and "250" are set as the target increase values. When the target increase value is "50", the result of division by the division value is "0" and the remainder is "50"; when the target increase value is "100", the result of division by the division value is "1" and the remainder is "0"; when the target increase value is "250", the result of division by the division value is "2" and the remainder is "50".

When division processing of the target increase value is executed, a value obtained by adding "1" to the quotient value derived by the division processing is stored in the work RAM 73 as a unit increase value (step S2103). The unit increase value is a value for increasing the display of the remaining number of continuous games displayed on the symbol display device 41 as an increase display effect at one update timing of the display. Since the quotient of the result of division by the division value differs depending on the type of target increase value as described above, the unit increase value also differs depending on the type of target increase value.

After that, the setting processing of the unit increase counter provided in the work RAM 73 is executed (step S2104). The unit increase counter is a counter for the display CPU 72 to specify the number of times the display by the increase display effect is updated in the current increase display effect. In step S2104, the current target increase value is divided by the unit increase value derived in step S2103. Then, the quotient value calculated by the division is set in the unit increment counter. For example, when the target increase value is "250", the unit increase value is "3", and when the target increase value is divided by this unit increase value, the quotient is "83" and the remainder is "1". In this case, "83" is set in the unit increment counter. If the remainder after dividing the target increase value by the unit increase value is 1 or more, the remainder is stored in the work RAM 73 as the remaining value (step S2105).

When the process of step S2105 is executed, or when it is time to update the increase display effect (step S2106: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the unit increase counter of the work RAM 73 is 1 or more (step S2107). If the value of the unit increase counter is 1 or more (step S2107: YES), the unit increase value calculated in step S2103 is added to the current value of the total counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S2108). The total counter is a counter that determines the value when the number of remaining games to be played is displayed as the game number image, and the value stored in the total counter is displayed as the game number image. It should be noted that when the increase display effect is started, the remaining number of continuous games at that time is set in the total counter.

In step S2108, the unit increase value is added to the current value of the total counter, thereby increasing the value of the number-of-games image from the current value by the unit increase value. After that, 1 is subtracted from the value of the unit increase counter (step S2109).

If the value of the unit increment counter is "0" (step S2107: NO), on condition that the work RAM 73 stores the remaining value (step S2110: YES), the remaining value is added to the total counter (step S2111). As a result, the value of the number-of-games image increases from the current value by the remaining value.

If the process of step S2109 is executed, if a negative determination is made in step S2110, or if the process of step S2111 is executed, the image data corresponding to the value of the total counter is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2112). Then, parameter information to be applied to the image data is grasped (step S2113). As a result, in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605), the image data for displaying the image corresponding to the current total counter value as the number-of-games image is set as the drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76. Parameter information to be applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

According to the above configuration, when the effect of increasing the remaining number of continuous games in the advantageous gaming state is executed, the unit increase value fluctuates according to the target increase value. Therefore, when the target increase value is added to the number of continuous games, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the number of games is increased at each update timing of the number-of-games image.

In addition, even when the manner of increasing the number of continuous games is diversified in this way, the processing configuration for determining the unit increase value, the processing configuration for setting the value of the unit increase counter, and the processing configuration for updating the number-of-games image are the same regardless of the type of target increase value. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the processing configuration.

Further, since the unit increase value is set according to the target increase value, it is possible for the player to predict the target increase value by checking the unit increase value. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the update mode of the number-of-games image, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the increase display effect.

It is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of division values for executing the division processing of the target increase value (step S2102), and execute the division processing using the division value determined by lottery. In this case, even if the target increase value is the same, it is possible to diversify the mode of increase in the number of games at each update timing of the number-of-games image when the target increase value is added to the number of continuous games.

<Structure for Pseudo-Animation Effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a pseudo moving image effect will be described.

The pseudo moving image effect is an effect in which moving image display is performed on the symbol display device 41 over the period of the pseudo moving image effect. During the pseudo-moving effect period, the timing of updating the image at least a part of the image displayed on the pattern display device 41 occurs a plurality of times (for example, 600 times). At each update timing of the image during the pseudo moving image effect period, one piece of still image data 171 to 173 to be used at the update timing is drawn on the entire frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn, and the image based on the one piece of still image data 171 to 173 is displayed on the entire pattern display device 41. In this case, the number of pieces of still image data 171 to 173 to be used during the pseudo moving image presentation period is smaller than the specific number of updates.

Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 58, the memory module 74 stores in advance image data 171 for a first character, effect image data 172, and image data 173 for a second character as still image data 171 to 173 for executing a pseudo moving image effect. 59A, the first character image data 171 includes, as a first character image G41, a first pseudo moving image character G42 representing a person, a second pseudo moving image character G43 representing a person different from the first pseudo moving image character G42, and a pseudo moving image background G44 displayed behind the first pseudo moving image character G42 and the second pseudo moving image character G43. 41 is image data for displaying on the whole. The first character image G41 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

The effect image data 172 is image data for displaying, as an effect image G45, a light ray image G47 representing a state in which light is emitted from a light source to the surroundings in front of an effect background G46, on the entire pattern display device 41, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59(b). The effect image G45 is an image for enhancing a visual effect, and includes an image representing a blast, an image representing water droplets, an aura image representing the character as if it were emitting light, and the like, in addition to the light beam image G47. The effect image G45 is an image created using software for creating images.

The second character image data 173 is image data for displaying, as the second character image G48, the first pseudo moving image character G42, the second pseudo moving image character G43, and the simulated moving image background G44 on the entire pattern display device 41 in the same manner as the first character image G41, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59(c). The second character image G48 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

However, the display mode of the first pseudo video character G42 and the second pseudo video character G43 based on the second character image data 173 is different from the display mode of the first pseudo video character G42 and the second pseudo video character G43 based on the first character image data 171. Specifically, the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 differ in the shape of the hand region representing the hand, the orientation of the body region representing the body, and the relative position of the hand region with respect to the body region, which are a partial region of the first pseudo moving image character G42. Also, the shape of the hand region representing the hand, the orientation of the body region representing the body, the relative position of the hand region with respect to the body region, etc., which are partial regions of the second pseudo-moving character G43, differ between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48.

Between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, there is no continuity in the display mode of the first pseudo moving image character G42, and similarly there is no continuity in the display mode of the second pseudo moving image character G43. The lack of continuity in the display mode of the first pseudo moving image character G42 means that the shape of the predetermined area such as the hand area of the first pseudo moving image character G42 in the second character image G48 and the relative position between the predetermined area and other areas of the first pseudo moving image character G42 are different from the mode at the update timing of the next image assumed from the display mode of the first character image G41. Similarly, the lack of continuity in the display mode of the second pseudo-moving character G43 means that the shape of a predetermined area such as the hand area of the second pseudo-moving character G43 in the second character image G48 and the relative position between the predetermined area and other areas of the second pseudo moving-image character G43 are different from the mode at the next image update timing assumed from the display mode of the first character image G41.

A second display period for displaying the effect image G45 is set between the first display period for displaying the first character image G41 and the third display period for displaying the second character image G48. Thus, the discontinuity of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 becomes less conspicuous than when the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed. The pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are displayed in different display modes in each of the first display period and the third display period while making the discontinuity of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 inconspicuous. As a result, the number of the character image data 171 and 173 is small with respect to the image update timing, and the motions of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are not continuous. It is possible to make the player recognize that the animation display of G42 and G43 is being performed.

The first display period during which the first character image G41 is displayed, the second display period during which the effect image G45 is displayed, and the third display period during which the second character image G48 is displayed are periods in which image update timing occurs multiple times, and each display period is the same period. In the configuration in which the image update timing occurs multiple times in each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, only one type of image data 171 to 173 is used in each display period, as already described. However, in each display period, the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed at each update timing. Specifically, in each of the image data 171 to 173, the range to be drawn in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b is sequentially changed. The configuration will be described below.

FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the ranges to be drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in each of the image data 171 to 173 are made different.

When drawing data is created in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the data is written in all unit areas of the frame regions 82a and 82b, and the resolution of each frame region 82a and 82b is 800×600 dots. On the other hand, the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 have a larger number of pixels than the number of dots of the frame areas 82a and 82b in the sizes stored in the memory module 74. The range that can be drawn by each of the image data 171 to 173 at the initial magnification is larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b in both horizontal and vertical dimensions. As a result, it is possible to vary the range to be drawn in one type of image data 171 to 173 that is used in each display period. Furthermore, even with such a configuration in which the ranges to be drawn in one type of image data 171 to 173 to be used are made different, it is possible to display an image corresponding to the one type of image data 171 to 173 on the entire pattern display device 41.

The sizes of the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 stored in the memory module 74 are the same. The manner in which the areas to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 are made different is the same in any of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period. Specifically, at the start timing of each display period, the range of the image data 171 to 173 to be used is set as the range to be drawn, which is shifted toward a predetermined corner side. Then, the changing mode of the range to be drawn is set so that the range to be drawn gradually moves toward the corner opposite to the predetermined corner at the subsequent update timing of the image.

Data for changing the range to be drawn is pre-stored in the memory module 74 as a pseudo moving image table 174, as shown in FIG. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pseudo moving image table 174. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 61, the pseudo-moving image table 174 is set with consecutively numbered pointer information, and drawing range information for determining the drawing target range is set corresponding to each piece of pointer information. The pointer information is set for the number of image update timings occurring in each display period. Accordingly, by referring to the pseudo moving image table 174 in each display period, it is possible to derive the drawing range information corresponding to all update timings. In addition, since the pseudo moving image table 174 is also used in each display period, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for pre-storing the pseudo moving image table 174 compared to the configuration in which the pseudo moving image table 174 is prepared in advance corresponding to each display period.

FIG. 62 is a time chart showing how the pseudo moving image effect is executed. FIG. 62(a) shows the first display period, FIG. 62(b) shows the second display period, FIG. 62(c) shows the third display period, and FIG. 62(d) shows how the drawing range of the image data 171 to 173 to be used is changed in each display period.

The first display period is started as shown in FIG. 62(a) by starting the pseudo moving image effect at the timing of t1. The first display period continues from the timing t1 to the timing t2. During this period, as shown in FIG. 62(d), the range to be drawn in the first character image data 171 is gradually changed with a certain directionality.

At the timing t2, the first display period ends as shown in FIG. 62(a) and the second display period starts as shown in FIG. 62(b). The second display period continues from the timing t2 to the timing t3. During this period, the range to be drawn in the effect image data 172 is gradually changed with a certain directionality as shown in FIG. This directionality and the shift amount of the drawing range between consecutive update timings are the same as in the case of the first display period.

At the timing of t3, the second display period ends as shown in FIG. 62(b) and the third display period starts as shown in FIG. 62(c). The third display period continues from timing t3 to timing t4. During this period, the range to be drawn in the second character image data 173 is gradually changed with a certain directionality, as shown in FIG. This directionality and the shift amount of the drawing range between successive update timings are the same as in the first display period and the second display period.

A specific processing configuration for executing the pseudo moving image effect will be described below. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for a pseudo moving image effect executed by the display CPU 72. As shown in FIG. Note that the arithmetic processing for the pseudo moving image effect is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the pseudo moving image effect should be executed.

If it is the first display period (step S2201: YES), it is determined whether or not this time is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202). The display CPU 72 reads from the memory module 74 an execution object table for controlling the overall flow of the pseudo moving image effect when starting the pseudo moving image effect, and by referring to the execution object table, specifies which display period this time corresponds to and whether it is the start timing of each display period.

If it is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202: YES), the pseudo moving image table 174 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S2203). If a negative determination is made in step S2202, or if the process of step S2203 is executed, the first character image data 171 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2204). Also, the rendering range information set in correspondence with the pointer information that is the current reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2205). Then, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2206), the pointer information to be referenced is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1 (step S2207).

When the arithmetic processing for the pseudo moving image effect is executed as described above, the first character image data 171 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Also, the parameter information grasped in steps S2205 and S2206 is set in the drawing list.

If it is the second display period (step S2201: NO, step S2208: YES), it is determined whether or not this time is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209). If it is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209: YES), the value of pointer information to be referenced in the pseudo-moving image table 174 already read into the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to "0" (step S2210). As a result, the drawing range information set corresponding to the first pointer information in the pseudo-moving image table 174 is used at the start timing of the second display period.

If a negative determination is made in step S2209, or if the process of step S2210 is executed, the effect image data 172 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2211). Also, the rendering range information set in correspondence with the pointer information that is the current reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2212). Then, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2213), the pointer information to be referenced is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1 (step S2214).

When the arithmetic processing for the pseudo moving image effect is executed as described above, the effect image data 172 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Also, the parameter information grasped in steps S2212 and S2213 is set in the drawing list.

If it is the third display period (step S2201 and step S2208: NO), it is determined whether or not this time is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215). If it is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215: YES), the value of pointer information to be referenced in the pseudo-moving image table 174 already read into the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to "0" (step S2216). As a result, the drawing range information set corresponding to the first pointer information in the pseudo-moving image table 174 is used at the start timing of the third display period.

When a negative determination is made in step S2215, or when the process of step S2216 is executed, the second character image data 173 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2217). Also, the drawing range information set corresponding to the pointer information that is the current reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2218). Then, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2219), the pointer information to be referenced is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referenced is incremented by 1 in the pseudo moving image table 174 (step S2220).

When the arithmetic processing for the pseudo moving image effect is executed as described above, the second character image data 173 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Also, the parameter information grasped in steps S2218 and S2219 is set in the drawing list.

Here, the image data 171 for the first character and the image data 173 for the second character are individually used in an effect different from the pseudo moving image effect. Specifically, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are used as display images of round effects executed during different round games in the open/close execution mode, which is the high-frequency winning mode. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for round effects executed by the display CPU 72 . In addition, the arithmetic processing for round effect is executed in the arithmetic processing for effect in step S704 in the task processing (FIG. 19) in a situation where the round effect should be executed.

If it is the execution period of the first round game (step S2301: YES), the first character image data 171 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2302), and other image data is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2303). After that, parameter information to be applied to these image data is grasped (step S2304). When the arithmetic processing for the round effect is executed in this way, the first character image data 171 and the image data obtained in step S2303 are set as drawing objects in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Also, the parameter information grasped in step S2304 is set in the drawing list.

If it is the execution period of the eighth round game (step S2305: YES), the second character image data 173 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2306), and other image data is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2307). After that, parameter information to be applied to these image data is grasped (step S2308). When the arithmetic processing for the round effect is executed in this way, the second character image data 173 and the image data grasped in step S2307 are set as drawing objects in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Also, the parameter information grasped in step S2308 is set in the drawing list.

In addition, when it is not the first round game and the eighth round game, other processing is executed (step S2309). In this case, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are not selected as image data to be used.

As described above, the second display period during which the effect image G45 is displayed is set between the first display period during which the first character image G41 is displayed and the third display period during which the second character image G48 is displayed. Thus, the discontinuity of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 becomes less conspicuous than when the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed. The pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are displayed in different display modes in each of the first display period and the second display period while making the discontinuity of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 inconspicuous. Thus, the number of the character image data 171 and 173 is small with respect to the image update timing, and the motions of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are not continuous. It is possible to make the player recognize that the animation display of G42 and G43 is being performed.

In particular, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are image data prepared for displaying images for round effects in different round games, respectively, and from the purpose of use thereof, continuity of movement of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 is not required. In this case, by generating the display period of the first character image G41 and the display period of the second character image G48 so as to sandwich the display period of the effect image G45 as described above, it is possible to execute the pseudo animation effect using the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 prepared for displaying the image for the round effect.

The drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect in the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed at each update timing. This makes it possible to display moving images while using one type of image data 171 to 173 in each display period.

A pseudo-moving image table 174 for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period of the pseudo-moving effect in the frame areas 82a and 82b is also used in each display period. As a result, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects described above while suppressing the required storage capacity of the memory module 74 .

<Another form of pseudo-movie production>
The configuration is not limited to two types of character image data 171 and 173 for displaying the respective pseudo-moving-image characters G42 and G43, and three or more types may be used. For example, in addition to the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173, the memory module 74 may store in advance third character image data for displaying the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 and making the display mode of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 different from the first character image G41 and the second character image G48. In this case, the pseudo moving image effect period includes a first display period during which the first character image data 171 is used, a second display period during which the effect image data 172 is used, a third display period during which the second character image data 173 is used, a fourth display period during which the effect image data 172 or different effect image data is used, and a fifth display period during which the third character image data is used.

The display periods of the pseudo-moving effect are not limited to the same period, but may be substantially the same although the display periods are different. Alternatively, at least one of the display periods may be significantly different from the other display periods. For example, although the first display period and the second display period are the same or substantially the same period, the effect period may be longer or shorter than the first display period and the second display period. When the respective display periods are different from each other, the pseudo moving image table 174 is created so as to correspond to all update timings of the longest display period among the display periods, so that the pseudo moving image table 174 can be used also in other display periods.

If the drawing range information derived from the pseudo-moving image table 174 has continuity between the start timing and the end timing, even if the pseudo-moving image table 174 is used a plurality of times in one display period in the pseudo-moving image presentation, no sense of incongruity is caused. In this case, it is not necessary to set the data corresponding to the entire one display period in the pseudo moving image table 174, and it is sufficient to set only the data corresponding to a part of the one display period.

The first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 are not limited to being larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b at the initial magnification size when stored in the memory module 74. They are the same size or smaller than the frame areas 82a and 82b at the initial magnification size, and after being read out from the memory module 74, are subjected to enlargement processing so that they are larger than the frame areas 82a and 82b. may be configured. In this case, the image data 171 for the first character and the image data 173 for the second character may be used in the size of the initial magnification when used to display the image for the round effect, and the image data 171 for the first character and the image data 173 for the second character may be used in the size enlarged from the size of the initial magnification when used to display the image for the pseudo moving image effect.

The method for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect to the frame areas 82a and 82b at each update timing is not limited to the method of changing the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173. For example, a method may be adopted in which the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 is gradually narrowed so that the image to be displayed is gradually enlarged and displayed. Alternatively, a method may be used in which the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 is gradually widened so that the image to be displayed is gradually reduced.

The first character image data 171 is not the only image data to be used during the first display period of the pseudo-moving effect. After the first character image data 171 is drawn in the frame areas 82a and 82b, other image data may be drawn in a part of the frame areas 82a and 82b in the first display period. Even in this case, the first character image G41 is displayed behind the other image data, and by displaying the effect image G45 between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, it is possible for the player to recognize that the moving images of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are being displayed.

<Another form of pseudo-movie production>
・The modes shown in FIGS. 65(a) to 65(c) are also conceivable as modes of the pseudo-moving effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 65(a) and 65(c), a pseudo-moving image character G51 is displayed in the pseudo-moving effect. First pseudo moving image image data and second pseudo moving image image data are stored in the memory module 74 in advance as image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G51. When the first pseudo moving image data is used, the first pseudo moving image G52 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65(a). be done.

As shown in FIG. 65(a), the first pseudo-moving image G52 displays a state before the predetermined portion G51a (specifically, both arms) of the pseudo-moving character G51 moves along a predetermined movement path, and the second pseudo-moving image G53 displays a state after the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo-moving character G51 moves along a predetermined movement path as shown in FIG. However, the position of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo-moving character G51 between the first pseudo-moving image G52 and the second pseudo-moving image G53 is separated to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of the movement.

On the other hand, between the display period of the first pseudo moving image G52 and the display period of the second pseudo moving image G53, a pseudo moving image effect image G54 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65(b). In this pseudo moving image effect image G54, many small individual images G54a such as bubbles are displayed. In addition, the pseudo-moving effect image G54 is displayed for a predetermined period, and during the predetermined period, a large number of small individual images G54a are displayed as a moving image so as to move in the same direction as the moving direction along the predetermined movement path of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo-moving character G51.

With the above configuration, even if the position of the predetermined part G51a of the pseudo-moving character G51 between the first pseudo-moving image G52 and the second pseudo-moving image G53 is separated to such an extent that it is difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of the movement, the visual effect of the movement of the small individual image G54a in the pseudo-moving effect image G54 allows the predetermined part to be positioned between the first pseudo-moving image G52 and the second pseudo-moving image G53. It is possible for the player to recognize that G51a has moved along a predetermined motion path. As a result, even if the number of pseudo moving image image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G51 is small, the player can be made to recognize that the moving image display of the pseudo moving image character G51 is being performed while making the discontinuity of the position of the predetermined part G51a between the first pseudo moving image G52 and the second pseudo moving image G53 inconspicuous.

<Second embodiment>
The present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the electrical configuration regarding display control. Differences from the first embodiment will be described below. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration in this embodiment.

The configuration shown in FIG. 66 includes a main controller 50 as in the first embodiment. Also, the main controller 50 is electrically connected to a payout control device 55 that controls the payout device 56, a power supply/emission control device 57 that functions to supply power to each device including the main control device 50 and drives and controls the game ball launching mechanism 58, a special figure unit 37 that displays the results of game rounds, and a general figure unit 38 that displays the results of the general electric open lottery. In addition, an audio light emission control device 60 is provided for driving and controlling the display light emission unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on commands transmitted from the main control device 50, and a display control device 200 is provided for controlling the pattern display device 41 based on commands transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60.

The display control device 200, as shown in FIG. 66, includes a display control board 206 on which a display CPU 201, a work RAM 202, a memory module 203, a VRAM 204, and a video display processor (VDP) 205 are mounted.

The display CPU 201 functions as a main control unit in the display control device 200, and reads, interprets, and executes control programs and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 201 is connected via a bus to an input port 207 mounted on a display control board 206, and various commands transmitted from the audio emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 201 through the input port 207.

The display CPU 201 is connected to the work RAM 202, the memory module 203, and the VRAM 204 via a bus, and based on the command received from the sound emission control device 60, gives a transfer instruction to transfer various data stored in the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202. Also, the display CPU 201 is connected to the VDP 205 via a bus, and based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60, instructs the pattern display device 41 to display a three-dimensional image (3D image). The memory module 203, work RAM 202, VRAM 204 and VDP 205 will be described below.

The memory module 203 pre-stores control data including a control program and fixed value data, and pre-stores various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image. The memory module 203 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require power supply from the outside for storing data. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, such a storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the memory module 203 is used as a read-only memory (ROM) for non-write when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Various image data stored in the memory module 203 include object data such as patterns and characters to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, texture data pasted on the object data, and image data for the rear surface forming the rearmost image in the image for one frame.

Here, object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by a plurality of vertices of three-dimensional coordinates. For example, since a surface model is applied to the object data, the vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates preset for each object data as the origin. In other words, each object data three-dimensionally defines the relative position (that is, orientation and size) of each polygon in a self-contained local coordinate system.

Texture data is an image to be pasted on each polygon of object data. By pasting texture data to object data, an image corresponding to the object data, such as a display image including patterns and characters, for example, is generated. Texture data may be held in any manner, but may include, for example, at least a combination of bitmap format data and a color palette that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image.

The backmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The image data for the back surface may be held in any manner, but for example, the two-dimensional still image data is stored and held as compressed JPEG format data. Incidentally, when the image data for the back surface is arranged in the world coordinate system, plate-like object data (that is, plate polygons) is used.

The work RAM 202 is storage means for temporarily storing control data read from the memory module 203 and transferred, and for temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 202 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storing data, and more specifically, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the work RAM 202 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

Control data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 201 to the memory module 203 . Then, the display CPU 201 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 202 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The VRAM 204 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the pattern display device 41 . The VRAM 204 has a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storing data, and more specifically, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 200 is executed satisfactorily. Also, the VRAM 204 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

The VRAM 204 has an expansion buffer 211 , and image data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 205 to the memory module 203 . The VRAM 204 is also provided with a frame buffer 212 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 205 .

The VDP 205 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the pattern display device 41 by processing the data stored in the expansion buffer 211 based on the drawing instruction from the display CPU 201, and is a kind of drawing circuit that operates the image processing device 41b that is incorporated in the pattern display device 41 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display section 41a. Since the VDP 205 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing.

Specifically, the VDP 205 includes a geometry calculation section 221 , a rendering section 222 , a register 223 and a display circuit 225 . These circuits are interconnected via a bus, and are also connected to the I/F 226 for the display CPU 201 and the I/F 227 for the VRAM 204 .

The I/F 226 for the display CPU 201 causes the register 223 to store the drawing list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 201 . The geometry calculation unit 221 reads various image data stored in the memory module 203 to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 based on the drawing list stored in the register 223 . Also, the geometry calculation unit 221 arranges the object data designated as the object to be arranged in the world coordinate system. Also, the geometry calculation unit 221 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after arranging the object data in the world coordinate system. Finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display plane P.

Based on the drawing list stored in the register 223, the rendering unit 222 performs light source adjustment and pastes texture data on each clipped object data to determine the appearance of the object data. The rendering unit 222 also projects each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and performs various adjustments based on the depth information to create drawing data for one frame, which is two-dimensional data, in the frame buffer 212. Drawing data for one frame means data necessary to display an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the pattern display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing.

The configuration may be such that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 are provided by the drawing list, or the VDP 205 may have a built-in memory in which the control programs are stored in advance, and the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may execute processing according to the content of the control program and the drawing list. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 203 in advance. Alternatively, the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may be configured to execute processing only by operation of hardware circuits corresponding to the drawing list without using programs.

Here, the frame buffer 212 is provided with a plurality of frame areas 212a and 212b. Specifically, a first frame region 212a and a second frame region 212b are provided. Each of these frame areas 212a and 212b is set to have a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 212a and 212b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display section 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full-color system is adopted, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Correspondingly, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each color of RGB in each unit area. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the full-color system, and for example, in a configuration in which each dot can display only 256 colors, the storage capacity required for storing color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

Since the frame buffer 212 is provided with the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b, in a situation where the drawing data created in one frame area is used to perform drawing on the pattern display device 41, the drawing data to be used in the future for the other frame area is created. That is, the frame buffer 212 employs a double buffer system.

In the display circuit 225, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display section 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame area 212a or the second frame area 212b, and the image signal is output to the pattern display device 41 through the output port 208 connected to the display circuit 225. Specifically, drawing data is transferred to the display circuit 225 from the frame regions 212 a and 212 b to be output. The transferred drawing data is adjusted in resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the pattern display device 41 and converted into gradation data. Then, based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the pattern display device 41 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 225 also outputs a synchronizing signal such as a horizontal synchronizing signal or a vertical synchronizing signal.

<Basic processing in display CPU 201>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 201 will be described.

FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing in this embodiment. In the V interrupt process, if it is time to start power supply to the display CPU 201 (step S2401: YES), all the texture data pre-stored in the memory module 203 are read out to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2402).

If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or if the processing of step S2402 is executed, command analysis processing is executed (step S2403). Specifically, the content of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 202 is analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 201 receives the strobe signal from the sound and light side MPU 62, it executes the command interrupt processing regardless of the processing being executed at that time. In command interrupt processing, commands received at the input port 207 are transferred to a command buffer provided in the work RAM 202 .

After that, on condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving the new command (step S2404: YES), the command correspondence process is executed (step S2405). In the command correspondence processing, an execution object table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 203 . The execution target table is a group of information that defines the processing necessary to display one frame of image at each update timing of the image when displaying the moving image corresponding to the received command on the pattern display device 41.

The commands received by the display CPU 201 from the sound and light side MPU 62 include a command at the start of fluctuation, a command at the start of notice effect, a command at the start of normal reach, a command at the start of super reach, a command at the start of fixed effect, a command at the start of standby display, a command at the start of fixed display, and the like, as in the first embodiment. When these commands are received, an execution object table necessary for executing the game round effects corresponding to each of these commands on the symbol display device 41 is read.

When a negative determination is made in step S2404, or when the processing of step S2405 is executed, task processing is executed (step S2406). In the task processing, by referring to the control data for the current processing in the data table set as the object to be used, various data necessary for giving drawing instructions to the VDP 205 in order to display the image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of this time are set. Specifically, the various data include address information of the area in which the image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 203, address information of the area to which the image data to be controlled is transferred in the VRAM 204, information of the target frame areas 212a and 212b where drawing data should be created using the image data of the control target, and various information for creating a 3D image using the virtual three-dimensional space.

After that, drawing list output processing is executed (step S2407). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 205 . In this case, in the drawing list, the image grasped by the immediately preceding task processing becomes the drawing target, and the parameter information updated by the task processing is also set. The VDP 205 creates drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the VRAM 204 according to this drawing list.

FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing task processing in step S2406.

In task processing, first, setting processing for starting control is executed (step S2501). In the control start setting process, the display CPU 201 executes a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in this processing. The individual image is one 2D image defined by still image data such as back image data, or one 3D image defined by a combination of object image data and texture image data.

Specifically, regarding the control start setting process, first, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be the control start target in the current processing cycle. When it exists, the work RAM 202 is searched for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and the empty buffer area is secured so as to correspond one-to-one with the individual image grasped as the control start target. Furthermore, initialization processing is executed for all the secured empty buffer areas, and parameters for starting control according to individual images are set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

After that, the control update target is grasped (step S2502). This control update target is an individual image for which control start processing has been completed and which may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing.

After that, background arithmetic processing is executed (step S2503). In the background calculation processing, various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list, such as coordinates, rotation angles, scales, light information for adding brightness and darkness, camera information for projection, and Z-test designation, are calculated and derived for the background image and the background character in the world coordinate system.

After that, a production calculation process is executed (step S2504). In the effect calculation process, the various parameters described above are calculated and derived for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as ready-to-win display, advance notice display, and jackpot effect.

After that, the symbol arithmetic processing is executed (step S2505). In the symbol calculation process, a process of calculating and deriving the various parameters described above is executed for the image of the symbol that is the object of variable display in each game cycle.

Incidentally, in each process of steps S2503 to S2505, a process of updating the parameters for starting control set in step S2501 is executed. Also, in each of the processes of steps S2503 to S2505, animation data set so as to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern each time the image is updated is used. This animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is pre-stored in the memory module 203 and pre-transferred to the work RAM 202 before the display CPU 201 needs to read the data.

After that, a process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system is executed (step S2506). In the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system, a process of grasping the individual image set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images subject to control update by the processes in steps S2503 to S2505 is executed. The grasping is performed based on the currently set execution target table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

That is, since more individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 201 are set than individual images to be controlled by the VDP 205, the adjustment is performed in step S2506. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled by the display CPU 201 and the individual image to be controlled by the VDP 205 may be the same. In this case, the process of step S2506 need not be executed.

<Basic processing in VDP 205>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 205 will be described.

In the VDP 205, at least a process of setting the value of the register 223 based on the command sent from the display CPU 201, a process of creating drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the frame buffer 212 based on the drawing list sent from the display CPU 201, and a process of outputting an image signal to the pattern display device 41 based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 212a and 212b are executed.

Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 223 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) associated with the I/F 226 for the display CPU 201 . Also, the drawing data creation process is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 . Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 225 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

The processing for creating the drawing data will be described in detail below. Before describing the processing, the contents of the rendering list transmitted from the display CPU 201 to the VDP 205 will be described. 69(a) to 69(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

Header information is set in the drawing list. The header information includes target buffer information indicating which one of the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b is to be created for the one-frame image related to the drawing list. Various designation information is set in the header information.

In the drawing list, in addition to the header information, a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system when creating the current drawing data are set, and further, information on the drawing order of each image data and parameter information of each image data are set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set as numerical information of serial numbers, and the parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

In the drawing list of FIG. 69(a), the background image data is set as the first drawing object, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. In addition, the image data for effect is set after the image data for background, for example, object A for effect is set as mth, object B for effect is set as m+1th, and so on. In addition, image data for design is set after these image data for performance, for example, object A for design is set as n-th, object B for design as n+1-th, and so on.

The order in which the respective image data are set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the order in which they are set may be reverse to the above, the image data for performance or the image data for background may be set after the image data for design, or the image data for design may be set in the order between the image data for predetermined performance and other image data for performance.

A plurality of types of parameter information are set in the parameter information P(1), P(2), P(3), . . . , P(m), P(m+1), . Specifically, the parameter information P(1) of the back image data includes, as shown in FIG. 69B, address information of the area in which the back image data is stored in the memory module 203, coordinate information (X value information, Y value information, and Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting the back image data, rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle in the world coordinate system when setting the back image data, and the initial value of the back image data. For the scale set as the state, scale information indicating the magnification when setting in the world coordinate system and uniform α value information indicating the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when setting the image data for the back are set.

Here, coordinate information is individually set for all vertices of the object data. Also, this coordinate information is set for the object data, but is not set for the texture data. In the texture data, coordinate values of each pixel are predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 203 in a state attached to a combination of object data and texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 205 during texture mapping.

The parameter information (P1) includes camera information including information on the coordinates and orientation of a virtual camera when projecting back image data onto a virtual two-dimensional plane for drawing, and light information including information on the position and orientation of a virtual light source that determines shadows when rendering the back image data.

The parameter information (P1) contains Z-test designation information indicating whether or not the Z-buffer method, which is a type of method for removing hidden surfaces, is applied. The Z-buffer method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which, when many objects and two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z-axis direction) within the world coordinate system, the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referenced for each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) arranged on the Z-axis, and the numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 212a and 212b.

In addition to the Z-buffer method, a Z-sort method is also used as a method for removing hidden surfaces. The Z-sorting method is a processing method for depth adjustment in which numerical information set in each pixel arranged on the Z-axis is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 212a and 212b. When the Z sorting method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis is applied with the corresponding α value. Although a detailed description of the processing configuration of hidden surface processing by Z sorting is omitted, it is activated when an effect image is to be displayed.

The parameter information (P1) includes α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is to be applied and to whom it is applied, and fog designation information indicating whether or not fog is to be applied and to which fog is to be applied.

Here, the α value is the transparency information of the corresponding pixel. As methods for setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. A uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 201 . The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of two-dimensional still image data or texture data, and is stored in the memory module 203 in advance as image data. The α data can vary the transparency information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. This α data has a larger data capacity than the program data for setting the uniform α value.

Since the uniform α value and α data are set as described above, in situations where the transparency of two-dimensional still image data and texture data should be uniformly controlled for all pixels instead of finely controlling the transparency for each pixel, the uniform α value can be applied, thereby reducing the necessary data volume, and by applying the α data, it is possible to finely control the transparency for each pixel.

Fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically in the Z-axis direction, in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to express fog or the inside of a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, the image for one frame is fogged in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, in a situation where if the same fog as other objects is applied to an object arranged on the far side in the Z-axis direction, it is too dark to give a texture, another fog may be set for the object. As a result, it is possible to obtain the effect of setting the fog while not impairing the texture.

In other parameters such as parameter information P(2), as shown in FIG. 69(c), object information and texture information are set in place of the back image data information among the various information in FIG. 69(b). As such information, address information of areas in which objects and textures are stored in the memory module 203 is set.

Rendering processing in the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the following description, how drawing data is created as the drawing process is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

First, it is determined whether or not a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 201 (step S2601). If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed (step S2602).

In the background setting process, the background image data for displaying the background image and the object data for displaying the character are grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and object data are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

If it is not arranged, an empty buffer area to be referred to for arranging in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and when an empty buffer area is secured, the area is initialized. After that, the address where the image data is stored in the memory module 203 is grasped and read out, and the coordinate values of the local coordinate system for the image data are converted into the coordinate values of the world coordinate system so as to achieve the coordinates, rotation angle, and scale specified in the drawing list, and are set in the secured buffer area.

If so, the various parameters set in the already reserved buffer area are updated. In the background setting process, a control end process is executed to erase background image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

Thereafter, setting processing for effect is executed (step S2603). In the effect setting process, the object data for displaying the effect image is grasped from among the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data has already been arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If so, update processing of various parameters is executed. Also, in the effect setting process, a control end process is executed to erase image data for effect not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

After that, a design setting process is executed (step S2604). In the design setting process, the object data for displaying the design is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether or not the grasped object data has already been arranged in the world coordinate system. If it is not arranged, the process for starting arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If so, update processing of various parameters is executed. Also, in the design setting process, a control end process is executed to erase image data for a design not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

By executing the processing of steps S2602 to S2604, as shown in FIG. 71, the setting of a scene is completed in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image specified as the arrangement target by the drawing list and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged in the world coordinate system defined by the X, Y, and Z axes at the coordinates, rotation angles, and scales also designated by the drawing list. FIG. 71 simply shows how the image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged.

After that, conversion processing to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S2605). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint, the world coordinate system is transformed into the camera coordinate system (camera space) with the viewpoint as the origin. As a result, as shown in FIG. 71, a viewpoint PC11 indicated by a camera shape is set, and a corresponding coordinate system is set.

Here, camera information is set for each individual image (image data PC1 for the backmost image and various object data PC2 to PC10), and in reality, a camera coordinate system exists for each individual image. By setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image in this way, it becomes possible to switch the viewpoint individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 71 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

Thereafter, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S2606). In the transformation process to the visual field coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is transformed into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. As a result, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image closer to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image farther from the viewpoint is reduced.

Thereafter, clipping processing is executed (step S2607). In the clipping process, the respective individual images extracted in step S2606 are grasped with their respective corresponding viewpoints as a common origin. In this state, each individual image extracted in step S2606 is clipped with reference to the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the frame areas 212a and 212b (that is, the pattern display device 41) to be drawn.

After that, lighting processing is executed (step S2608). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and direction of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows, reflections, etc. are calculated based on the virtual light source for each object extracted by the clipping process.

Thereafter, color information setting processing is executed (step S2609). In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information for each object extracted by the clipping process in units of pixels (that is, in units of polygons) or in units of vertices. In such color information setting processing, basically, texture mapping processing is executed to paste texture data corresponding to each object data extracted by the clipping processing. Also, depending on the situation, processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping are performed.

After that, in steps S2610 and S2611, drawing data is created by projecting (for example, perspective projection or parallel projection) each individual image extracted in step S2607 and for which lighting processing and color information setting processing have been completed onto the screen region PC12, which is a virtual two-dimensional plane.

Specifically, first, drawing data creation processing for effect and background is executed (step S2610). In the rendering data creation processing for the effect and the background, the drawing data for the background is created by projecting the image data for the rearmost image set as the background image and the object data onto the screen area PC12 while removing the hidden surface. Drawing data for rendering is created by projecting onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal on the object data set as the rendering image.

Here, the VRAM 204 is provided with a screen buffer 214 as shown in FIG. 66, and the screen buffer 214 is set with an effect and background buffer into which background drawing data and effect drawing data are collectively written, and a design buffer into which design drawing data is written. Areas with the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC12 are set in the rendering and background buffers and the pattern buffer. The drawing data for the background and the drawing data for effect created in step S2610 are written in the effect and background buffers so that the drawing data for effect is overwritten on a part of the drawing data for background. When the image data for the background is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the background is not created, and when the image data for the presentation is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the presentation is not created.

After that, drawing data creation processing for design is executed (step S2611). In the pattern drawing data creation processing, the object data set as the pattern is projected onto the screen area PC12 while removing the hidden surface, thereby creating the pattern drawing data in the pattern buffer in the screen buffer 214.例文帳に追加If the image data for the design is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for the design is not created.

After that, drawing data synthesis processing is executed (step S2612). In the drawing data synthesizing process, the effect and background drawing data and the pattern drawing data, which are individually created in the screen buffer 214 by the processing in steps S2610 and S2611, are synthesized, and the synthesized result is written in the frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn as drawing data for one frame.

In this case, the writing order is defined to be arranged from the back side to the front side in the order of drawing data for effects and background→drawing data for symbols. Therefore, drawing data for effect and background are first written into the frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn, and then drawing data for symbols are written. At this time, when a completely transparent α value is set for a pixel to be rendered, the image on the back side is used as it is, when the translucent α value is set, the image on the back side and the front image are fused at a ratio based on the α value, and when the opaque α value is set, the operation for blending is performed so that the image on the front side is overwritten on the image on the back side.

Incidentally, although each drawing data is defined to have an area of one frame, a completely transparent α value is set for a blank portion where projection is not performed in the drawing data for design.

The drawing data for one frame is created so as to be completed within a period of 20 msec. An image signal is output from the display circuit 225 to the pattern display device 41 based on the generated drawing data, but since the double-buffer system is adopted as already explained, the output of the image signal is performed in parallel with the generation of the drawing data corresponding to the update timing one frame after the frame corresponding to the output. In addition, the display circuit 225 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame regions 212a and 212b to be referenced each time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. By switching by the selector circuit, the frame regions 212a and 212b that are drawing data drawing targets are regulated so as not to be output targets for outputting the image signal.

Note that steps S2602 to S2607 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 221, and steps S2608 to S2612 are processes executed by the rendering unit 222. FIG.

<Configuration for performing time-based production>
Next, the configuration for performing the time-based production will be described.

The time-dependent effect is an effect in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-dependent effect state for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) each time a predetermined time is reached. As the predetermined times, for example, it is conceivable that they are set at intervals of one hour, such as 10:00, 11:00, 12:00, and so on. In addition, specifically, regarding the effect state corresponding to the time, the background image corresponding to the time is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the music from the speaker unit 45 also correspond to the time. In addition, when the performance state corresponding to the time is established, the special correspondence image can be displayed in the game round resulting in the big win, or the probability of displaying the special correspondence image in the game round resulting in the big win becomes higher than in the state not in the performance state corresponding to the time. By configuring the pachinko machine 10 to be in a performance state corresponding to the time at a predetermined time, for example, when a plurality of the pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, the performance corresponding to the time can be simultaneously performed by the plurality of pachinko machines 10. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 66, the sound emission control device 60 is provided with an RTC 65 in order to enable execution of the time-dependent presentation. The RTC 65 can output time information to the sound and light side MPU 62 . The RTC 65 has its own backup power supply, and can manage the passage of time even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. By acquiring time information from the RTC 65 as necessary, the sound and light side MPU 62 can specify whether or not the time at the acquisition timing is the time corresponding to the start timing of the time-based effect. Then, when the time information obtained from the RTC 65 is the time corresponding to the time corresponding to the start trigger of the time corresponding production, the sound and light side MPU 62 executes processing for starting the time corresponding production.

How the time-based effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. Fig. 72(a) shows a normal period which is a period during which the performance corresponding to the time is not executed, Fig. 72(b) shows a preparation period which is a part of the execution period of the performance corresponding to the time, and Fig. 72(c) shows a special period which is a part of the execution period of the performance corresponding to the time and starts after the preparation period. 73(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the normal period, FIG. 73(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the preparation period, and FIG. 73(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the special period.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), the time information supplied from the RTC 65 to the MPU 62 at the timing of t1 in the normal period in which the time-dependent production is not executed becomes the time information corresponding to the timing for starting the time-dependent production. Accordingly, as shown in FIGS. 72(a) and 72(b), the normal period ends and the preparation period starts at the timing t1. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the normal period as shown in FIG. 73(a) to the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73(b).

The display mode corresponding to the normal period and the display mode corresponding to the preparation period differ in the content of the backmost image displayed in the background image and in the type of background individual image displayed in front of the backmost image. Specifically, two individual background images G61a and G61b are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the normal period, while four individual background images G62a to G62d are displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy during the preparation period than during the normal period, and it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the symbol display device 41 . Further, during the preparation period, the pattern display device 41 displays a remaining time notification image G63 for notifying information corresponding to the remaining time until the start of the special period. As the remaining time notification image G63, the remaining time until the start of the special period is displayed in a subtractive manner. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the start of the special period is approaching. Although the pattern display mode is the same between the normal period and the preparation period, the pattern display mode may be changed.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 72(b) and 72(c), the preparation period ends and the special period starts at the timing t2. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73(b) to the display mode corresponding to the special period as shown in FIG. 73(c).

The display mode corresponding to the preparation period and the display mode corresponding to the special period differ in the contents of the backmost image displayed in the background image and in the type of background individual image displayed in front of the backmost image. Specifically, the number of individual background images G62a to G62d displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period is four, while the number of individual background images G64a to G64g displayed in the display mode corresponding to the special period is seven. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy during the special period than during the preparation period, and the degree of attention of the player to the symbol display device 41 can be increased. Also, during the special period, a special notification image G65 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 for notifying that it is the special period. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that it is the special period. Although the pattern display mode is the same between the preparation period and the special period, the pattern display mode may be changed.

At the timing t3 when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the special period, the special period ends as shown in FIG. 72(c) and returns to the normal period as shown in FIG. 72(a). After that, the time corresponding effect is executed at each of timing t4 to timing t6 and timing t7 to timing t9. In this case, the period from when the time-based effect is started in a predetermined execution time to when the time-based effect is started in the next time is constant at Tf1. In addition, the period from the start of the preparation period to the start of the special period is also constant at Tf2 in each execution time of the performance corresponding to the time. As a result, a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can simultaneously start time-dependent performances, and a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can simultaneously start a special period.

As described above, the time-based effect is executed periodically using the time information of the RTC 65. When the time-based effect starts during the opening/closing execution mode, while the opening/closing execution mode continues, the backmost image for the preparation period and the individual background images G62a to G62d for the preparation period are not displayed as the background image of the pattern display device 41, and furthermore, the background image for the special period and the individual background image G6 for the special period are not displayed as the background image of the pattern display device 41. 4a-G64g are not displayed. However, during the preparation period, a remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the image for the opening/closing execution mode from the front, and in the special period, a special notification image G65 is displayed so as to be superimposed from the front on a part of the image for the opening/closing execution mode. Thus, by preferentially executing the performance for the opening/closing execution mode, the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode can be suitably enhanced, and the player can be made to recognize that the performance corresponding to the time is being executed. In addition, even during the opening/closing execution mode, the manager of the game hall can grasp that it is the execution period of the performance corresponding to the time, and the work of comparing the plurality of pachinko machines 10 and confirming whether or not an abnormality occurs in the RTC 65 can be performed regardless of whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress.

On the other hand, the display mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the output mode of the music from the speaker unit 45 become the mode corresponding to the time from the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time even in the open/close execution mode. As a result, the display mode of the display light-emitting unit 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker unit 45 can be aligned in a time-dependent manner in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 .

When the opening/closing execution mode ends in a situation in which the performance corresponding to the time is started during the opening/closing execution mode and the execution period of the performance corresponding to the time corresponds to the preparation period, the backmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period are started to be displayed as the background image of the pattern display device 41, and the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is continued. Further, if the end timing of the opening/closing execution mode corresponds to the special period, the display of the rearmost image for the special period and the individual background images G64a to G64g for the special period as the background image of the pattern display device 41 is started and the display of the special notification image G65 is continued. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the time-dependent effect in the original execution mode.

The maximum duration of the opening and closing execution mode is longer than the preparation period but shorter than the special period. As a result, when it is time to start the performance corresponding to the time during the opening/closing execution mode, the execution mode corresponding to the time is terminated in the middle of the execution of the performance corresponding to the time. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of executing the time-dependent effect in the original execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the longest continuous period of the opening/closing execution mode may be longer than the execution period of the time-based effect.

When the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time comes in a situation where the performance for the game cycle is executed, the start mode of the performance corresponding to the time is different from the case where the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time comes in the situation where the performance for the game cycle is not executed and the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is not executed. Concretely, when it is time to start the performance corresponding to the time in a situation where the performance for the game cycle is executed, the display mode of the performance for the game cycle is continued for the background image, the performance image and the pattern image as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. That is, the display of the backmost image for the preparation period and the individual background images G62a to G62d for the preparation period as the background image of the pattern display device 41 is not started. However, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed from the front on a part of the background image displayed as an effect for the game round. Incidentally, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as not to overlap with the pattern so as not to reduce the visibility of the pattern.

Hereinafter, how the time-based effect is executed in relation to the execution status of the effect for the game cycle will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 75 . 75(a) shows the start timing of the time-based effect, FIG. 75(b) shows the execution period of the demo display executed in a situation where neither the effect for the game round nor the effect for the open/close execution mode is executed, FIG. 75(c) shows the execution period of the effect for the game round, FIG. 75(d) shows the preparation period, FIG. FIG. 75(g) shows a special period, and FIG. 75(h) shows a light emission control period corresponding to time.

First, a description will be given of a case where the timing for starting the time-based effect is reached while the effect for the game cycle and the effect for the open/close execution mode are not being executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), at the timing t1 in the execution period of the demonstration display, as shown in FIG. 75(a), it becomes the start timing of the time-based effect. In this case, at the timing t1, the preparation period starts as shown in FIG. 75(d), and the display of the preparation period image starts as shown in FIG. 75(f). Also, at the timing t1, the display light-emitting section 44 starts to emit light corresponding to the time as shown in FIG. 75(h). At the timing t1, the speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a manner corresponding to the time.

After that, at the timing t2, which is in the middle of the preparation period, an effect for the game cycle is started as shown in FIG. 75(c). In this case, while the background image for the preparation period is being displayed, the variable display of the symbols is started. In other words, the variable display of the pattern is started while the background image for the preparatory period continues to be displayed in accordance with the previous display pattern.

After that, at the timing of t3 during execution of the effect for the game round, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75(d) and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75(g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started while the variable display of the symbols according to the previous display pattern is continued. Then, at the timing of t4 when the demonstration display is being executed as shown in FIG. 75(b), the execution period guaranteed as the special period elapses, so that the special period ends as shown in FIG. At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the display light emitting unit 44 stops emitting light according to the time. It should be noted that the speaker unit 45 also stops outputting music in the time-dependent mode at the timing t4. In addition, when the execution period secured as a special period has passed in a situation where the performance for the game cycle is executed, the special period ends when the performance for the game cycle is finished and the performance for the game cycle is newly started or when the demonstration display is started.

Next, a description will be given of a case where it is time to start the time-based effect while the effect for the game cycle is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 75(c), at the timing of t5 in the execution period of the performance for game round, as shown in FIG. 75(a), it becomes the start timing of the time corresponding performance. In this case, at the timing t5, the preparation period starts as shown in FIG. 75(d), but the display of the background image for the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73(b) does not start, and the delayed period starts as shown in FIG. 75(e). In the mid-delay period, as already described, the remaining time notification image G63 is added while the image display of the game round effect in accordance with the display pattern up to that point is continued.

On the other hand, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the display light-emitting section 44 starts to emit light corresponding to the time. At the timing t5, the speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a manner corresponding to the time. As a result, the display mode of the display light-emitting unit 44 and the output mode of music from the speaker unit 45 can be aligned in a time-dependent manner in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 .

Thereafter, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 75(c), the effect for the game round which has been executed until then ends, and at the timing of t7, a new effect for the game round is started. At the timing t7, the mid-delay period ends as shown in FIG. 75(e), and the background image for the preparation period starts to be displayed as shown in FIG. 75(f). That is, when the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time comes in the middle of execution of the performance for the game round, the background image for the preparation period is not displayed as an intermediate delay period until the performance for the game round is completed, and the display of the background image for the preparation period is started when the performance for the game round is completed and the performance for the new game cycle is started. Further, when the effect for the game cycle is finished and the effect for the new game cycle is not started, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started when the demonstration display is started. Thus, the period from the end of the performance for the game round to the start of the new performance for the game round or the period until the demonstration display is started can be used as a control period for starting the display of the background image for the preparation period. The demo display is started when 0.5 sec has passed without starting a new game-playing effect or opening/closing execution mode effect after the game-playing effect is finished.

After that, at the timing of t8 during execution of the effect for the game round, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75(d) and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75(g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started while the variable display of the symbols according to the previous display pattern is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 75(b), at the timing of t9 where the demonstration display is being executed, the execution period secured as the special period elapses, and the special period ends as shown in FIG. 75(g). At the timing t9, as shown in FIG. 75(h), the display light emitting section 44 stops emitting light corresponding to the time. It should be noted that the speaker unit 45 also stops outputting music in the time-dependent mode at the timing of t9.

When it is time to start the performance corresponding to the time in the state where the performance for the game round is executed as described above, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the background image displayed as the performance for the game round from the front while continuing the display mode of the performance for the game round for the background image, the performance image and the pattern image. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the performance corresponding to the time is being executed while maintaining the display of the image according to the content already determined as the performance for the game cycle.

In particular, when the display of the background image for the preparatory period is started under the condition that the character image for ready-to-win is displayed as the performance for the game round, the number of kinds of image data used for displaying the image on the pattern display device 41 is extremely increased, and the processing load is likely to be extremely increased. On the other hand, when it is time to start the performance corresponding to the time in a situation where the performance for the game cycle is executed, the display of the image according to the content already determined as the performance for the game cycle is maintained only by adding the remaining time notification image G63. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely high as described above.

Here, the continuation period Tf3 of the preparation period is fixed, and the continuation period Tf3 is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the effect for the game round. Thus, even if the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time comes in a situation where the performance for the game is being executed, the performance for the game during the execution is finished before the preparation period elapses regardless of the variable display time of the performance for the game and the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period starts.

By securing the period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed in this way, when the special period starts, it is possible to start displaying the background image for the special period as shown in FIG. 73(c) from the start timing. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the simultaneous start of display of the background image for the special period on a plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

Next, the data configuration for executing the time-based effect will be described.

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 76(a), the sound and light side ROM 63 stores in advance a data table 231 for time-based effects. The data table 231 for the time corresponding effect is a table referred to in order to perform execution control of the time corresponding effect in the sound and light side MPU 62 . FIG. 76(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data table 231 for the time corresponding effect.

Pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame is set in a data table 231 for performance corresponding to time, and combinations of various timing information, light emission data and sound output data are set in association with each pointer information. By referring to various timing information corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to, the sound and light side MPU 62 can specify the start timing of the preparation period, the transfer timing of the image data group 233 for the special period, the end timing of the preparation period, the start timing of the special period, the return timing of the image data group for normal performance, and the end timing of the execution period guaranteed as the special period. Further, by executing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 using the light emission data (PD(0), PD(1), .

As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 77, the memory module 203 of the display control device 200 stores in advance a preparation period image data group 232, a special period image data group 233, a remaining time correspondence table 234, a preparation period table 235, a special notification correspondence table 236, and a special period table 237. The preparation period image data group 232 includes image data for displaying the backmost image for the preparation period, image data for displaying the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period, and image data for displaying the remaining time notification image G63. The special period image data group 233 includes image data for displaying the background image for the special period, image data for displaying the background individual images G64a to G64g for the special period, and image data for displaying the special notification image G65.

The remaining time correspondence table 234 is data for controlling the display of the remaining time notification image G63 in the preparation period regardless of whether it is a delay period or not, and parameter information applied to the image data for displaying the remaining time notification image G63 is set in association with each piece of pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. The preparation period table 235 is data for controlling the display of the background image for the preparation period in the preparation period which is not the delay period, and parameter information applied to the image data for displaying the background image for the preparation period is set in association with each piece of pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. By separately providing the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235, it is possible to display the remaining time notification image G63 in a situation where the background image for the preparation period is not displayed by referring only to the remaining time correspondence table 234 in order to perform display control for the preparation period in the delay period in which the background image for the preparation period is not displayed even in the preparation period. On the other hand, during the preparation period but not the delay period, by referring to both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235, it is possible to display the remaining time notification image G63 in the situation where the background image for the preparation period is displayed.

The special notification correspondence table 236 is data for controlling the display of the special notification image G65 in the special period regardless of whether it is in the opening/closing execution mode, and parameter information applied to the image data for displaying the special notification image G65 is set in association with each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. The special period table 237 is data for controlling the display of the background image for the special period in the special period which is not the open/close execution mode, and parameter information applied to the image data for displaying the background image for the special period is set in association with each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. By separately providing the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237, the special notification image G65 can be displayed in a situation in which the background image for the special period is not displayed by referring only to the special notification correspondence table 236 in order to perform the display control for the special period during the period in which the background image for the special period is not displayed even in the special period. On the other hand, it is possible to display the special notification image G65 in the situation where the background image for the special period is displayed by referring to both the special notification correspondence table 236 and the table 237 for the special period in the situation that it is the special period and not the opening/closing execution mode.

As already explained, the special period ends when the execution period secured as the special period elapses, but when the performance for the game cycle is being executed or when the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, when the execution period secured as the special period elapses, the performance for the game cycle in progress or the performance for the opening/closing execution mode ends and the performance for the game cycle is newly started or the demonstration display is newly started. Then, when the special period ends, the normal production returns. Corresponding to this, the special period table 237 is set so as to correspond to periods equal to or longer than the longest period in which the special period can continue. Thereby, even if the end timing of the special period occurs irregularly, the special period can be continued until the end timing occurs.

A specific processing configuration for executing the time-based presentation will be described below. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing the RTC handling process executed by the sound and light side MPU 62. FIG. Note that the RTC support process is executed in the table setting process of step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

If it is time to start the preparation period (step S2701: YES), setting processing for starting the preparation period is executed (step S2702). In the preparation period start setting process, as shown in the flow chart of FIG. 79, first, the data table 231 for the time corresponding effect is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 to the sound and light side RAM 64 (step S2801). After that, a command for instructing readout of the preparation period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2802).

FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the command correspondence processing executed by the display CPU 201. FIG. Note that the command handling process is executed in step S2405 of the V interrupt process (FIG. 67). When the display CPU 201 receives a read instruction command for the preparation period data (step S2901: YES), the data other than the texture data in the preparation period image data group 232 is transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2902). The texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period has been transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. By executing the processing in step S2902, regardless of whether or not the delay period starts when the preparation period starts, all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period is read into the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 at the start of the preparation period. This makes it possible to smoothly update the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 during the preparation period.

Returning to the description of the preparation period start setting process (FIG. 79), after executing the process of step S2802, it is determined whether or not the current situation is the delay target situation (step S2803). A situation in which the effect for the game cycle is being executed or a situation in which the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed corresponds to the delay target situation. If the status is to be delayed (step S2803: YES), the delay flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S2804). The in-delay flag is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 62 that it is the delay period. After that, a delay command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2805).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the delay command is received (step S2903: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers the remaining time correspondence table 234 from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2904). As a result, the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is started on the pattern display device 41. FIG.

Returning to the description of the preparation period start setting process (FIG. 79), if the current situation is not the delay target state (step S2803: NO), the preparation display flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S2806). The display flag for preparation is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 62 that the background image for the preparation period is being displayed. Thereafter, a preparatory display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2807).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display start command for preparation is received (step S2905: YES), the display CPU 201 executes read processing for the preparation period (step S2906). In read processing for the preparation period, if the table 234 for the remaining time has already been read to the work RAM 202, the table 235 for the preparation period is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 so that both the table 234 for the remaining time and the table 235 for the preparation period are read to the work RAM 202.例文帳に追加In the preparation period reading process, both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 if the remaining time correspondence table 234 has not been read to the work RAM 202 . By reading both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 to the work RAM 202, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed in a situation where the preparation period background image is being displayed.

Returning to the description of the RTC handling process (FIG. 78), if it is during the preparation period (step S2703: YES), the setting process during the preparation period is executed (step S2704). In the setting process during the preparation period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 81, when neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the data transfer timing (steps S3001 and S3002: NO) and the delay flag of the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3003: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the delay cancellation timing (step S3004). When a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time in a situation where the performance for the game cycle is executed, it is determined that it is time to release the delay when the performance for the game cycle is finished and a new performance for the game cycle is started or when a demonstration display is started. In addition, when a delay period occurs due to the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time in a situation where the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is executed, it is determined that it is time to release the delay when the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is finished and the performance for the new game cycle is started or when the demonstration display is started.

If it is time to cancel the delay (step S3004: YES), the delay flag in the sound and light side RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3005), and the preparation display flag in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3006). Thereafter, a preparatory display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3007). The processing contents of the display CPU 201 when the display start command for preparation is received are as already explained.

In the setting process during the preparation period, if it is determined that it is time to transfer the data based on the data table 231 for the effect corresponding to the time (step S3002: YES), a special period data reading instruction command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3008). As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period data reading instruction command (step S2907: YES), the display CPU 201 causes the data other than the texture data in the special period image data group 233 to be transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2908). Note that the texture data in the image data group 233 for the special period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. By executing the process of step S2908, all of the image data group 233 for the special period has been read into the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 before the special period starts. As a result, the display of the background image for the special period and the special notification image G65 can be started early at the start of the special period, and the background image for the special period and the special notification image G65 can be smoothly updated during the special period.

Returning to the description of the setting process during the preparation period (FIG. 81), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the preparation period based on the data table 231 for the time-based effect (step S3001: YES), the delay flag and the preparation display flag of the sound and light side RAM 64 are cleared to "0" (step S3009), and the special period flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3010). The special period flag is a flag for specifying in the sound and light side MPU 62 that it is a special period. After that, a special period start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3011).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period start command (step S2909: YES), it transfers the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2910). By reading the special notification correspondence table 236 to the work RAM 202, the display of the special notification image G65 is started on the pattern display device 41 regardless of whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is set. Also, if the situation is not the open/close execution mode, the background image for the special effect is started to be displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

Returning to the description of the RTC handling process (FIG. 78), if it is during the special period (step S2705: YES), the setting process during the special period is executed (step S2706). In the setting process during the special period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, if it is not the end timing of the special period (step S3101: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the data return timing based on the data table 231 for the time corresponding effect (step S3102). If it is determined that it is time to restore the data (step S3102: YES), a normal period data read instruction command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3103).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the normal period data reading instruction command (step S2911: YES), the display CPU 201 causes the data other than the texture data among the image data group for displaying the background image for the normal effect in the situation where the time corresponding effect is not executed, to be transferred from the memory module 203 to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2912).

Returning to the description of the setting process during the special period (FIG. 82), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period based on the data table 231 for the time-based effect (step S3101: YES), the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not it is possible to return from the production corresponding to the time to the normal production. The return possible state is the end timing of the execution period when the demonstration display is performed at the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period, and the timing when the performance for the game cycle or the performance for the opening/closing execution mode during execution is finished and the performance for the game cycle or the demonstration display is started when the performance for the game cycle or the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is executed at the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period.

If it is possible to return (step S3104: YES), the light emission control and sound output control for the special period are terminated (step S3105). As a result, the light emission control of the display light emitting part 44 in the mode for normal performance under the condition that the performance corresponding to time is not executed and the sound output control of the speaker part 45 in the mode for normal performance under the condition that the performance corresponding to time is not executed are resumed. Thereafter, the special period flag of the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3106), and a special period end command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3107).

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period end command (step S2913: YES), the table for displaying the background image for the normal effect in the situation where the time corresponding effect is not executed is transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2914). As a result, the display of the background image for the special period ends on the pattern display device 41, and the display of the background image for the normal effect is resumed. In the command handling process, when another command is received, the corresponding process is executed (step S2915).

Next, the table setting process in this embodiment executed by the sound and light MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83. The table setting process is executed in step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

If the command for variation and the type command have been received from the main MPU 52 (step S3201: YES), a game result storage process is executed (step S3202). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the results of the jackpot generating lottery and the distribution lottery determined by the main side MPU 52 at the start of the current game cycle are specified, and the specified information is written in the sound and light side RAM 64.例文帳に追加

Thereafter, when the variation display time corresponding to the variation command received this time from the main side MPU 52 is the variation display time corresponding to the occurrence of the ready-to-win performance (step S3203: YES), selection processing of a lottery table to be used in the lottery processing for determining the type of ready-to-win performance is executed. Specifically, when the preparation display flag of the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3204: YES), the lottery table for preparation period is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 to the sound and light side RAM 64 (step S3205). When the special period flag of the sound and light RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3206: YES), the special period lottery table is read from the sound and light ROM 63 to the sound and light RAM 64 (step S3207). If neither the preparation display flag nor the special period flag is set to "1" (step S3206: NO), the lottery table for normal period is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 to the sound and light side RAM 64. Then, the ready-to-win effect lottery process is executed by using the lottery table selected as the object to be used this time out of the lottery table for the preparation period, the lottery table for the special period and the lottery table for the normal period (step S3209). In the ready-to-win effect lottery processing, the value of the ready-to-win lottery counter at that point in time is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the lottery table selected as the object to be used this time. Then, the ready-to-win lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the ready-to-win lottery counter is acquired as the result of the current ready-to-win effect lottery process.

Here, a plurality of ready-to-win effects are set, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the ready-to-win effect image on the pattern display device 41 is different for each ready-to-win effect. A difference in processing load occurs depending on the type of image data and the size of the image data used for displaying the ready-to-win effect image. The ready-to-win performance includes a large-load performance in which the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the ready-to-reach performance image is the largest, a medium-load performance in which the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying the ready-to-reach performance image is smaller than that in the large-load performance, and a small-load performance in which the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the ready-to-reach performance image is smaller than that in the medium-load performance. In this case, the lottery table for the normal period includes all of the high load effect, the medium load effect and the low load effect as the types of the ready-to-win effect to be selected. On the other hand, the lottery table for the preparation period does not include the large load effect and the medium load effect, but includes the low load effect as the types of ready-to-win effects to be selected. In addition, the lottery table for the special period does not include the high-load presentation, but includes medium-load presentation and low-load presentation as the types of ready-to-win presentations to be selected.

During the special period, as already explained, the background image for the special period is displayed, so the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the pattern display device 41 is greater than during the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, during the special period, the heavy load effect is not selected as the ready-to-win effect. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a large load performance is displayed while displaying a background image for the special period during the special period, thereby preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

When the special period is started, all the image data required for displaying the background image for the special period need to be initialized to the world coordinate system, so the processing load of the VDP 205 is increased as compared with the case of updating the special period. On the other hand, during the preparation period occurring before the special period, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the ready-to-win effect. As a result, even if the transition to the special period occurs in the situation where the performance for the game cycle started in the preparation period is executed, the transition to the special period can be prevented from occurring during the execution of the large load performance and the medium load performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

As already explained, the execution period of the preparation period is set to be longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as an effect for game rounds. Thus, even if a large load performance or a medium load performance can be executed as a ready-to-win performance in the performance for game times started in the normal period, the ready-to-win performance ends by the end timing of the preparation period. Then, as already explained, the high load effect and the medium load effect are not selected in the game round effect started in the preparation period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in the situation where the heavy load performance or medium load performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

The lottery table for the special period includes a ready-to-win effect in which a special corresponding image is displayed as a ready-to-win effect that can be selected in a game round resulting in a big win, while the lottery table for the normal period and the lottery table for the preparation period do not include the ready-to-win effect in which the special corresponding image is displayed. As a result, it is possible to set an effect that occurs only during the special period.

If a negative determination is made in step S3203, or if the processing of step S3209 is executed, stop symbol determination processing is executed (step S3210). The contents of the stop symbol determination process are the same as step S407 of the table setting process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

After that, control pattern table setting processing is executed (step S3211). In the setting processing of the control pattern table, a control pattern table corresponding to the combination of the presence or absence of the ready-to-win performance and the combination of the result of the ready-to-win performance lottery processing (step S3209) and the result of the stop pattern determination processing (step S3210) when the ready-to-win performance is generated is read from the sound and light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound and light side RAM 64.

After that, determination processing of the variable display time is executed (step S3212). In this processing, information on the variable display time of the current game round is specified from the contents of the command for variation received this time from the main side MPU 52, and the information on the specified variable display time is set in a variable time counter provided in the sound and light side RAM 64.例文帳に追加The variable time counter is a counter for the sound and light side MPU 62 to specify the timing of ending the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and starting the fixed display of the symbols in the current game round. The value set in the variable time counter is decremented by 1 each time timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9) is started in the sound and light side MPU 62, that is, each time 4 msec elapses.

Thereafter, a variation pattern command including information corresponding to the control pattern table selected in step S3211 is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3213). As a result, the display CPU 201 starts an effect for the game round on the symbol display device 41, and advances the effect for the game round in accordance with the content of the effect determined by the sound and light side MPU 62. In this case, when it is determined that the ready-to-win effect will occur in the current game turn, the ready-to-win effect selected in step S3209 is executed by the symbol display device 41.例文帳に追加Note that in the table setting process, other processes are executed in step S3214 in addition to the above processes. Other processing contents are the same as step S415 of the table setting processing (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

As described above, when the time information of the RTC 65 is the time corresponding to the start timing of the time-based production, the time-based production is started. As a result, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect when the predetermined time has come. In addition, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, it is possible to simultaneously start the performance corresponding to the time on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

In this case, a preparation period occurs first when the performance corresponding to the time is started, and a special period occurs when the display contents of the image on the pattern display device 41 are more flashy than the preparation period when the preparation period elapses. As a result, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the special period is about to occur, and it is possible to gradually raise expectations for the occurrence of the special period. In the preparation period, a remaining time notification image G63 is displayed on the pattern display device 41, and the remaining time until the start of the special period is displayed in the remaining time notification image G63 in a subtractive manner. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the start of the special period is approaching.

When it comes to the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time in the state that the performance for the game round is executed, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the background image displayed as the performance for the game round from the front while continuing the display mode of the performance for the game round for the background image, the performance image and the pattern image. As a result, it is possible for the player to recognize that the performance corresponding to the time is being executed while maintaining the display of the image according to the content already determined as the performance for the game cycle.

In particular, when the display of the background image for the preparatory period is started under the condition that the character image for ready-to-win is displayed as the performance for the game, the number of kinds of image data used for displaying the image on the pattern display device 41 is extremely increased, and the processing load is likely to be extremely increased. On the other hand, when it is time to start the performance corresponding to the time in a situation where the performance for the game cycle is executed, the display of the image according to the content already determined as the performance for the game cycle is maintained only by adding the remaining time notification image G63. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely large as described above.

The duration of the preparation period is constant, and the duration is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the game round effect. Thus, even if the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time comes in a situation where the performance for the game is being executed, the performance for the game during the execution is finished before the preparation period elapses regardless of the variable display time of the performance for the game and the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period starts.

By securing the period in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed in this way, when the special period starts, the display of the background image for the special period can be started from the start timing. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the simultaneous start of display of the background image for the special period on a plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

Since the background image for the special period is displayed in the special period, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the pattern display device 41 is greater than in the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, during the special period, the heavy load effect is not selected as the ready-to-win effect. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a large load performance is displayed while displaying a background image for the special period during the special period, and to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

When the special period is started, all the image data necessary for displaying the background image for the special period need to be initialized to the world coordinate system, so the processing load of the VDP 205 is increased as compared with the case of updating the special period. On the other hand, during the preparation period occurring before the special period, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the ready-to-win effect. As a result, even if the transition to the special period occurs in the situation where the performance for the game cycle started in the preparation period is executed, the transition to the special period can be prevented from occurring during execution of the large load performance and the medium load performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

The execution period of the preparation period is set to be longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as an effect for game rounds. Thus, even if a large load performance or a medium load performance can be executed as a ready-to-win performance in the performance for game times started in the normal period, the ready-to-win performance ends by the end timing of the preparation period. Then, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected in the game round effect started in the preparation period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in the situation where the heavy load performance or medium load performance is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

Light emission in the display light emitting part 44 in the mode corresponding to the time and sound output in the mode corresponding to the time in the speaker part 45 are started irrespective of whether or not the performance for the game cycle is being executed when the timing for starting the performance corresponding to the time comes. As a result, when it is time to start the performance corresponding to the time in the state where the performance for the game round is executed, the display of the background image for the preparation period on the pattern display device 41 is delayed until the performance for the game round is completed, and even if the contents of the background images are not aligned in the plurality of pachinko machines 10, the light emission contents of the display light emitting part 44 and the sound output contents from the speaker part 45 can be started simultaneously in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to give the impression to the player that the performance corresponding to the time is simultaneously started in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.例文帳に追加

<Another form related to time-based production>
In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed on the symbol display device 41 during the preparation period, the display mode of the symbols variably displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be the display mode for the preparation period, or the predetermined character image may be displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period. Further, during the special period, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the special period is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display mode of the symbols variably displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be the display mode for the special period, or the predetermined character image may be displayed in the display mode corresponding to the special period.

When the execution period secured as the special period has passed in the situation where the demonstration display is performed on the pattern display device 41, the special period may end and the normal performance may be resumed when a predetermined time (for example, 3 sec) has passed from the timing when the execution period has passed. In this case, it is possible to return the image data group for normal performance to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 using the predetermined time, and to perform initial setting for setting the image data group for normal performance with respect to the world coordinate system.

When the execution period guaranteed as a special period has passed in a situation where the performance for the game cycle is being executed, even if the performance for the open/close execution mode is executed following the performance for the game cycle, the special period may end when the performance for the game cycle ends. This makes it possible to prevent the special period from continuing for an extremely long period of time.

It is not limited to the configuration using the RTC 65 to specify the start timing of the time-based effect, and for example, a timer counter provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 may be used to measure the elapsed time since the time-based effect was started last time.

Instead of reading out all of the texture data from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 at the start of supply of operating power to the display CPU 201, texture data to be used may be read each time when it is necessary to use it. In this case, the entire image data group 232 for the preparation period is read in step S2902 in the command correspondence processing (FIG. 80), the entire image data group 233 for the special period is read in step S2908, and the entire image data group for displaying the background image for normal effect is read in step S2912.

During the preparation period, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 84, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a section display area G66 set in a part of the pattern display device 41, and the background image for the preparation period may be displayed in an area other than the section display area G66. Thereby, it becomes possible to emphasize and display that it is a preparation period.

- During the preparation period, the new start of the game-playing effect may be restricted, and the restricted state may be canceled when the special period starts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special period from starting while the performance for the game cycle is being executed.

If neither the performance for the game cycle nor the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is executed when the timing for starting the performance corresponding to the time comes, the special period is started without going through the preparation period, and when the performance for the game cycle or the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed when the timing for starting the performance corresponding to the time comes, the preparation period becomes the preparation period while the performance is being executed, and the special period is started when the performance that was in the middle of execution is finished.

At least one of the light emission control period corresponding to the time in the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control period corresponding to the time in the speaker unit 45 may be configured to be started after a predetermined second has passed from the start timing of the effect corresponding to the time in the pattern display device 41. In this case, it is preferable that the control period to be started after the elapse of the predetermined seconds is started before the special period is started in the symbol display device 41 .

<Further alternative form regarding time-based production>
In this different form, when it is time to start the time-based effect in a situation where the effect for the game cycle or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, no image for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed until the effect for the game cycle or the effect for the opening/closing execution mode, which is in the middle of execution, ends. A processing configuration for producing the effect will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as that of the above-described embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing setting processing for starting the preparation period in this another embodiment.

First, the data table 231 for time corresponding effects is read from the ROM 63 to the RAM 64 (step S3301). After that, a command for instructing readout of the preparation period data is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3302). As a result, the display CPU 201 causes the data other than the texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period to be transferred from the memory module 203 to the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 in the same manner as in the above embodiment. The texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started.

After executing the processing of step S3302, it is determined whether or not the current state is the delay target state (step S3303). A situation in which the effect for the game cycle is being executed or a situation in which the effect for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed corresponds to the delay target situation. If the status is to be delayed (step S3303: YES), the flag during delay provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3304).

If the current status is not the delay target status (step S3303: NO), the preparation display flag provided in the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3305). After that, the continuation period for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the display for preparation is calculated (step S3306). Since the preparatory period starts at the start timing of the time-based production this time, the duration of the display for preparation is the time from the start timing of the time-based production to the start timing of the special period. Then, information corresponding to the preparatory display continuation period calculated in step S3306 is set in the preparatory display start command read from the sound and light side ROM 63 (step S3307), and the preparatory display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3308).

FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing command handling processing in this alternative embodiment. When the display start command for preparation is received (step S3401: YES), the display CPU 201 grasps the remaining period of the preparation period from the display start command for preparation (step S3402). Then, in the case where the count value is subtracted from the remaining time notification image G63 until it reaches a fixed end value (eg, "0") from a fixed start value (eg, "60") within the range of the remaining period of the preparation period, the update cycle of the count value is set (step S3403). Specifically, the display of the count value is started from a fixed start value, and while the update cycle of the count value and the subtraction value (specifically, “1”) of the count value in one update cycle are kept constant, the update cycle of the count value necessary for making the count value a fixed end value in the remaining period of the preparation period is calculated. Then, the preparation period table corresponding to the calculation result is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S3404). As a result, the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is updated according to the update cycle calculated in step S3403. In addition, in the command correspondence processing, processing other than the above processing is also executed.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the setting process during the preparation period in this another form.

If neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the data transfer timing (step S3501 and step S3502: NO) and the delay flag of the sound and light side RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3503: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the delay cancellation timing (step S3504). When a delay period occurs due to the start timing of a performance corresponding to time in a situation where a performance for a game cycle is executed, it is determined that it is time to release the delay when the performance for the game cycle is finished and a new performance for the game cycle is started or when a demonstration display is started. In addition, when the delay period occurs due to the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time in the situation where the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is being executed, it is determined that it is the timing for canceling the delay when the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is finished and the performance for the new game cycle is started or when the demonstration display is started.

If it is time to cancel the delay (step S3504: YES), the delay flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to "0" (step S3505), and the preparation display flag in the RAM 64 is set to "1" (step S3506). After that, the continuation period for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the display for preparation is calculated (step S3507). This time, since the preparatory period starts at a timing later than the start timing of the time-based effect, the remaining period until the start timing of the special period is the continuation period of the display for preparation. Then, the information corresponding to the preparatory display continuation period calculated in step S3507 is set in the preparatory display start command read from the sound and light side ROM 63 (step S3508), and the preparatory display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3509). As a result, the processing of steps S3402 to S3404 already described in the command handling processing (FIG. 86) in the display CPU 201 is executed, so that the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is subtracted from the fixed start value until it reaches the fixed end value in the remaining period of the preparation period as already described.

The processing contents of steps S3510 to S3513 are the same as the processing contents of steps S3008 to S3011 in the setting process (FIG. 81) during the preparation period in the above embodiment.

As described above, when the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time comes in a situation where the performance for the game cycle or the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is executed, the display of the image for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is not started until the performance for the game cycle or the performance for the opening/closing execution mode during execution is finished. As a result, it is possible to prevent the phenomenon that the display of the image for the preparation period is suddenly started in a situation where the expectation for the big winning result is heightened due to the execution of the predetermined ready-to-win performance, and the degree of attention of the player to the predetermined ready-to-win performance is lowered.

Further, in such a constitution that the display of the image for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is not started until the performance for the game cycle in the middle of execution or the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is finished, when the display of the image for the preparation period is started after the performance for the game cycle during execution or the performance for the opening/closing execution mode is finished, the update cycle of the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is set in relation to the remaining continuation period of the preparation period. Thus, even when the display of the image for the preparatory period is started at the timing after the start timing of the performance corresponding to the time, the display of the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 can be performed from the fixed start value to the fixed end value.

<Configuration for performing separate storage effects>
Next, the configuration for performing the separate save effect will be described.

The separately stored effect is a effect in which drawing data created by projecting three-dimensional image data arranged in a world coordinate system onto a virtual two-dimensional plane is stored as separately saved data, and then the separately saved data is set as tabular object data to be arranged in the world coordinate system and projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane along with other image data arranged in the world coordinate system to create drawing data, thereby displaying an image. In addition, during the period in which an image is displayed using the drawing data created based on arranging the separately stored data in the world coordinate system, mask control is performed to exclude the three-dimensional image data, which was subject to projection onto the virtual two-dimensional plane when the separately stored data was created, from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. Image data to be excluded from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane in mask control may be configured not to be arranged in the world coordinate system, or may be configured to be excluded from the projection target without updating the arrangement position, shape, etc. of the image data arranged in the world coordinate system. By creating drawing data using separately stored data and performing mask control in this way, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 205 even when the number of types of images to be displayed increases.

88A and 88B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the specific contents of the separate storage effect. Figs. 88A1 and 88B1 show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and Figs. 88A2 and 88B2 show the contents of an image displayed using drawing data created by projecting onto a virtual two-dimensional plane.

88(a1), the backmost image data 241 is arranged at the farthest position with respect to the viewpoint PC11, the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged in front of it, and the image data 244 for the production character is arranged in front of it, as shown in FIG. 88(a1). The backmost image data 241 is image data obtained by pasting texture data for the backmost surface onto plate-like object data (that is, plate polygons). The plate-shaped object data is object data without thickness, and has a smaller data capacity and a smaller processing load during geometry calculation and rendering in the VDP 205 than three-dimensional object data with thickness.

In the state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88(a1), projection onto a virtual two-dimensional plane is performed to create drawing data, so that one frame of image as shown in FIG. 88(a2) can be displayed on the pattern display device 41. In the one-frame image, a first background individual image G72 and a second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the rearmost image G71, and an effect character image G74 is further displayed in front of them. By changing the arrangement positions and shapes of the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character in the world coordinate system between update timings of a plurality of images, it is possible to change the display position, shape, etc. of the first individual background image G72, the second individual background image G73, and the effect character image G74 in the image of one frame.

In a state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88(a1), the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243 are set as projection targets, while the performance character image data 244 is not set as a projection target, and the projection process is executed onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. It is possible to create two-dimensional drawing data that enables display of a still image as the first separately stored data. By pasting the first separately stored data onto the plate-like polygon data, the first separately stored image data 245 is arranged in the world coordinate system, and the image data 244 for the production character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image are arranged in front of them, thereby obtaining the state shown in FIG. 88(b1). In this state, the first separate stored image data 245, the effect character image data 244, and the additional individual image image data 246 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, thereby making it possible to display an image for one frame on the pattern display device 41 as shown in FIG. 88(b2). In the one-frame image, a first background individual image G72 and a second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the rearmost image G71, and further an effect character image G74 and an additional individual image G75 are displayed in front of them.

However, since the image data for displaying the first individual background image G72 and the second individual background image G73 are arranged in the world coordinate system as a still image using the first separate stored image data 245, it is not possible to individually change the arrangement position, shape, etc. of the first individual background image G72 and the second individual background image G73 between update timings of a plurality of images. On the other hand, the image data for displaying the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are separately arranged in the world coordinate system as the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image, so that it is possible to individually change the arrangement positions, shapes, etc. of the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 between update timings of a plurality of images.

When the drawing data is created using the first separate saved image data 245 as described above, the first separate saved image data 245 is arranged on the front side of the position where the backmost image data 241, the first separate background image image data 242, and the second background separate image image data 243 were arranged when the first separate saved data was created in the world coordinate system. Then, the space MS1 on the far side of the first separate stored image data 245 is excluded from the projection target onto the virtual two-dimensional plane by mask control. As a result, when drawing data is created using the first separate stored image data 245, the number of image data to be projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is reduced in order to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G73 is reduced. Therefore, even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from increasing.

Even in a situation where the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243 are excluded from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane by execution of mask control, parameter information such as coordinate information and scale information for these image data 241 to 243 are stored and retained in the work RAM 202. As a result, when the image data 241 to 243 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to display the image, there is no need to execute processing for securing an area in the work RAM 202 for updating the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243. In order to newly set the parameter information of the image data as an update target, it is necessary to perform initial setting processing such as search processing of the storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and clear processing of the storage area searched by the search processing, and the processing load of the initial setting processing is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. Under such circumstances, the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 to be masked is stored in the work RAM 202, thereby preventing the processing load of the display CPU 201 from becoming extremely large when the masking control is cancelled.

In addition, the display CPU 201 continues the parameter information updating process for the image data 242 for the first individual background image and the image data 243 for the second individual background image even in a situation where the image data 241 to 243 are excluded from the projection target onto the virtual two-dimensional plane due to the execution of the mask control. As a result, immediately after the end of the period during which images are displayed using the first separate saved-image data 245, the movement of the first individual background image G72 and the second individual background image G73 is not restarted from the state immediately before the start of the period, but the movement of the first individual background image G72 and the second individual background image G73 can be restarted from the state in which the movement of the display state immediately before the start of the period has continued for the duration of the period according to the display pattern up to that point. .

Further, even in a situation where the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243 are excluded from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane due to execution of mask control, the VRAM 204 retains the buffer area storing the information referred to for arranging these image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system. As a result, when the image data 241 to 243 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to display the image, there is no need to execute processing for securing a buffer area in the VRAM 204 for storing information referred to in order to arrange the image data 241 to 243 on the world coordinate system. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to search the storage area of the VRAM 204 and perform initial setting processing such as clearing of the storage area searched by the search process. However, by holding the buffer area of the image data 241 to 243 that is subject to mask control in the VRAM 204 as it is, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is canceled.

Here, when it becomes necessary to create separately stored data using image data excluded from a projection target by the mask control in a situation where mask control is being executed, the image data is excluded from the projection target, so that the separately stored data using the image data cannot be created. A case where such an event occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 89(a) to 89(c). FIGS. 89(a1) to 89(c1) show three-dimensional image data arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 89(a2) to 89(c2) show the contents of images displayed using drawing data created by projecting onto a virtual two-dimensional plane.

As shown in FIG. 89(a1), the backmost image data 241 is arranged at the farthest position in the world coordinate system, the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged in front of them, and the image data 244 for the production character is arranged in front of them. It is possible to display the pattern on the pattern display device 41 . In this case, the drawing data created in the arrangement state of the image data 241 to 244 as shown in FIG. 89(a1) is saved as the second separate saved data.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89(b1), the second separately stored data is pasted on the planar polygon data to arrange it in the world coordinate system as the second separately saved image data 247, and the effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged in front of the second separately saved image data 247. By projecting the second separate saved image data 247 and the effect image data 248 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, it is possible to display a one-frame image as shown in FIG. Note that the effect image data 248 is data obtained by pasting texture data for effect images onto plate-like polygon data, and the effect image data 248 is set with an α value for transparency or semi-transparency as a whole, but is not set for opacity.

When the drawing data is created using the second saved image data 247 as described above, the second saved image data 247 is arranged on the front side of the position where the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, the second background individual image image data 243, and the effect character image data 244 were arranged when the second separate saved data was created in the world coordinate system. Then, the space MS2 on the far side of the second separate saved image data 247 is excluded from the projection target onto the virtual two-dimensional plane by mask control. As a result, when drawing data is created using the second separate saved image data 247, the number of image data to be projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is reduced in order to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74, and the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G74 is reduced. Therefore, even if the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from increasing.

However, immediately after the image using the second stored image data 247 is displayed, if it becomes necessary to display the image using the first stored image data 245, the effect character image data 244, and the additional individual image image data 246 as shown in FIG. Since mask control is being performed on the image data 243 for the two background individual images, the first separate saved image data 245 cannot be created. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 88(c1), the first separately stored image data 245 cannot be arranged behind the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image in the world coordinate system, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are displayed in a state where the background image is not displayed as shown in FIG. 88(c2). In addition, for example, if not only the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image, but also the image data 241 for the backmost background, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged in the world coordinate system, and an attempt is made to create drawing data by projecting all of the image data 241 to 244, 246 onto the virtual two-dimensional plane, the processing load of the VDP 205 increases. As a case where such a situation occurs, in the pachinko machine 10, there is a case where it is necessary to display an image using the first separately stored image data 245 immediately after the end of the operation corresponding performance in a configuration where an operation corresponding performance is generated in which an image is displayed using the second separately stored image data 247 when the operation device 48 for performance is operated.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to display an image using the first stored image data 245 immediately after displaying an image using the second stored image data 247.例文帳に追加Hereinafter, how the separate save effect is performed will be described with reference to FIG. 90(a) shows a normal drawing period during which mask control is not executed, FIG. 90(b) shows a mask control period during which mask control is executed, FIG. 90(c) shows the timing when at least one of the first separately saved data and the second separately saved data is executed, and FIG. FIG. 90(e) shows the period during which the second separate storage data is stored in the second separate storage buffer 252 provided in the VRAM 204, FIG. 90(f) shows the operation effective period of the production operating device 48, FIG. 90(g) shows the operation timing of the production operating device 48, and FIG. 90(h) shows the execution period of the operation corresponding production.

First, the case where an image is displayed using the first separate stored image data 245 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 90(a), during the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed, the timing of t1 becomes the saving execution timing of the first separate saved data as shown in FIG. 90(c). In this case, the first separate save data is created as shown in FIGS. As a result, the first separate save image data 245 is stored and held in the first separate save buffer 251 at timing t1 as shown in FIG. 90(d).

After that, at timing t2, it becomes a period in which an image using the first separate stored image data 245 is displayed, and thus a period in which mask control is performed as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). In this case, even during the period when the mask control is performed, various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 to be displayed in the first separate stored image data 245 are stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the update processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201.

After that, at the timing of t3, the period for displaying the image using the first separate stored image data 245 ends, so that the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the display CPU 201 continues updating the various parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73. Therefore, the display of these images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of the mask control has passed from the timing when the mask control is started.

Next, a case where an image using the first stored image data 245 is displayed immediately after an image using the second stored image data 247 is displayed will be described. In the following description, FIGS. 91(a) to 91(c) will be referred to as needed. 91(a) to 91(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how an image is displayed using the first separately stored image data 245 and an image is displayed using the second separately stored image data 247. FIGS. 91(a1) to 91(c1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 91(a2) to 91(c2) show drawing data created by projecting onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. Indicates the content of the image to be used and displayed.

In the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90(a), timing t4 becomes the start timing of the operation effective period of the operating device 48 for effect as shown in FIG. 90(f). In this case, at the timing of t4, separate storage is executed as shown in FIG. 90(c). At the execution timing of this separate storage, both the first separately stored data and the second separately stored data are subject to separate storage.

The manner in which both the first stored data by type and the second stored data by type are created will be described with reference to FIG. 91(a). As shown in FIG. 91(a1), the backmost image data 241 is arranged at the farthest position in the world coordinate system, the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged in front of them, and the image data 244 for the production character is arranged in front of them. It becomes possible to display it on the pattern display device 41 . In this case, drawing data created by projecting all of the image data 241 to 244 shown in FIG. 91(a1) onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is stored in the second separate storage buffer 252 as the second separate storage data. The second separate stored data is data that enables the display of still images of the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74.

91(a1), the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243 are set as the projection targets, while the performance character image data 244 is not set as the projection target, and the projection processing onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is executed, whereby the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G are executed. Two-dimensional drawing data that enables display of the still image 73 is created as the first separately stored data. Then, the first separate save data is saved in the first separate save buffer 251 .

Returning to the description with reference to FIG. 90, at timing t4, the first separately saved data and the second separately saved data are created, so that the first separately saved data is stored and held in the first separate save buffer 251 as shown in FIG. 90(d), and the second separately saved data is stored and held in the second separate save buffer 252 as shown in FIG.

After that, at the timing of t5, the effect operation device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 90(g), thereby starting the operation corresponding effect as shown in FIG. 90(h). In this case, as shown in FIG. 91(b1), the second separately stored data is pasted on the planar polygon data and arranged in the world coordinate system as the second separately stored image data 247, and the effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged in front of the second separately saved image data 247. Then, by projecting the second separate stored image data 247 and the effect image data 248 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, it is possible to display a one-frame image as shown in FIG. 91(b2) on the pattern display device 41.

By starting the operation corresponding effect at the timing t5, it becomes a period during which the mask control is performed as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b) at the timing t5. In this case, even during the period in which the mask control is performed, various parameter information about the image data 241 to 244 corresponding to the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74, which are to be displayed in the second separate stored image data 247, are stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the display CPU 201 continues updating the various parameter information.

After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 90(h), the operation corresponding effect ends. In this case, the display of the image using the first another saved image data 245 is started at the timing t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 91(c1), the first separately stored data is pasted onto the planar polygon data and arranged in the world coordinate system as the first separately stored image data 245, and in front of it, the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image are arranged. In this state, the first separate saved image data 245, the effect character image data 244, and the additional individual image image data 246 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, thereby enabling the symbol display device 41 to display an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91(c2). In this case, since the display CPU 201 continues updating the parameter information of the effect character image data 244 even during the mask control period as described above, the display of the effect character image G74 is started in a display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of the mask control has passed with respect to the timing when the mask control is started.

By starting to display an image using the first separate stored image data 245 at the timing t6, the mask control is continued as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). However, the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 are subject to mask control, and the image data 244 and 246 corresponding to the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are not subject to mask control. Various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the images G71 to G73 to be masked are stored in the work RAM 202, and the display CPU 201 continues updating the parameter information.

After that, at the timing of t7, the period for displaying the image using the first separate stored image data 245 ends, thereby ending the mask control as shown in FIGS. In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the display CPU 201 continues updating the various parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73. Therefore, the display of these images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of the mask control has passed from the timing when the mask control is started. As a result, it is possible to match the contents of the effect with the effect execution device other than the pattern display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45 .

Next, a case where both the first separately stored data and the second separately stored data are separately stored but the image is displayed using the first separately stored image data 245 without being displayed using the second separately stored image data 247 will be described.

During the normal drawing period in which the mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90(a), the operation effective period of the operation device 48 for effect as shown in FIG. 90(f) becomes the start timing at the timing of t8. In this case, as in the case of the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 90(c), the execution timing of the separate storage of both the first saved data separately and the second saved data separately becomes. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 90(d), the first separate save data is stored and held in the first separate save buffer 251, and as shown in FIG. 90(e), the second separate save data is stored and held in the second separate save buffer 252.

However, as shown in FIGS. 90(f) and 90(g), at the timing of t9, the effective operation period elapses without the operating device 48 for presentation being operated. In this case, since no image is displayed using the second separate stored image data 247, mask control is not executed from timing t8 to timing t9. Therefore, at the timing of t9, the first separate saved data to be used thereafter is created again. That is, the first separate data created at the timing of t8 and stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 is erased, and the first separate storage data created at the timing of t9 is newly stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to display the images G71 to G73 in a display mode closer to the timing of using the first stored image data 245 as images using the first stored image data 245 separately. Note that the timing at which the first separate data is newly created is the timing for updating the image next to the timing for updating the image for which the valid operation period has passed.

Thereafter, at timing t10, the display of an image using the first separate stored image data 245 is started, thereby starting mask control as shown in FIGS. 90(a) and 90(b). However, the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 are subject to mask control, and the image data 244 and 246 corresponding to the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are not subject to mask control. Various parameter information about the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the images G71 to G73 to be masked are stored in the work RAM 202, and the display CPU 201 continues updating the parameter information.

After that, at the timing of t11, the period for displaying the image using the first separate stored image data 245 ends, so that the mask control ends as shown in FIGS. In this case, as described above, even during the mask control period, the display CPU 201 continues updating the various parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73. Therefore, the display of these images G71 to G73 is started from the display mode corresponding to the timing after the execution period of the mask control has elapsed from the timing at which the mask control is started. As a result, it is possible to match the effect contents with the effect execution device other than the pattern display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45 .

A specific processing configuration for executing the separate save effect will be described below. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for the separate save effect executed by the display CPU 201 . Incidentally, the arithmetic processing for the separate save effect is executed in the background arithmetic processing of step S2503 in the task processing (FIG. 68) in the game turn in which the separate save effect is to be executed.

First, by updating the pointer information to be referred to in the execution object table read out to the work RAM 202 in order to control the performance for the current game round, the content of the data to be referred to in the execution object table is made the data corresponding to the current processing round (step S3601). After that, if neither the operation corresponding effect is being executed nor the operation valid period (step S3602 and step S3603: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the usage period of the first separate stored data (step S3604). The utilization period of the first separately stored data is generated when the elapsed time of the game round reaches a predetermined time in the case of the game round in which the operation valid period does not occur and the separate storage performance occurs, and in the case of the game round in which the operation valid period occurs, the operation valid period elapses without the operation corresponding performance being executed or the operation corresponding performance ends.

If it is not the usage period of the first individual stored data (step S3604: NO), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S3605). The image data includes backmost image data 241 , first background individual image image data 242 , second background individual image image data 243 , and effect character image data 244 . After that, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 for the backmost background, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, and the image data 243 for the second individual background image, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 202 corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244 (steps S3606 and S3607). After that, the non-use instruction information of the separately stored data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3608). If it is time to create the first separate data (step S3609: YES), the first creation instruction information of the separate data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3610).

When the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the various image data 241 to 244 grasped in step S3605 are set as objects to be arranged in the world coordinate system in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407). Also, parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set in the drawing list. In addition, the non-use instruction information of the separately stored data is set in the drawing list, and the first creation instruction information of the separately stored data is set when this time is the creation timing of the first separately stored data.

If it is during the usage period of the first separate stored data in the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect (step S3604: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (steps S3611 to S3613). The image data includes the first separate save data stored in the first separate save buffer 251, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image. After that, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the effect character, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the image data 246 for the additional individual image, and the first separate storage data, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244, 246 (steps S3614 to S3614). 3617). In this case, the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243 are not to be arranged in the world coordinate system. After that, the usage instruction information of the separately saved data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3618).

When the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the various image data 241 to 244 and 246 grasped in steps S3611 to S3613 are set as objects to be arranged in the world coordinate system in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407). Parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 and 246 is set in the drawing list. In addition, use instruction information of separately saved data is set in the drawing list.

In the calculation processing for the separate storage effect, if it is the operation effective period (step S3603: YES), the operation effective period process is executed at step S3618, and if the operation corresponding effect is being performed (step S3602: YES), the operation corresponding effect process is executed at step S3619. The operation valid period processing and the operation corresponding rendering processing will be described below.

FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing processing during the valid period of operation.

If it is time to start the effective period of operation (step S3701: YES), the second creation instruction information of the separately saved data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3702). When the process of step S3702 is executed, or when the operation effective period is not started and the effect operation device 48 is not operated (steps S3701 and S3703: NO), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S3704). The image data includes backmost image data 241 , first background individual image image data 242 , second background individual image image data 243 , and effect character image data 244 . After that, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the effect character, the image data 241 for the backmost background, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, and the image data 243 for the second individual background image, and the derived parameter information is written in an area secured in the work RAM 202 corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244 (steps S3705 and S3706). After that, the effective period information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3707). If it is the end timing of the effective period of operation (step S3708: YES), the first creation instruction information of the separately saved data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3709).

When the operation valid period processing is executed as described above, the various image data 241 to 244 grasped in step S3704 are set as objects to be arranged in the world coordinate system in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407). Also, parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set in the drawing list. In addition, effective period information is set in the drawing list, second creation instruction information of separately stored data is set if this time is the start timing of the operation valid period, and first creation instruction information of the separately stored data is set if this time is the end timing of the operation valid period.

If the effect operation device 48 is operated in the operation effective period processing (step S3703: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (steps S3710 and S3711). The image data includes the second separate save data stored in the second separate save buffer 252 and the effect image data 248 . After that, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the effect character, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, the image data 243 for the second individual background image, the effect image data 248, and the second separate storage data, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to each of these image data 241 to 244, 248 in the work RAM 202 (steps S3712 to S3715). ). In this case, the image data 244 for the effect character, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, and the image data 243 for the second individual background image are not to be arranged in the world coordinate system, but the parameter information of these image data 241 to 244 are stored in the work RAM 202 and updated. After that, the operation corresponding effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3716).

When the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the various image data 248 ascertained in steps S3710 and S3711 are set in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407) as objects to be arranged in the world coordinate system. Parameter information to be applied to the image data 248 is also set in the drawing list. In addition, operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list.

FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing processing during operation-response rendering.

First, based on the currently set execution target table, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (steps S3801 and S3802). The image data includes the second separate save data stored in the second separate save buffer 252 and the effect image data 248 . After that, parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the image data 244 for the effect character, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, the image data 243 for the second individual background image, the effect image data 248, and the second separate storage data, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured corresponding to each of these image data 241 to 244, 248 in the work RAM 202 (steps S3803 to S3806). ). In this case, the image data 244 for the effect character, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first individual background image, and the image data 243 for the second individual background image are not to be arranged in the world coordinate system, but the parameter information of these image data 241 to 244 are stored in the work RAM 202 and updated. After that, the operation corresponding effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3806).

When the arithmetic processing for the separate storage effect is executed as described above, the various image data 248 ascertained in steps S3801 and S3802 are set as objects to be arranged in the world coordinate system in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407). Parameter information to be applied to the image data 248 is also set in the drawing list. In addition, operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list.

Next, setting processing for separate storage display performed by the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The setting process for separate storage display is executed as part of the background setting process executed in step S2602 of the drawing process (FIG. 70). Further, when the non-use instruction information of the separately stored data, the use instruction information of the separately stored data, the validity period information, or the operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list, the setting process for the separately stored display is executed.

If the current drawing list does not contain the usage instruction information for the separately stored data and the current drawing list does not contain the operation corresponding effect information (step S3901: NO), the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, the second background individual image image data 243, and the effect character image data 244 are grasped as objects to be placed in the world coordinate system based on the current drawing list (step S3902). Also, parameter information to be applied to the image data 241 to 244 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3903). Then, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed in a state in which the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the image data 241 to 244 to be arranged (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame is displayed on the pattern display device 41 as shown in FIG. 91(a2).

If the usage instruction information for separately stored data is set in the current drawing list (step S3905: YES), the first separately stored data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image are grasped as objects to be placed in the world coordinate system based on the current drawing list (steps S3906 to S3908). Also, the parameter information to be applied to the first individual stored data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3909). Then, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed in a state in which the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the first separate stored data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame is displayed on the pattern display device 41 as shown in FIG. 91(c2).

If the current drawing list has operation-responsive effect information set (step S3905: NO), the second separate data and the effect image data 248 are grasped as objects to be placed in the world coordinate system based on the current drawing list (steps S3910 and S3911). Also, the parameter information to be applied to the second separate data and the effect image data 248 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3912). Then, setting processing to the world coordinate system is executed in a state in which the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the second separate saved data and the effect image data 248 (step S3904). As a result, an image for one frame is displayed on the pattern display device 41 as shown in FIG. 91(b2).

Next, drawing data creation processing for separate storage display performed by the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The drawing data creation process for separate storage display is executed as part of the drawing data creation process for effect and background executed in step S2610 of the drawing process (FIG. 70). In addition, when non-use instruction information of separately stored data, use instruction information of separately stored data, effective period information, or operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list, drawing data creation processing for separately saved display is executed.

If the current rendering list contains the first creation instruction information of the separately saved data or the second creation instruction information of the separately saved data (step S4001: YES), the first separate saved data is created by projecting the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane (step S4002). Then, the created first separate save data is written in the first separate save buffer 251 of the VRAM 204 (step S4003). As a result, the first separate save data is stored and held in the first separate save buffer 251 .

If a negative determination is made in step S4001 or if the process of step S4002 is executed, rendering data for displaying one of the images in FIGS. 91(a2), 91(b2), and 91(c2) is created (step S4004). The drawing data is used in the drawing data synthesizing process in step S2612 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) to display an image of one frame.

After that, if the second creation instruction information for the separate save data is set in the current drawing list (step S4005: YES), the drawing data created in the previous step S4004 is written as the second separate save data in the second separate save buffer 252 of the VRAM 204 (step S4006). As a result, the second separate save data is stored and held in the second separate save buffer 252 . Moreover, since the drawing data used for displaying the image for one frame is used as the second separately stored data, the processing load for creating the second separately stored data can be suppressed.

As described above, when images are displayed using the first separate stored data, it is possible to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 while performing mask control on the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243. As a result, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 is reduced, and even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to suppress the processing load of the VDP 205 from increasing. Further, when images are displayed using the second separate stored data, it is possible to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 while performing mask control on the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, the second background individual image image data 243, and the effect character image data 244. As a result, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 is reduced, and even if the effect image G76 is newly added as a display object, it is possible to suppress the increase of the processing load of the VDP 205.

Parameter information of image data excluded from projection onto the virtual two-dimensional plane due to the execution of mask control is stored and held without being erased from the work RAM 202 . As a result, when returning to the period in which the image is displayed by projecting the image data onto the virtual two-dimensional plane, there is no need to execute processing for securing an area in the work RAM 202 for updating the parameter information of the image data. In order to newly set the parameter information of the image data as an update target, it is necessary to perform initial setting processing such as search processing of the storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and clear processing of the storage area searched by the search processing, and the processing load of the initial setting processing is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. In such circumstances, by storing and holding the parameter information of the image data to be masked in the work RAM 202, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the display CPU 201 from becoming extremely large when the masking control is cancelled.

Further, the display CPU 201 continues updating the parameter information of the predetermined image data even in a situation where the predetermined image data is excluded from the target of projection onto the virtual two-dimensional plane due to execution of the mask control. As a result, immediately after the period in which the image using the first separately stored data or the second separately stored data is displayed ends, the movement of the image corresponding to the predetermined image data is not restarted from the state immediately before the start of the period, but the movement of the image corresponding to the predetermined image data can be restarted from the state in which the change in movement is continued for the time during which the period continues according to the display pattern up to that point, with respect to the display state immediately before the start of the period. As a result, it is possible to match the contents of the effect with the effect execution device other than the pattern display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45 .

Further, even in a situation where the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image image data 243 are excluded from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane due to execution of mask control, the VRAM 204 retains the buffer area storing the information referred to for arranging these image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system. As a result, when the image data 241 to 243 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to display the image, there is no need to execute processing for securing a buffer area in the VRAM 204 for storing information referred to in order to place the image data 241 to 243 on the world coordinate system. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to search the storage area of the VRAM 204 and perform initial setting processing such as clearing of the storage area searched by the search process. However, by holding the buffer area of the image data 241 to 243 that is the target of mask control in the VRAM 204 as it is, it is possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is canceled.

When a period for displaying an image using the first separately stored data can occur immediately after the period for displaying the image using the second separately stored data ends, not only the second separately stored data but also the first separately stored data is created before the start of the period for displaying the image using the second separately stored data. As a result, even in a configuration in which mask control is performed on the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separately stored data during the period in which the image using the second separately stored data is displayed, the image using the first separately stored data can be displayed immediately after the period for displaying the image using the second separately stored data ends.

Further, even in a configuration in which the first separately stored data is created before a period for displaying an image using the second separately stored data is started, if mask control is not executed for the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separately stored data because the period for displaying the image using the second separately stored data does not occur, the first separately stored data is newly created immediately before the display of the image using the first separately stored data is started. As a result, it is possible to display the images G71 to G73 in the display modes closer to the timing of using the first stored data separately as images using the first stored data separately.

<Another form regarding another storage effect>
Instead of storing and holding both the first separately saved data and the second separately saved data when the operation valid period starts, one of the separately saved data and the second separately saved data may be stored and held at a predetermined timing before the operation valid period starts, and the other separately saved data may be stored and held after the predetermined timing and before the operation valid period starts or at the operation valid period start timing. In this case, it is possible to distribute the processing load compared to a configuration in which both the first separately stored data and the second separately stored data are stored and held in the same processing cycle.

In place of the configuration in which the image data to be subjected to mask control is not arranged in the world coordinate system when mask control is being executed, the image data to be subjected to mask control may also be arranged in the world coordinate system but excluded from being projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. In this case, when the mask control ends, there is no need to execute processing for rearranging the image data subject to the mask control in the world coordinate system. Further, in this configuration, the image data subject to mask control may be arranged in the world coordinate system, but the parameter information applied to the image data in the VDP 205 may not be changed. However, it is preferable to continue updating the parameter information of the image data in the display CPU 201 .

Instead of the configuration in which the display CPU 201 continues to update the parameter information of the image data subject to mask control, the display CPU 201 may not update the parameter information of the image data subject to mask control. In this case, the operation of the image corresponding to the image data subject to mask control is resumed from the display state of the image corresponding to the separately saved data. Even with this configuration, it is preferable that the work RAM 202 stores and holds the state in which the parameter information to be subjected to the mask control is stored during execution of the mask control.

- Separately stored data separately stored in advance is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. Also, the above mask control configuration may be applied to a configuration in which there is only one type of separately stored data.

<Configuration for effecting angle display>
Next, a configuration for performing an angle display effect will be described.

The angle display performance is a performance of using a plurality of types of moving images that enable display of display objects whose movements change with the lapse of time in a state of being viewed from different angles, and changing the use object to a moving image of an angle different from the moving image that has been used until then based on the operation of the operation device 48 for performance. Specific display contents of the angle display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b). As shown in FIGS. 97(a) and 97(b), in the angle display rendering, a live image is displayed as a moving image. In this photographed image, a person is displayed as the photographed character image G81, and the movement of the photographed character image G81 is displayed as a moving image. FIG. 97(a) corresponds to a moving image of the person in the actual character image G81 taken from an angle A that is a predetermined angle with respect to the actual character image G81, and FIG. 97(b) corresponds to a moving image of the person in the actual character image G81 from an angle different from the A angle. In addition to the A-angle video and the B-angle video, there is also a video image of a person in the actual character image G81 from a C-angle different from the A-angle and B-angle.

The contents of the data pre-stored in the memory module 203 for executing the angle display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

A memory module 203 stores in advance a first moving image data group 261 of A angle, a second moving image data group 262 of A angle, and a third moving image data group 263 of A angle as moving image data for displaying the moving image of A angle in the memory module 203 as data for executing the angle display effect. In the memory module 203, a first moving image data group 264 of B angle, a second moving image data group 265 of B angle, and a third moving image data group 266 of B angle are stored in advance as moving image data for displaying the moving image of B angle. In addition, the memory module 203 stores in advance a C-angle first moving image data group 267, a C-angle second moving image data group 268, and a C-angle third moving image data group 269 as moving image data for displaying a C-angle moving image.

99A shows the first video data group 261 of the A angle, FIG. 99B shows the second video data group 262 of the A angle, FIG. 99C shows the third video data group 263 of the A angle, FIG. 99D shows the first video data group 264 of the B angle, and FIG. 99E shows the second video data of the B angle. 99(f) shows the third moving image data group 266 of B angle, FIG. 99(g) shows the first moving image data group 267 of C angle, FIG. 99(h) shows the second moving image data group 268 of C angle, and FIG. 99(i) shows the third moving image data group 269 of C angle.

As shown in FIGS. 99(a) to 99(i), each moving image data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of pieces of moving image data 271a to 273c. As already described, the moving image data 271a to 273c are image data that are interframe-compressed so as to have a plurality of differential data based on one frame of still image data, and are encoded, for example, by the MPEG2 method. When the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded, they are developed into still image data for a plurality of frames.

Each piece of moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has a data amount set so that the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Specifically, for the still image data of the minimum unit number, each of the moving image data 271a to 273c can reproduce 48 pieces of still image data, in other words, it is possible to update the image 48 times (update 48 frames). Each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has the same number (specifically, 20 pieces) of such moving image data 271a to 273c.

The first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle, and the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle are all for displaying a series of moving images showing how the actual character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern as viewed from an angle corresponding to the A angle. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle is divided into a plurality of pieces of moving image data 271a to 271c in each moving image data group 261 to 263 of the A angle. In this case, in each moving image data group 261 to 263 of the A angle, the still image data of the last order in the moving image data 271a to 271c whose order to be decoded is in a predetermined order and the still image data of the first order in the moving image data 271a to 271c which is next in the predetermined order have continuity in the motion of the photographed character image G81 in the predetermined motion pattern. Therefore, in the case of the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the moving image data 271a included in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle is sequentially decoded in accordance with a predetermined decoding order, and an image is displayed. Thus, it is possible to display a series of actions in which the actual character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed from an angle corresponding to the A angle. In the case of the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle, the moving image data 271b included in the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle is sequentially decoded in accordance with a predetermined decoding order, and the image is displayed. Thus, it is possible to display a series of actions in which the actual character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed from an angle corresponding to the A angle. In the case of the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle, the moving image data 271c included in the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle is sequentially decoded in accordance with a predetermined decoding order, and the image is displayed while the moving image data 271c included in the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle is sequentially decoded. This makes it possible to display a series of actions in which the actual character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed from an angle corresponding to the A angle.

The first moving image data group 264 of the B angle, the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, and the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle are all for displaying a series of moving images showing how the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern as viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 272a to 272c in each moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle. In this case, in each of the moving image data groups 264 to 266 of the B angle, the still image data in the last order in the moving image data 272a to 272c whose order to be decoded is in a predetermined order and the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 272a to 272c in the following order relative to the predetermined order have continuity in the motion of the photographed character image G81 in the predetermined motion pattern. Therefore, in the case of the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle, the moving image data 272a included in the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle is sequentially decoded in accordance with a predetermined decoding order, and the image is displayed while the moving image data 272a included in the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle is sequentially decoded. Thus, it is possible to display a series of actions in which the actual character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed from an angle corresponding to the B angle. In the case of the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, the moving image data 272b included in the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle is sequentially decoded in accordance with a predetermined decoding order, and the image is displayed while the moving image data 272b included in the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle is sequentially decoded. Thus, it is possible to display a series of actions in which the actual character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed from an angle corresponding to the B angle. In the case of the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle, the moving image data 272c included in the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle is sequentially decoded in accordance with a predetermined decoding order to display an image, thereby making it possible to display a series of actions in which the actual character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed from an angle corresponding to the B angle.

The C-angle first moving image data group 267, the C-angle second moving image data group 268, and the C-angle third moving image data group 269 are all for displaying a series of moving images showing how the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern as seen from an angle corresponding to the C angle. A series of moving images viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 273a to 273c in each moving image data group 267 to 269 of the C angle. In this case, in each moving image data group 267 to 269 of the C angle, the still image data in the last order in the moving image data 273a to 273c whose order to be decoded is in a predetermined order and the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 273a to 273c in the following order relative to the predetermined order have continuity in the motion of the photographed character image G81 in the predetermined motion pattern. Therefore, in the case of the C-angle first moving image data group 267, the moving image data 273a included in the C-angle first moving image data group 267 is sequentially decoded in accordance with a predetermined decoding order, and an image is displayed. Thus, it is possible to display a series of motions of the actual character image G81 moving according to a predetermined motion pattern as viewed from an angle corresponding to the C-angle. In the case of the C-angle second moving image data group 268, the moving image data 273b included in the C-angle second moving image data group 268 is sequentially decoded according to a predetermined decoding order, and the image is displayed while the moving image data 273b included in the C-angle second moving image data group 268 is sequentially decoded. This makes it possible to display a series of actions in which the actual character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed from an angle corresponding to the C angle. In the case of the C-angle third moving image data group 269, an image is displayed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 273c included in the C-angle third moving image data group 269 in accordance with a predetermined decoding order, thereby making it possible to display a series of actions in which the actual character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern as viewed from an angle corresponding to the C angle.

Since the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded to derive the still image data, it is not possible to start displaying the image at the timing in the middle of the moving image data 271a to 273c, and if the image display is started at the timing in the middle of the moving image data 271a to 273c, a processing wait time is generated until the still image data at the timing in the middle is derived. In this case, since each moving image data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c, it is possible to use the timing of switching between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order as the angle change timing. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of angle among A-angle, B-angle and C-angle during execution of the angle display effect.

Here, in the angle display effect, the angle change opportunity is generated by the operation of the effect operation device 48 . In this case, unless the change of the angle occurs early with respect to the operation timing of the operation device 48 for performance, it becomes difficult to give the player the impression that the angle has been changed with the operation of the operation device 48 for performance as a trigger. On the other hand, as already explained, each of the angles A to C has a plurality, specifically three, of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image. Further, the number of image updates (number of frames) after the start of the angle display effect corresponding to the first-order still image data in the arbitrary moving image data 271a-273c differs among the moving image data groups 261-269 within the same angle.

Specifically, in the first moving image data groups 261, 264, and 267 in each angle A to C, the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the first order corresponds to the start timing of the angle display effect, and the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the subsequent order correspond to the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the previous order. .about.273c corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image progresses by the number corresponding to the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set. In this case, the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle, the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle, and the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle have the same number of moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a, and the number of image updates after the start of the angle display effect corresponding to the still image data of the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in mutually corresponding order is the same.

In the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268 in each of the angles A to C, the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b in each order corresponds to the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the first moving image data groups 261, 264, and 267 in each of the angles A to C, and the moving image is displayed for the first reference period K1. corresponds to the timing at which In other words, in the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268 in each angle A to C, the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b in the first order corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image progresses for the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect, and the moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b in the subsequent order correspond to the moving image data in the previous order 271b, 271b, and 273b. 72b and 273b correspond to the timing at which the moving image display progresses by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, each moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 partially overlaps the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a included in the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267 at the same angle and the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the corresponding order and the still image data created by decoding. are In other words, all the still image data created from the single moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 are included in the still image data created from the two continuous moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a included in the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267.

In the third moving image data groups 263, 266, and 269 in each of the angles A to C, the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c in each order corresponds to the still image data in the first order in the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268 in each of the angles A to C, and the still image data in the first order in the second video data groups 262, 265, and 268 in each of the angles A to C is displayed as a moving image for the second reference period K1. corresponds to the timing at which In other words, in the third moving image data groups 263, 266, and 269 for each angle A to C, the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c in the first order corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image progresses for the second reference period K2, which is twice the first reference period K1, with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect, and the moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c in the subsequent order correspond to the timing before the display. corresponding to the moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c in the order of , the moving image display progresses by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, each of the moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c included in the third moving image data groups 263, 266, and 269 partially overlaps the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a included in the first moving image data groups 261, 264, and 267 at the same angle and the moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a in the corresponding order and the still image data created by the decoding process. In addition, the moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b included in the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268 at the same angle and in the corresponding order, and the still image data created by the decoding process partially overlap. Furthermore, all the still image data created by the single moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c included in the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269 are included in the still image data created by the continuous two pieces of moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a included in the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267, and the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268 include It is included in the still image data created by the two consecutive moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b.

The number of still image data reproducible in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of still image data reproducible by one moving image data 271a-273c included in each of the moving image data 271a-273c. In other words, the number of image updates (the number of frames) in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of image updates by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of pieces of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 16, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 16 times.

The number of still image data reproducible in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of still image data reproducible by one moving image data 271a-273c included in each of the moving image data 271a-273c. In other words, the number of image updates (the number of frames) in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of image updates by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of pieces of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 32, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 32 times.

As described above, a plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 are provided for displaying the same moving image at each angle A to C, respectively. In each angle, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268 are shifted from the first moving image data groups 261, 264, and 267 by a first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c, and the third moving image data groups 263, 266, and 269 are shifted from the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268 to the moving image data 271a to 271a. It is shifted by the first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as 73c. As a result, it is possible to generate many switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order in each angle, and it is possible to change the angle at an early stage with respect to the operation timing of the operating device 48 for performance.

Next, how the angle display effect progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 100(a) shows the operation timing of the production operation device 48, FIG. 100(b) shows the waiting period until the angle is switched in response to the operation of the production operation device 48, FIG. 100(c) shows the timing at which the angle can be switched, FIG. 100(f) shows the period during which the B-angle moving image is displayed, and FIG. 100(g) shows the period during which one moving image data 272a-272c included in the B-angle moving image data group 264-266 is read from the memory module 203 to the developing buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. In the following description, the case where the A angle is changed to the B angle will be described, but the same applies to other patterns of angle change.

As shown in FIG. 100(d), when a moving image is displayed using the first moving image data group 261 out of the A-angle moving image data groups 261 to 263, the switching to the B-angle second moving image data group 265 occurs at the timing t1, and the switching to the B-angle third moving image data group 266 occurs at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 100(c). However, since the operation device 48 for presentation is not operated by the timing of t1 and the timing of t2, the switching of angles does not occur.

The switching of the angles triggered by the operation of the production operating device 48 is performed by looping in a predetermined order among the A angle, B angle and C angle. Specifically, the A angle is selected at the start timing of the angle display performance, and then the switching of the angles occurs in the order of A angle→B angle→C angle→A angle→B angle→C angle→A angle→ .

After that, at timing t3, it is time to read and decode the moving image data 271a in the next order in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle which is the object of moving image display. Therefore, at the timing t3, the moving image data 271a in the next order is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b in the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and decoding processing is started for the moving image data 271a. In this case, only one moving image data 271a is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and the decoding process is started. A plurality of pieces of still image data after the decoding process are written to the moving image data area 211b. Further, when reading and decoding the one moving image data 271a, the data is set in the moving image data area 211b so that the still image data created from the one moving image data 271a currently being displayed is not erased.

After that, at the timing t4, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, the timing to switch to the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle occurs as shown in FIG. 100(c). However, since the effect operation device 48 is not operated by the timing of t4, switching of angles does not occur, and the display of the moving image using the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle whose decoding is completed is started at the timing of t4.

After that, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 100(a), the effect operating device 48 is operated. In this case, since the moving image data 271a currently being displayed is being displayed and it is not time to switch to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle, the angle switching is on standby as shown in FIG. 100(b).

After that, at timing t6, the decoding start timing, which is the timing before the timing t7, which is the timing at which switching to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle is possible, by the period enabling decoding of one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c, is reached. Therefore, at the timing t6, decoding of the switching destination moving image data 272b in the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle is started as shown in FIG. 100(g). Specifically, in the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, the moving image data 272b of the switching destination this time is read out from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and decoding processing is started on the moving image data 272b. A plurality of pieces of still image data after the decoding process are written to the moving image data area 211b. Further, when reading and decoding the one moving image data 272b, the data is set in the moving image data area 211b so that the still image data created from the one moving image data 271a currently being displayed is not erased. The period between the timing when decoding can be started and the timing when switching is possible is shorter than the period during which moving image display is performed using one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c.

Thereafter, at timing t7 when the decoding process is completed, display of a moving image using the moving image data 272b of the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle, which has been decoded at the timing t7, is started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100(f), the display of the B-angle moving image is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100(c), at timing t8, there occurs a timing at which switching to the third moving image data group 269 of C angle is possible. However, since the operation device 48 for presentation is not operated by the timing of t8, switching of the angle does not occur, and the display of the moving image using the moving image data 272b of the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle whose decoding is completed at the timing of t7 is continued.

As described above, the angle is changed based on the operation of the effect operating device 48. However, even if the operation timing of the effect operating device 48 starts the decoding processing of the moving image data 271a to 273c to be switched at that operation timing, if the decoding processing is not completed by the next angle switchable timing, the angle is not switched at the next angle switchable timing, and the angle is further switched at the next angle switchable timing. Such operation will be described.

As shown in FIG. 100(d), in a situation where the moving image using the first moving image data group 261 out of the A angle moving image data groups 261 to 263 is being displayed, the effect operation device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 100(a) at the timing of t9. In this case, since the moving image data 271a currently being displayed is being displayed and it is not time to switch to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle, the angle switching is on standby as shown in FIG. 100(b).

After that, at timing t10, it becomes possible to switch to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle as shown in FIG. 100(c). However, the period between the timing t9 at which the operation device 48 for presentation is operated and the timing t10 at which switching to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of B angle is possible is less than the period required to complete the decoding process for one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c. Therefore, switching to the B-angle video data group 264 to 266 does not occur at the timing t10. At the timing t10, reading and decoding of the moving image data 272a to 272c of the B angle have not yet started.

After that, at the timing of t11, it becomes the decoding start timing, which is the timing before the timing of t12 which is the switching timing to the moving image data group 264 to 266 of the B angle by the period enabling decoding of one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c. Therefore, at the timing of t11, decoding of the switching destination moving image data 272c in the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle is started as shown in FIG. 100(g). Specifically, in the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle, the moving image data 272c of the switching destination this time is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and decoding processing is started on the moving image data 272c. A plurality of pieces of still image data after the decoding process are written to the moving image data area 211b. Further, when reading and decoding the one piece of moving image data 272c, the data in the moving image data area 211b is set so that the still image data created from the one piece of moving image data 271a currently being displayed is not erased.

After that, at timing t12, which is the timing at which the decoding process is completed, display of a moving image using the moving image data 272c of the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle, which has been decoded at the timing t12, is started. As a result, as shown in FIG. 100(f), the display of the B-angle moving image is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100(c), at timing t13, a timing to switch to the first moving image data group 267 of C angle occurs. However, since the operation device 48 for presentation is not operated by the timing of t13, switching of angles does not occur, and the display of the moving image using the moving image data 272c of the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle whose decoding is completed at the timing of t12 is continued.

As described above, when the effect operation device 48 is operated immediately before the angle switchable timing, the angle is switched at the next switchable timing, so that the angle is switched at the timing when the moving image data 271a to 273c of the angle to be switched to is completely decoded. This makes it possible to prevent the waiting time for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c from occurring when the angles are switched.

A specific processing configuration for executing the angle display rendering will be described below. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for angle display effects executed by the display CPU 201 . Note that the arithmetic processing for the angle display effect is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S2504 in the task processing (FIG. 68) in the opening/closing execution mode in which the angle display effect is to be executed.

If it is the opening period immediately before starting the angle display effect (step S4101: YES), an opening process is executed (step S4102). The opening period is a period set before starting the display of the moving image by any one of the angles A to C, and it is notified that the display of the moving image by any one of the angles A to C is started in the opening period and that the angle can be changed by operating the operation device 48 for performance. Also, during the opening period, it is possible to select the angle to be displayed at the start timing of the moving image display based on the operation of the production operating device 48 .

The opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, it is determined whether or not it is a period for reading moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201). In the opening period, an angle selection period is set first to enable angle selection, and then a reading period of the moving image data 271a to 273c is set. If it is the angle selection period (step S4201: NO), it is determined whether or not an operation generation command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 62 (step S4202). The effect operating device 48 is electrically connected to the sound and light side MPU 62 , and an operation generation command is transmitted from the sound and light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 201 when the effect operating device 48 is operated.

If an operation generation command has been received from the sound and light side MPU 62 (step S4202: YES), an angle counter provided in the work RAM 202 is updated (step S4203). The angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read at the timing of reading the moving image data 271a to 273c. An angle counter value of "0" corresponds to A angle, an angle counter value of "1" corresponds to B angle, and an angle counter value of "2" corresponds to C angle. When the opening period has started, the value of the angle counter is "0", the operation generation command is received, the processing of step S4203 is executed, and 1 is added to the value of the angle counter. Further, when the value of the angle counter becomes "3" after adding 1, the value of the angle counter is cleared to "0".

On the other hand, if it is the readout period of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201: YES), the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the current value of the angle counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped (step S4204). In this case, if the value of the angle counter is "0", the moving image data 271a of the first order in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle is grasped, if the value of the angle counter is "1", the moving image data 272a of the first order in the first moving image data group 264 of the B angle is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is "2", the moving image data 273a of the first order in the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle is grasped. After that, the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4205).

When a negative determination is made in step S4202, when the processing of step S4203 is performed, or when the processing of step S4205 is performed, various image data necessary for displaying an image corresponding to the current update timing in the opening period are grasped (step S4206), and parameter information to be applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4207). Then, the opening information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4208).

When the opening process is executed as described above, the various image data grasped in step S4206 are set as objects to be arranged in the world coordinate system in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407). Parameter information to be applied to these various image data is also set in the drawing list. Opening information is set in the drawing list. By executing the drawing process (FIG. 70) in the VDP 205 according to the drawing list, the image for the opening period is displayed on the pattern display device 41. FIG.

Further, when the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decode designation information is set in the drawing list, and the information of the address of the memory module 203 where the moving image data 271a to 273c grasped in step S4204 is stored and the address of the area to develop the moving image data 271a to 273c as still image data in the moving image data area 211b are set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads the moving image data 271a to 273c specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

Specifically, the address of the moving image data 271a to 273c is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the address of the area where the moving image data 271a to 273c is developed as still image data is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4302). Then, the moving image data 271a to 273c are read from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded. Then, the decoded still image data group is written in each area of the moving image data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303).

Returning to the explanation of the arithmetic processing for angle display effect (FIG. 101), if it is not the opening period (step S4101: NO), on condition that an operation generation command is received from the sound and light side MPU 62 (step S4103: YES), the operation acceptance flag provided in the work RAM 202 is set to "1" (step S4104). The operation acceptance flag is a flag for specifying in the display CPU 201 that the angle should be switched. Only one operation reception flag is provided, and even if the operation device 48 for performance is operated a plurality of times until the switching of the angle occurs, the operation reception flag is kept set to "1" for the operation of the operation device 48 for performance after the second time. When "1" is set in the operation reception flag as will be described in detail later, switching from the current angle to the angle in the next order occurs no matter how many times the operation device 48 for presentation is operated until switching of the angle occurs. As a result, when the angle is switched, the angle is switched in a predetermined order as the content of the angle display effect displayed on the pattern display device 41 .

In the arithmetic processing for angle display effects, it is determined in step S4105 whether or not it is time to start decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c. The timing at which decoding can be started is set as an image update timing a predetermined period, in other words, a predetermined number of times before the angle switching timing (timing t1, timing t2, timing t4, timing t7, timing t8, timing t10, timing t12, and timing t13 in FIG. 100) occurring thereafter. More specifically, the period between the timing when decoding can start and the timing when switching is possible is shorter than the period during which moving image display is performed using one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c. It should be noted that whether or not it is time to decode moving image data is determined based on the angle display effect execution table read out from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 when starting the angle display effect.

If it is time to start decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4105: YES), it is determined whether or not the operation reception flag of the work RAM 202 is set to "1" (step S4106). If the operation acceptance flag is not set to "1" (step S4106: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the timing counter provided in the work RAM 202 (step S4107). The timing counter is a counter for specifying, by the display CPU 201, the timing of executing the decoding process of the next moving image data 271a to 273c in the same moving image data group 261 to 269 when the moving image display by one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c of the same moving image data group 261 to 269 is continued without switching the angle. The timing counter is set to "3" when decoding processing of the moving image data 271a to 273c is newly executed, and the value of the timing counter is decremented by "1" each time the timing to decode the moving image data 271a to 273c is reached in a situation where the same moving image data 271a to 273c is used. It should be noted that the value of the timing counter is "3" at the timing when the opening period ends in the angle display effect.

If the value of the timing counter after subtracting "1" is "0" (step S4108: YES), it means that it is time to decode the moving image data 271a-273c in the same moving image data group 261-269 in the next order. In this case, decoding processing for moving image data 271a to 273c shown in steps S4109 to S4112 is executed.

Specifically, first, the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the current value of the angle counter is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4109). As already described, the angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read at the timing of reading the moving image data 271a to 273c. The moving image correspondence table 275 is pre-stored in the memory module 203 in one-to-one correspondence with each of the A angle, B angle, and C angle. The moving image correspondence table 275 predetermines the relationship between the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 273c can occur and the type of switching destination moving image data 271a to 273c at the switching timing. Further, in each angle, the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268, and the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269 have different timings at which switching to the new moving image data 271a to 273c can occur, and the types of the switching destination moving image data 271a to 273c are also different. The above data is set for each of 1 to 269.

FIG. 104(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the A angle. The contents of the moving image correspondence table corresponding to the B angle and the moving image correspondence table corresponding to the C angle are the same as those in FIG. 104(a).

As shown in FIG. 104(a), pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 271c can occur. The pointer information corresponds to the number of times the image is updated using the moving image data 271a to 271c. Specifically, the pointer information to be referenced is incremented by 1 each time the image is updated using the moving image data 271a to 271c. Further, when the display of an image using the first moving image data 271a to 271c is started in the angle display effect, the pointer information to be referenced is "0". The updating of the pointer information to be referred to is continued without being cleared to "0" in the middle until the display of the image using the moving image data 271a to 271c in the angle display effect is completed. Therefore, the pointer information "16" means that the image has been updated 16 times using the moving image data 271a to 271c, and the pointer information "32" means that the image has been updated 32 times using the moving image data 271a to 271c.

One type of moving image data 271a to 271c is set corresponding to each pointer information corresponding to switching. As already explained, in the first moving image data group 261, the moving image data 271a in the first order corresponds to the start timing of the angle display effect, and the moving image data 271a in the subsequent order corresponds to the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed by the number of still image data that can be displayed using one piece of moving image data 271a with respect to the moving image data 271a in the previous order. Therefore, for the first moving image data group 261, the moving image data 271a in the first order is not set in the moving image correspondence table 275, and pointer information corresponding to each value obtained by multiplying the number of still image data that can be displayed using one piece of moving image data 271a by an integer is set as pointer information corresponding to switching. Information on the type of the corresponding moving image data 271a, specifically information on the address of the area where each moving image data 271a is developed in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204, is set for each of the pointer information corresponding to each switching.

As described above, each moving image data 271b of the second moving image data group 262 corresponds to the timing when the moving image display progresses for the first reference period K1 with respect to each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261. Therefore, for the second moving image data group 262, as pointer information corresponding to the switching of the moving image data 271b in the first order, pointer information at the timing when the moving image display has progressed for the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect is set. Further, for the moving image data 271b after the first order in the second moving image data group 262, pointer information corresponding to each switching set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 is set as pointer information corresponding to switching at the timing when the display of the moving image has progressed for the first reference period K1.

Each moving image data 271c of the third moving image data group 263 corresponds to the timing when the moving image display progresses for the second reference period K2 with respect to each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261, as described above. Therefore, for the third moving image data group 263, as pointer information corresponding to the switching of the moving image data 271c in the first order, pointer information at the timing when the moving image display has progressed by the second reference period K2 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect is set. Further, for the moving image data 271c after the first order in the third moving image data group 263, pointer information corresponding to each switching set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 is set as pointer information corresponding to the timing at which the moving image display progresses for the second reference period K2.

Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for angle display effects (FIG. 101), after reading the moving image correspondence table 275, the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read out and decoded this time are grasped (step S4110). For this determination, the target moving image counter provided in the work RAM 202 is referred to. The target moving image counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to identify which of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 is to be read at the timing of reading the moving image data 271a to 273c. A target moving image counter value of "0" corresponds to the first moving image data groups 261, 264, and 267, a target moving image counter value of "1" corresponds to the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268, and a target moving image counter value of "2" corresponds to the third moving image data groups 263, 266, and 269. In step S4110, based on the value of the target moving image counter, the types of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read are specified in the moving image correspondence table 275 read out in step S4109. Then, information of moving image data 271a to 273c set corresponding to pointer information corresponding to switching having a value larger than the current pointer information in the angle display performance and closest to the current pointer information among the pointer information corresponding to switching set for the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read out is grasped. As a result, the display CPU 201 grasps the information of the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read and decoded this time.

Thereafter, the timing counter of work RAM 202 is set to "3" (step S4111), and the decode designation information is stored in the register of display CPU 201 (step S4112). When these processes are executed, decode designation information is set in the current rendering list, as well as address information of the memory module 203 where the moving image data 271a to 273c grasped in step S4110 are stored and the address of the area in the moving image data area 211b where the moving image data 271a to 273c are developed as still image data are set. The VDP 205 that has received the drawing list executes the decoding process (FIG. 103) as already described, reads the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, executes the decoding process, and writes each piece of still image data after the decoding process to the specified area in the moving image data area 211b.

On the other hand, in the arithmetic processing for angle display rendering (FIG. 101), if the operation reception flag of the work RAM 202 is set to "1" at the decoding start timing (steps S4105 and S4106: YES), the operation reception flag is cleared to "0" (step S4113), and the switching reference table 276 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4114). The switching reference table 276 is a table for specifying the switching destination angle and the types of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 in relation to the current angle and the types of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 when the angle is changed based on the operation of the production operating device 48.

FIG. 104(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the switching reference table 276. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 104(b), pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 273c can occur. The contents of the pointer information are the same as those described for the moving picture correspondence table 275 in FIG. 104(a). Pointer information corresponding to switching is set in association with switching possible timings of the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268, and the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269, respectively. Specifically, the pointer information corresponding to the first switching is set with the pointer information at the timing when the display of the moving image progresses for the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display performance, and the pointer information corresponding to the subsequent switching is set with the pointer information at the timing when the display of the moving image progresses for the first reference period K1 with respect to the pointer information corresponding to the immediately preceding switching.

Information on the correspondence between the current angle and the combination of the angle of the switching destination and the moving image data groups 261 to 269 is set for each pointer information corresponding to the switching. Specifically, when the angle is changed with the operation of the operation device 48 for presentation as already explained, the angle is switched in the order of A angle→B angle→C angle→A angle→B angle→C angle→A angle→ . . . Also, the switching timings to the first video data groups 261, 264 and 267, the switching timings to the second video data groups 262, 265 and 268, and the switching timings to the third video data groups 263, 266 and 269 are as described for the video correspondence table 275 in FIG. 104(a). Therefore, the correspondence relationship is as shown in FIG. 104(b).

Returning to the description of the arithmetic processing for angle display effects (FIG. 101), after reading the switching reference table 276, the setting processing of the angle counter and target moving image counter is executed based on the switching reference table 276 (step S4115). In the setting processing, out of pointer information corresponding to switching set in a switching reference table 276, pointer information corresponding to switching whose value is larger than the current pointer information in angle display performance and closest to the current pointer information is specified, and information set corresponding to the current angle in the pointer information corresponding to switching is specified. For example, when the current pointer information in the angle display presentation is "10" and the current angle is the A angle, based on the switching reference table 276, the B angle information is specified as the switching destination angle information, and the second video data group 265 information is specified as the switching destination video data group 261 to 269 information. Further, for example, when the current pointer information in the angle display effect is "68" and the current angle is the C angle, based on the switching reference table 276, the A angle information is specified as the switching destination angle information, and the information of the third moving image data group 263 is specified as the information of the switching destination moving image data groups 261 to 269. The specified switching destination angle information is set in the angle counter, and the information of the specified switching destination moving image data groups 261 to 269 is set in the target moving image counter.

After executing the processes of steps S4113 to S4115, the processes of steps S4109 to S4112 already described are executed. In this case, in step S4109, the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the angle counter value newly set in step S4115 is read, and in step S4110, the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the target moving image counter value newly set in step S4115 are grasped.

In the arithmetic processing for the angle display effect, it is determined whether or not it is time to change the types of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116). When the processing of steps S4109 to S4112 is executed, the change trigger flag provided in work RAM 202 is set to "1". In step S4116, when the change trigger flag is set to "1" and the switching timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c has come, it is determined that it is time to change the type of the moving image data 271a to 273c. The switching timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c is as already explained, the first switching timing corresponds to the timing when the moving image display progresses for the first reference period K1 from the start timing of the angle display effect, and the subsequent switching timing corresponds to the timing when the moving image display progresses for the first reference period K1 from the immediately preceding switching timing.

If it is time to change the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116: YES), the value of the frame counter provided in the work RAM 202 is cleared to "0" (step S4117). Note that the change trigger flag is cleared to "0" when an affirmative determination is made in step S4116. The frame counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which still image data among the moving image data 271a to 273c developed in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204 is to be used. When the value of the frame counter is "0", the still image data in the first order in one piece of expanded moving image data 271a to 273c is grasped as the object to be used. Also, when still image data is determined to be used in step S4118, which will be described later, the value of the frame counter is incremented by 1, and in the next step S4118, the still image data in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after the addition of 1 is determined to be used.

If a negative determination is made in step S4116, or if the process of step S4117 is executed, still image data corresponding to the value of the frame counter of work RAM 202 is grasped as image data to be used at this update timing (step S4118). In this case, 1 is added to the value of the frame counter. Further, other image data necessary for displaying the image corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S4119), and parameter information to be applied to the image data grasped in steps S4118 and S4119 is calculated and derived (step S4120). Then, the angle effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4121).

When the arithmetic processing for angle display rendering is executed as described above, the various image data grasped in steps S4118 and S4119 are set as objects to be arranged in the world coordinate system in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407). Parameter information to be applied to these various image data is also set in the drawing list. Also, angle effect information is set in the drawing list.

When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 105, the VDP 205 first grasps the still image data grasped in step S4118 (step S4401), and then grasps the other image data grasped in step S4119 (step S4402). Furthermore, the parameter information grasped in step S4120 is grasped (step S4403). Then, the image data ascertained in steps S4401 and S4402 are set in the world coordinate system while applying the parameter information ascertained in step S4403 (step S4404). As a result, the drawing data for displaying the image for the angle display effect is finally created, and the image for the angle display effect is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . Note that the angle display effect setting process is executed in the effect setting process of step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) when the drawing list in which the angle effect information is set is received.

Since each moving image data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of pieces of moving image data 271a to 273c as described above, it is possible to use the timing of switching between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order as the angle change timing. Therefore, it is possible to change the type of angle among A-angle, B-angle and C-angle during execution of the angle display effect.

Further, the amount of data of the moving image data 271a to 273c is set so that the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. As a result, it becomes possible to set many timings at which the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used can be switched. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data read out at one time.

A plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 are provided for displaying the same moving image at each angle A to C, respectively. In each angle, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268 are shifted from the first moving image data groups 261, 264, and 267 by a first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c, and the third moving image data groups 263, 266, and 269 are shifted from the second moving image data groups 262, 265, and 268 to the moving image data 271a to 271a. It is shifted by the first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as 73c. As a result, it is possible to generate many switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order in each angle, and it is possible to change the angle at an early stage with respect to the operation timing of the operating device 48 for performance.

The moving image data 271a to 273c are not collectively read out for each angle to be selected, but in a situation where one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and is to be used, the one piece of moving image data 271a to 273c to be used next is read and decoded when the timing for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used next comes. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required to read the moving image data 271a to 273c in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204. FIG.

In a situation where one moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and used, the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used next are read and decoded. As a result, when new moving image data 271a to 273c are to be used, waiting time for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c can be avoided.

In a configuration in which the angle is changed based on the operation of the operation device 48 for performance, if the operation timing of the operation device 48 for performance is before the switching possible timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c but after the decoding start timing, the change of the angle for the operation of the performance operating device 48 occurs not at the immediately following switchable timing but at the next switchable timing to the immediately following switchable timing. This makes it possible to smoothly switch the angle for the operation of the operating device 48 for presentation.

<Another form of angle display effect>
The number of images that can be displayed by one moving image data 271a to 273c is not limited to the same configuration, and the number of images that can be displayed by at least a part of the moving image data may be different from that of other moving image data. In this case, it is necessary to set the timing at which switching to the new moving image data 271a to 273c and the timing at which decoding can be started are set according to the type of each moving image data 271a to 273c.

In a configuration in which moving image display using moving image data is started when the operating device 48 for effect is operated during the operation valid period, a configuration in which the moving image display is started at a timing corresponding to the elapsed time from the start timing of the operation effective period may be applied to a configuration in which a moving image data group that enables a series of specific moving images to be displayed and another moving image data group that enables to display a moving image that starts at a timing in the middle of the specific moving image are provided separately.

- The number of moving image data groups prepared for one angle is not limited to three types, and may be two types or four or more types. Also, the types of angles are not limited to three types, and may be two types, or may be four types or more.

<Configuration for performing a special video use effect>
Next, a configuration for performing a special moving image use effect will be described.

The special moving image use effect is an effect using the special moving image data 282 when the image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 . FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the special moving image data 282. FIG. 106(a) shows the normal moving image data 281 such as the moving image data 271a to 273c already explained, and FIG. 106(b) shows the special moving image data 282.

As shown in FIG. 106(a), in the normal moving image data 281, file data is set at the first address, followed by compressed data of each frame. A frame header is attached to the compressed data of each frame. The compressed data includes one frame of I-picture data corresponding to reference data, a plurality of frames of P-picture data corresponding to first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B-picture data corresponding to second difference data.

The I-picture data is data capable of creating one frame of still image data by itself when decoding. P-picture data is data capable of generating still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data one or more frames before when decoding. B-picture data is data that can generate still image data for one frame by performing bi-directional prediction with reference to I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames before and I-picture data or P-picture data one frame or a plurality of frames later when decoding.

In the compressed data in the normal moving image data 281, I picture data is set as the first frame data. Also, B picture data is set as the data of the 2nd frame, . . . , m−1th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the m-th frame data. Also, B picture data is set as the m+1th frame, . . . , n−1th frame data. Also, P picture data is set as the n-th frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of picture data is not limited to the one described above and is arbitrary.

By executing decoding processing on the normal moving image data 281, a plurality of still image data 283a to 283d (hereinafter referred to as normal decoded image data 283a to 283d) corresponding to a plurality of update timings are generated from the normal moving image data 281 in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204. In this case, these normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are image data in which the contents of some of the images displayed by the normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are different from each other.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106(b), in the special moving image data 282, file data is set at the first address, followed by one frame of I picture data corresponding to reference data, but no compressed data other than the I picture data is set. By executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282, still image data 284 for a plurality of update timings (hereinafter referred to as special decoded image data 284) is created in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204 from the special moving image data 282. However, these special decoded image data 284 are image data in which the contents of the images displayed by the special decoded image data 284 are all the same.

The data amount of the special moving image data 282 is set so that the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. More specifically, the special moving image data 282 can reproduce 48 pieces of still image data, in other words, it is possible to update the image 48 times (updating 48 frames). Therefore, when the special moving image data 282 is decoded, the minimum unit number of special decoded image data 284 having the same image content is created. As described above, the data amount of the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the normal moving image data 281 is set so that the still image data of the minimum number of units that can be set as the moving image data can be reproduced.

The special moving image data 282 is pre-stored in the memory module 203 like the normal moving image data 281, and the memory module 203 stores a plurality of types of special moving image data 282. FIG. The content of the image based on the special decoded image data 284 after the decoding process differs for each type of the special moving image data 282 .

Special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data. In this case, the memory module 203 stores in advance predetermined object data for applying the special decoded image data 284 as texture data. The type of image displayed using the special decoded image data 284 and the predetermined object data is arbitrary, but for example, the configuration may be such that character images of animals such as people, cats, fish and dogs are displayed, or individual images representing objects other than animals may be displayed.

By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, it is possible to store one piece of texture data in the memory module 203 as moving image data. As already described, the texture data pre-stored in the memory module 203 as still image data are all read from the memory module 203 and written to the texture area 211a in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. In this case, as the types of texture data increase, the storage capacity required in the texture area 211a increases. On the other hand, if the type of texture data read out to the texture area 211a is changed each time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load on the VDP 205 will increase.

On the other hand, by storing part of the texture data as the special moving image data 282, part of the texture data can be read out to the VRAM 204 as needed while eliminating the need to replace the texture area 211a. Further, since the texture data is not stored in the memory module 203 as texture data but as the special moving image data 282, the texture data can be created from the special moving image data 282 using the moving image data area 211b. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as an area for using texture data, the texture data itself is not read into the moving image data area 211b, but the special moving image data 282 is read out.

Next, how the special moving image use effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 107(a) shows the start timing of the supply of operating power, FIG. 107(b) shows the period during which texture data is read from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a, FIG. 107(c) shows the storage retention period of the texture data in the texture area 211a, FIG. 107(d) shows the start timing of the special moving image use effect, and FIG. 107(f) shows the reading period of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and FIG. 107(g) shows the use period of the special moving image data 282. FIG.

At timing t1, it becomes timing to start supplying operating power to the display CPU 201 as shown in FIG. 107(a), thereby starting to read texture data from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a as shown in FIG. As a result, all the texture data previously stored in the memory module 203 are stored and held in the texture area 211a while the supply of operating power to the VRAM 204 is continued, as shown in FIG. 107(c). Since backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 204, texture data cannot be stored in the texture area 211a when the supply of operating power to the display control device 200 is stopped.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 107(d), it becomes the start timing of the special animation use effect. However, the use of the special moving image data 282 is not started at the timing of t3. Therefore, at the timing t3, object data read from the memory module 203 to an area other than the texture area 211a and the moving image data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 as necessary, and texture data read to the texture area 211a at the start of supply of operating power are used to create drawing data, and an image is displayed on the pattern display device 41 using the drawing data.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 107(f), reading of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b is started, and the special moving image data 282 read out to the moving image data area 211b is decoded. Then, at timing t5, decoding processing of the special moving image data 282 is completed, and a plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding processing on the special moving image data 282 are written in the moving image data area 211b.

At timing t5 when the decoding process of the special moving image data 282 is completed, display of an image using the special decoded image data 284 is started as shown in FIG. 107(g). In this case, the special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data to be pasted on the predetermined object data, and the drawing data is created by projecting the predetermined object data and the special decoded image data 284 onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. Then, an image is displayed using the special decoded image data 284 by displaying an image on the pattern display device 41 using the drawing data. Thereafter, at timing t6, the display of the image using the special moving image data 282 ends.

A specific processing configuration for executing the special moving image use effect will be described below. FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing arithmetic processing for a special moving image use effect executed by the display CPU 201 . Note that the arithmetic processing for the special moving image use effect is executed in the effect arithmetic processing of step S2504 in the task processing (FIG. 68) in the game turn in which the special moving image use effect is to be executed.

If it is not the use period of the special moving image data 282 (step S4501: NO), it is determined whether or not it is time to read the special moving image data 282 by referring to the execution target table read out to the work RAM 202 in order to control the execution of the special moving image use effect (step S4502). If it is time to read the special moving image data 282 (step S4502: YES), the special moving image data 282 to be read and decoded this time is grasped (step S4502). Note that there are a plurality of types of special moving image use effects, and the types of special moving image data 282 to be used are different for each type of special moving image use effect. Also, the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4504).

After that, various image data necessary for displaying an image corresponding to the current update timing are grasped (step S4505), and parameter information to be applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4506). Then, the special moving image use effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4507). The various image data grasped in step S4505 include the object data stored in the memory module 203 and the texture data read out to the texture area 211a.

When the arithmetic processing for the effect using the special moving image is executed as described above, the various image data grasped in step S4505 are set as objects to be arranged in the world coordinate system in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407). Parameter information to be applied to these various image data is also set in the drawing list. In addition, special moving image use effect information is set in the drawing list.

When the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decode designation information is set in the drawing list, and the address information of the memory module 203 storing the special moving image data 282 grasped in step S4503 and the address of the area where the special moving image data 282 is developed as the special decoded image data 284 in the moving image data area 211b are set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads the special moving image data 282 of the type specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

Specifically, the address of the special moving image data 282 is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the address of the area where the special moving image data 282 is developed as the special decoded image data 284 is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4302). Then, the special moving image data 282 is read from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the special moving image data 282 is decoded. Then, a plurality of pieces of special decoded image data 284 resulting from the decoding are written in each area of the moving image data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303). As a result, all the special decoded image data 284 created from the special moving image data 282 are written in the moving image data area 211b.

Returning to the explanation of the calculation processing for the special moving image use effect (FIG. 108), if the special moving image data 282 is in the use period (step S4501: YES), the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped as the image data to be used at the current update timing (step S4508). The frame counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which special decoded image data 284 among the special decoded image data 284 of the special moving image data 282 developed in the moving image data area 211b is to be used. The frame counter is also used when the normal moving image data 281 is used, such as angle display effects. Further, when the use period of the special moving image data 282 is started, the value of the frame counter is '0', and when the value of the frame counter is '0', the special decoded image data 284 in the first order in the special moving image data 282 is grasped as a use object. Also, when the special decoded image data 284 is found to be used in step S4508, the value of the frame counter is incremented by 1, and in the next step S4508, the special decoded image data 284 in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after the addition of 1 is found to be used.

Here, as already explained, the plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding process on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and the content of the image displayed using the special decoded image data 284 is the same. On the other hand, when using special decoded image data 284 as texture data, special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used instead of always using one piece of special decoded image data 284 . This makes it possible to use the same processing configuration as in the case of displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281 .

After that, other image data necessary for displaying the image corresponding to the update timing of this time are grasped (step S4509). In this case, the image data includes predetermined object data to which the special decoded image data 284 is applied. After that, parameter information to be applied to the image data grasped in steps S4508 and S4509 is calculated and derived (step S4510), and usage instruction information for the special moving image data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4511).

When the arithmetic processing for the effect using the special moving image is executed as described above, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the drawing list output processing (step S2407) after that, the various image data grasped in steps S4508 and S4509 are set as objects to be arranged in the world coordinate system. Parameter information to be applied to these various image data is also set in the drawing list. In addition, use instruction information for the special moving image data is set in the drawing list.

When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list in which the special moving image use effect information or the special moving image data use instruction information is set, the VDP 205 executes setting processing for the special moving image use effect. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 109, in the setting processing for the special moving image use effect, if the use instruction information for the special moving image data is set (step S4601: YES), the special decoded image data 284 grasped at step S4508 is grasped (step S4602). Further, the other image data grasped at step S4509 is grasped (step S4603), and the parameter information grasped at step S4510 is grasped (step S4604). Then, the image data ascertained in steps S4602 and S4603 are set in the world coordinate system while applying the parameter information ascertained in step S4604 (step S4605). As a result, the drawing data for displaying the image for the special moving image use performance using the special decoded image data 284 as texture data is finally created, and the image for the special moving image use performance is displayed on the pattern display device 41.例文帳に追加Note that the special moving image use effect setting processing is executed in the effect setting processing of step S2603 in the drawing processing (FIG. 70) when the drawing list in which the special moving image use effect information or the use instruction information of the special moving image data is set is received.

By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, it is possible to store one texture data in the memory module 203 as moving image data. As already described, the texture data pre-stored in the memory module 203 as still image data are all read from the memory module 203 and written to the texture area 211a in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. In this case, as the types of texture data increase, the storage capacity required in the texture area 211a increases. On the other hand, if the type of texture data read out to the texture area 211a is changed each time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load on the VDP 205 will increase.

On the other hand, by storing part of the texture data as the special moving image data 282, part of the texture data can be read out to the VRAM 204 as needed while eliminating the need to replace the texture area 211a. Further, since the texture data is not stored in the memory module 203 as texture data but as the special moving image data 282, the texture data can be created from the special moving image data 282 using the moving image data area 211b. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as an area for using texture data, the texture data itself is not read into the moving image data area 211b, but the special moving image data 282 is read out.

One type of special decoded image data 284 is created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 . This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary image data from being created.

A plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by executing decoding processing on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and the content of the image displayed using the special decoded image data 284 is the same. On the other hand, when using special decoded image data 284 as texture data, special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used instead of always using one piece of special decoded image data 284 . This makes it possible to use the same processing configuration as in the case of displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281 .

The special moving image data 282 has only I-picture data and does not have differential data such as B-picture data and P-picture data. This makes it possible to simplify the data configuration of the special moving image data 282 .

The special moving image data 282 is set as the minimum unit data amount that can be set as moving image data. This makes it possible to keep the data volume of the special moving image data 282 small.

<Another form regarding the use of special videos>
- Not only the texture data but also the object data may be read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. In this case, since it is not necessary to read the object data to the VRAM 204 at appropriate timing, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 205 at each generation timing of the drawing data.

- Although a plurality of types of image data are created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282, only one type or a part of them may be used. Even in this case, texture data can be handled as moving image data.

- It is good also as a structure by which only one image data is produced by performing a decoding process on the special moving image data 282. FIG. In this case, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity for storing the image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 .

The special moving image data 282 may be configured such that only the same I-picture data is set in plural numbers, and image data corresponding to the number of I-picture data is created when the special moving image data 282 is decoded.

- A plurality of image data of the same type are created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282, but only one image data among them may be used. In this case, only one piece of image data among the plurality of pieces of image data created by executing the decoding process may be stored and held in the moving image data area 211b, and the rest may be deleted.

A separate storage area may be provided in the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and all or part of the image data created in the moving image data area 211b may be transferred to the separate storage area by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282. In this case, the image data can be stored in the separate storage area even after use, and the image data is read out from the separate storage area when used next time, thereby eliminating the need to perform decoding processing again for the special moving image data 282.例文帳に追加

- Although the special moving image data 282 has difference data such as B picture data and P picture data, the difference data may be set so that the difference is "0". Even in this case, it is possible to create a plurality of special decoded image data 284 of the same type.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination with the configuration of the above-described embodiment.

(1) The processing configuration of the sound and light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 72, and the processing configuration of the VDP 76 in the first embodiment may be applied to the configuration for displaying a 3D image on the pattern display device 41 as in the second embodiment. Further, the processing configuration of the sound and light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 201, and the processing configuration of the VDP 205 in the second embodiment may be applied to the configuration for displaying a 2D image on the pattern display device 41 as in the first embodiment.

(2) In the second embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is individually set for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system. Alternatively, a single camera may be commonly set for all image data arranged in the world coordinate system.

(3) In the above-described second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of the background image, the effect image, and the pattern image.

(4) In the above-described second embodiment, when the color information setting process (step S2609) is performed, the configuration may be such that the color information is set such that the texture is applied only to the surface to be projected. In this case, the processing load of rendering can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of setting color information such as texture mapping before projection, the configuration may be such that color information such as texture mapping is set after projection. In this case, upon projection, the coordinate information of each pixel forming the projection plane is stored, and color information such as texture mapping is set based on the coordinate information.

(5) Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the audio emission control device 60 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50, the display control device 90 may control the audio emission control device 60 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 50. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be used, and one of the functions of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 50, or both functions of the two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 50. Also, the configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 to the display control device 90 are arbitrary.

(6) The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mackerel ball.

Moreover, the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that is provided with a plurality of reels on which a plurality of types of symbols are attached in the circumferential direction, for example, a slot machine that starts rotating the reels by inserting medals and operating a start lever, and, after the reels are stopped by operating a stop switch or after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, provides a player with a privilege such as payout of medals if a specific pattern or a combination of specific patterns is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window.

In addition, the present invention can also be applied to a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which a game machine main body that is openably and closably supported by an outer frame is provided with a reservoir and a take-in device, and a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the reservoir are taken in by the take-in device.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
with
The display storage means stores special moving image data (special moving image data 282), which is one type of image data created by executing a decoding process and used by the display control means, in the display storage means.

According to the feature A1, special moving image data, which is one type of image data to be used by the display control means after the decoding process is executed, is provided, so that one type of image data after decoding can be handled as special moving image data. This makes it possible to use the one type of image data without increasing the capacity of the image data of the same type as the decoded one type of image data.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the special moving image data is moving image data from which one type of image data is created by executing the decoding process.

According to the characteristic A2, when the special moving image data is decoded, not a plurality of types of image data are generated, but only one type of image data is generated. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the above effect while preventing unnecessary image data from being generated.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the special moving image data is data from which a plurality of pieces of special image data (still image data 284) having the same content are created by executing the decoding process.

According to the feature A3, when the special moving image data is subjected to the decoding process, a plurality of special image data having the same contents are created. Therefore, the special image data having the same contents can be used at the update timings of the plurality of images while being handled in the same manner as the image data created from the other moving image data.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the display control means uses the special image data in a predetermined order created from the special moving image data when the image update timing is a predetermined update timing, and uses the special image data in the next order to the predetermined order when the update timing is next to the predetermined update timing.

According to feature A4, a plurality of pieces of special image data having the same content are created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data, and the pieces of special image data are used in a predetermined order. As a result, the special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data can be handled in the same way as the image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data other than the special moving image data.

Feature A5. The moving image data other than the special moving image data has reference data (I picture data) that serves as a reference when creating the image data by executing the decoding process on the moving image data, and difference data (B picture data, P picture data) that can create image data different from the image data created by the reference data by applying to the reference data,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the special moving image data includes the reference data and does not include the difference data.

According to the feature A5, since the special moving image data has the reference data and does not have the difference data, it is possible to simplify the data configuration of the special moving image data that creates only one type of image data when the decoding process is executed. Also, it is possible to keep the data capacity of the special moving image data small.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the special moving image data is set as a minimum unit data amount that can be set as moving image data.

According to feature A6, it is possible to keep the data capacity of the special moving image data small.

Feature A7. The display control means includes a predetermined process execution means (a function of executing the process of step S2609 in the VDP 205) for displaying an image corresponding to the predetermined image data (texture data) stored in the display storage means by executing a predetermined process,
When an image corresponding to the special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is displayed, the predetermined process execution means executes the predetermined process on the special image data,
When the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is read from the display storage means to the read storage means (VRAM 204),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein the reading storage means includes a first reading area (texture area 211a) from which the predetermined image data is read, and a second reading area (moving image data area 211b) from which the special moving image data is read.

According to feature A7, when the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is not used directly from the display storage means, but is used after being temporarily read out to the readout storage means. Therefore, by reading the image data into the readout storage means in advance, the image data can be used immediately when the image data is used in the display control means. In addition, since the readout storage means is provided with a first readout area from which predetermined image data is read out and a second readout area from which special moving image data is read out, readout areas are set according to respective uses, and when the image data is used in the display control means, it is possible to specify the area according to the type of the image data.

In this case, the configuration of the feature A1 is provided, and although only one type of special image data is used in the display control means, the special image data is stored in the display storage means as special moving image data instead of as predetermined image data. As a result, since the special image data is read out not in the first readout area but in the second readout area, there is no need to secure an area for using the special image data in the first readout area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity in the first readout area.

Feature A8. a plurality of types of the predetermined image data are stored in the display storage means;
The game machine is
a first read execution means (function for executing the process of step S2402 in the display CPU 201) that reads out all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data to the first read area when a predetermined read timing has come;
In a situation where image data corresponding to moving image data other than the special moving image data is stored in the second readout area, when the image data corresponding to the special moving image data is stored in the second readout area, the image data is overwritten on the image data already stored in the second readout area;
The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized by comprising:

According to feature A8, since all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data are read into the first readout area, it is not necessary to read out the predetermined image data as needed. On the other hand, moving image data is read into the second read area as necessary, and when new moving image data is read, the second read area is overwritten. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the second readout area. In this case, the configuration of the feature A1 is provided, and although only one type of special image data is used in the display control means, the special image data is stored in the display storage means as special moving image data instead of as predetermined image data. As a result, since the special image data is read out not in the first readout area but in the second readout area, there is no need to secure an area for using the special image data in the first readout area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the required storage capacity in the first readout area.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to feature A8, wherein the first reading executing means reads all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data to the first reading area when supply of operating power is started.

According to feature A9, it is possible to quickly create a state in which all of the plurality of types of predetermined image data have been read out to the first readout area.

Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is texture data used for displaying a three-dimensional image.

According to the feature A10, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described when texture data is used.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied to the configuration of any one of the features A1 to A10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a game machine equipped with
Information storage means (memory module 74) for pre-storing mode determination information (execution target table T10 for acceleration period, execution target table T11 for first high speed period, and execution target table T12 for first low speed period) in which data for determining the display mode of the individual image at each update timing of the image is set when the individual image (symbols displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3) is to be displayed in a specific variable display over a predetermined period on the display unit;
The display control means is
a target determination unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S908 and S1011 in the display CPU 72) that determines at least one of the types of the individual images to which the mode determination information is applied in the plurality of types of the individual images and the order in which the mode determination information is applied to the plurality of types of the individual images;
application executing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1012 to S1014 in the display CPU 72) for performing the specific variation display by applying the mode determination information in accordance with the content determined by the object determining means;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, the mode determination information is commonly applied to multiple types of individual images. As a result, it is possible to commonly use the mode determination information for various situations in which the specific variable display is performed, and it is possible to reduce the number of mode determination information. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storing the mode determination information in the information storage means.

Feature B2. When the specific variable display is newly started, display control is performed so that the individual image of the type displayed at the start of the specific variable display starts variable display in a predetermined variable start mode, and the type of the individual image displayed at the start is variable.
At least information for causing the individual image to perform a variable display according to the predetermined variable start mode is set as the mode determination information,
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the target determining means determines at least one of a type of the individual image to which the mode determining information is applied in the plurality of types of individual images and an order in which the mode determining information is applied to the plurality of types of the individual images, according to the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the specific variation display.

According to the feature B2, the state of the variable display at the start of the specific variable display is made constant at a predetermined variable start state, thereby making it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the specific variable display has started. Further, even if the mode of the variable display at the start of the specific variable display is constant, the type of the individual image displayed at the start can be changed, so that it is possible to diversify the mode when the specific variable display is started.

In this configuration, information for performing variable display of individual images in a predetermined variable start mode at the start of the specific variable display is set in the mode determination information, and at least one of the type of individual images to which the mode determination information is applied and the order of the individual images is determined in a mode corresponding to the type of individual image to be displayed at the start of the specific variable display. As a result, even in a configuration where the type of individual image displayed at the start of the specific variable display can change, it is possible to commonly use the mode determination information for performing the specific variable display.

Feature B3. The gaming machine according to feature B2, wherein the individual image of a type corresponding to the type of the individual image displayed when the specific variable display was terminated last time is displayed at the start of the specific variable display in the next execution.

According to the feature B3, since the individual image of the type corresponding to the type of the individual image displayed when the specific variable display was terminated last time is displayed at the start of the specific variable display in the next execution, it is possible to impart continuity to each execution of the specific variable display when the specific variable display is repeatedly executed. In this case, at the start of the specific variable display, the type of the individual image for which the variable display is started will be different depending on the predetermined variable start mode. However, by providing the configuration of feature B2, it is possible to commonly use the mode determination information for performing the specific variable display even in a configuration where the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the specific variable display can change.

Feature B4. In the mode determination information, mode information (contents of tasks) for determining the mode of the specific variable display is set in chronological order,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the target determination means determines the type of the individual image to which each of the mode information is to be applied, in accordance with the fact that the type of the individual image to be executed in the specific variable display changes as the specific variable display progresses.

According to feature B4, even if the type of the individual image to be subjected to the specific variable display changes as the specific variable display progresses, the type of the individual image to which the mode information set in chronological order in the mode determination information is applied is determined. This makes it possible to commonly use the mode determination information even in a configuration in which the type of the individual image to be executed in the specific variable display changes as the specific variable display progresses.

Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the mode determination information is set as information corresponding to a period equal to or longer than the longest duration assumed as a situation in which the mode determination information is used.

According to the feature B5, it is possible to use the mode determination information in common regardless of the duration of various situations in which the mode determination information is used.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the duration of the situation in which the mode determination information is used is set so that the use of the mode determination information ends at a predetermined timing between one switching timing and the next switching timing of the types of the individual images to which the mode determination information is applied.

In the case of a configuration in which the mode determination information is set in correspondence with the duration of various situations in which the mode determination information is used, it is assumed that the use of the mode determination information ends in the middle of the time-series information set in the mode determination information, and the next control information is used. In this case, according to feature B6, the end timing of use of the mode determination information is a predetermined timing between one switching timing and the next switching timing of the type of individual image to which the mode determination information is applied. As a result, it is possible to make the situation for starting the use of the next control information constant, thereby facilitating the design of the control information.

The "predetermined timing from one switching timing to the next switching timing of the type of the individual image to which the mode determination information is applied" also includes "the timing at which the type of the individual image to which the mode determination information is applied switches."

Feature B7. The mode determination information is
A mode information group (task content) in which mode information for determining the mode of the specific variable display is set in chronological order;
a target information group (display pattern adjustment area) in which a plurality of pieces of target information to which information about the type of the individual image to which the mode information is applied is set are set in association with the mode information;
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B6, wherein the target determination means sets information on the type of the individual image for each of the target information included in the target information group when starting to use the mode determination information.

According to feature B7, since the mode determination information includes the mode information group and the target information group, it is possible to grasp the type of individual image to which the mode information is applied at each update timing simply by referring to the mode determination information. In this case, when starting to use the mode determination information, information about the type of individual image is set for each of the target information included in the target information group of the mode determination information. As a result, there is no need to execute processing for adjusting the type of individual image to be applied during execution of the specific variation display, so it is possible to simplify the processing configuration during execution of the specific variation display.

Feature B8. The specific variable display is configured to be performed in each of a plurality of variable display areas,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the mode determination information is commonly used as information for controlling the specific variable display in each of the plurality of variable display areas.

According to the feature B8, since the mode determination information is commonly used for the specific variable display in each of the plurality of variable display areas, it is possible to reduce the number of mode determination information.

Note that any one configuration of features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10 may be applied to the configuration of any one of the features B1 to B8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means includes a simultaneous display control means (a function of executing arithmetic processing for character loop and arithmetic processing for background loop in display CPU 72, VDP 76) that allows the first type image (loop display character G4) and the second type image (loop display background G5) to be displayed on the display unit at the same time,
The game machine includes information storage means (memory module 74) for storing in advance first mode determination information (character movement table 123) in which first mode information for determining the display mode of the first type image is set in chronological order, and second mode determination information (background table 124) in which second mode information for determining the display mode of the second type image is set in chronological order,
When simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display unit, the simultaneous display control means determines the display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, and determines the display mode of the second type image according to the second mode determination information.

According to feature C1, in a configuration in which a first type image and a second type image are displayed simultaneously, mode determination information for determining the display mode of the first type image and the second type image is not provided as one mode determination information, but first mode determination information for determining the display mode of the first type image and second mode determination information for determining the display mode of the second type image are separately provided. Thus, even in a situation where one of the first type image and the second type image is statically displayed, the other is variably displayed, and then the variably displayed image of the statically displayed side resumes the variable display from the static display state, it is possible to independently perform display control of each type of image using the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control the display effect in which both the first type image and the second type image are displayed at the same time.

Feature C2. The information for determining the first mode is
a first reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of pieces of first reference information for sequentially updating the reference target by the simultaneous display control means is set every time the first type image is updated;
a first mode information group (task content) in which first mode information for determining a display mode of the first type image at each update timing of the first type image is set in association with each of the first reference information;
with
The information for determining the second mode is
a second reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of pieces of second reference information for sequentially updating the reference target by the simultaneous display control means is set every time the update timing of the second type image is reached;
a second mode information group (task content) in which second mode information for determining a display mode of the second type image at each update timing of the second type image is set in association with each of the second reference information;
The gaming machine according to feature C1, characterized by comprising:

According to feature C2, a dedicated first reference information group is set for the first mode determination information, and a dedicated second reference information group is set for the second mode determination information. As a result, it is possible to continue to update the reference information to be referred to by the other of the information for deciding the first mode and the information to be referred to by the second mode while not using one of the information for deciding the second mode or to hold the reference information to be referred to by the other in predetermined reference information.

Feature C3. The information for determining the first mode is information in which the first mode information for displaying the first type image in the first variation mode is set in chronological order,
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the information storage means stores in advance third mode determination information (character dwell table 122) in which information for displaying the first type image in a variation mode different from the first variation mode is set in chronological order.

According to the feature C3, even when the first type image is displayed, different mode determination information is provided corresponding to different contents of the variation mode. Thus, when switching between a situation in which the first type image is displayed in the first variation mode and a situation in which the first type image is displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, it is only necessary to switch the mode determination information to be used between the first mode determination information and the third mode determination information, and it is possible to suitably switch these variation modes.

Feature C4. The simultaneous display control means is
a first simultaneous display control means for controlling display of the display unit so that both the first type image and the second type image are variably displayed (a function of executing the processing of steps S1102 to S1104, steps S1109 to S1113, and steps S1202 to S1206 in the display CPU 72);
a second simultaneous display control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S1105 to S1113 and steps S1207 to S1208 in the display CPU 72) that controls the display unit so that one of the first type image and the second type image is variably displayed and the other is statically displayed;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C4, a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are variably displayed and a situation where one of the first type image and the second type image is variably displayed and the other is statically displayed can be generated. This makes it possible to diversify the display modes even in a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed. In this case, since the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information are separately provided with the configuration of the feature C1, it is sufficient to switch the usage status of the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information when switching the display status, and it is possible to suitably switch the display status.

Feature C5. The first simultaneous display control means controls the display unit so that the first type image is displayed in a first variation mode and the second type image is displayed in a second variation mode,
The second simultaneous display control means performs display control on the display unit so that the first type image is displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, and the second type image is displayed in a still state,
The first mode determination information is information in which the first mode information for causing the first type image to display in the first variation mode is set in chronological order,
The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the information storage means stores in advance third mode determination information (character stationary table 122) in which information for displaying the first type image in the different variation mode is set in chronological order.

According to feature C5, a situation where a first type image is variably displayed in a first variation mode and a second type image is variably displayed in a second variation mode, and a situation where a first type image is variably displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode and a second type image is statically displayed are generated, thereby making it possible to diversify the display mode even in a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed. In this case, the information for determining the first mode and the information for determining the third mode are separately provided for the first type images, and the information for determining the second mode is separately provided for the second type images. Thus, when switching the display status, it is only necessary to switch the usage object between the first mode determination information and the third mode determination information for the first type image, and to switch the status of updating and fixing the usage target information in the second mode determination information for the second type image. Therefore, it is possible to suitably switch these display states.

Feature C6. In the information for determining the first mode, information necessary for causing the first type image to display a series of first variation modes for one round is set in chronological order,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the simultaneous display control means is capable of repeatedly performing the display of the series of the first variation modes by the first type images by repeatedly using the information for determining the first mode.

According to the characteristic C6, by repeatedly using the information for determining the first mode, it is possible to cause the first type image to repeatedly display a series of the first variation modes. When the information for variably displaying the first type image and the information for variably displaying the second type image are integrated and set as one mode determination information, when the series of display of the first variation mode in the first type image is completed for one cycle and the next one cycle is started, the information for causing the first type image to be displayed in the first variation mode needs to be set more than one cycle unless the display content is such that the display of the second type image is also started for one cycle. In this case, information for more than one round is wasted. On the other hand, by providing the configuration of the feature C1 and separately providing the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information, it is not necessary to set such useless information.

Feature C7. In the information for determining the second mode, information necessary for causing the second type image to display a series of second variation modes for one round is set in chronological order,
The simultaneous display control means is capable of repeatedly displaying the series of the second variation mode by the second type image by repeatedly using the information for determining the second mode,
The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein the number of update timings of the first type image required for causing the first type image to be displayed in the first variation mode for one cycle is different from the number of update timings for the second type image required to cause the second type image to be displayed in the second variation mode for one cycle.

According to the characteristic C7, the information for determining the first mode and the information for determining the second mode are separately provided, so that only information corresponding to one round of each of the first variation mode and the second variation mode can be set in each mode determination information, and there is no need to set useless information.

Feature C8. The simultaneous display control means is
means for setting the start information in the start information storage means (interlocking flag 125) when starting to display the first type image according to the first mode determination information, and deleting the start information from the start information storage means when ending the display of the first type image according to the first mode determination information (function of executing the processes of steps S1103 and S1107 in the display CPU 72);
means for displaying the second type image in accordance with the second mode determination information when the start information is set in the start information storage means (function for making an affirmative determination in step S1201 in the display CPU 72);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature C8, the start information is set when the display of the first type image according to the first mode determination information is started, and the start information is deleted when the display is ended, and when the start information is set, the second type image is displayed according to the second mode determination information. Therefore, as long as the information on the use start timing of the first mode determination information is prepared in advance, the second mode determination information can be used in accordance with the use of the first mode determination information. As a result, it is possible to reduce the information amount of the usage start timing information in a configuration in which the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information are separately provided.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied to the configuration of any one of the features C1 to C8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and for displaying an image on the display section by outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means;
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means is
a first setting range control means (function for executing the processing of steps S1307 to S1309 in the display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying the first setting range image by setting the range set in the setting storage means in the specific image data (decoded image data 132) to the first setting range;
a second setting range control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1311 to S1313 in the display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying a second setting range image by setting the range set in the setting storage means in the specific image data to a second setting range different from the first setting range;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic D1, it is possible to display the first set range image and the second set range image by changing the range set in the setting storage means between the first set range and the second set range while using the same specific image data. This makes it possible to change the content of the displayed image even when there are few types of image data.

Feature D2. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the first set range and the second set range partially overlap.

According to the feature D2, since the first set range and the second set range partially overlap, it is possible to generate a slight image change between the first set range image and the second set range image while using the same specific image data.

Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the second set range image is displayed at an update timing of an image subsequent to the display of the first set range image.

According to feature D3, the second setting range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image after the first setting range image is displayed, so that the first setting range image and the second setting range image can be used as a series of images.

Feature D4. Both the first set range image and the second set range image include a predetermined individual image (group display character G11) as a display target, and when the predetermined individual image is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction, the first set range image and the second set range image are displayed,
The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the first set range and the second set range are set such that the display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second set range image corresponds to the display position of the predetermined individual image moved in the predetermined direction with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first set range image.

According to feature D4, it is possible to display an image in which a predetermined individual image moves in a predetermined direction, using a small number of image data.

Feature D5. The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the first set range image and the second set range image are images for displaying a large number of the predetermined individual images during an effect period in which a large number of the predetermined individual images are displayed.

According to the feature D5, since the first setting range image and the second setting range image using the same specific image data are displayed in a situation where a large number of predetermined individual images are displayed, the use of the same specific image data becomes inconspicuous.

Feature D6. the data size of the specific image data is set in the setting storage means to be larger than the data size of the area to be displayed on the display unit;
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the first set range and the second set range correspond to a range that fills the entire area to be displayed on the display unit in the setting storage means.

According to feature D6, it is possible to make it inconspicuous that the first set range image and the second set range image are displayed using the same specific image data.

Feature D7. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, wherein the specific image data is image data created by executing a decoding process on moving image data stored in the display storage means.

Even if the number of image data created by decoding moving image data is small with respect to the image update timing, the configuration of feature D1 is provided and different images such as the first set range image and the second set range image can be displayed using the same specific image data, so that the same image can be prevented from being displayed between a plurality of update timings.

Feature D8. the plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is image data for displaying a predetermined individual image, including the specific image data, so as to move in a predetermined direction;
The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the first set range control means and the second set range control means apply the first set range and the second set range to each of the plurality of image data.

According to feature D8, while using the same processing configuration, it is possible to cope with a situation in which the number of pieces of image data created by executing decoding processing on moving image data is small with respect to the image update timing.

Feature D9. the plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data is image data for displaying a predetermined individual image, including the specific image data, so as to move in a predetermined direction;
displaying the second setting range image at an update timing of an image subsequent to the display of the first setting range image;
The first set range and the second set range are set so that the second display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second set range image corresponds to the display position where the predetermined individual image is moved in the predetermined direction with respect to the first display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first set range image,
The gaming machine according to feature D7 or D8, wherein in the image displayed next to the second set range image using the next use image data to be used next to the specific image data among the plurality of image data, the display position of the predetermined individual image is shifted in the predetermined direction from the display position of the predetermined individual image in the second set range image by the same or substantially the same amount of movement from the first display position to the second display position.

According to feature D9, even when the first set range image and the second set range image are displayed from the same specific image data, it is possible to keep the amount of movement of a predetermined individual image in a predetermined direction constant between a plurality of update timings.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied to the configuration of any one of the features D1 to D9. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Feature E1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means is
A first determining means (steps S1606 and S1615 in the display CPU 72) for determining the first display content (size position information of the band image G24 and position information of the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image (the size position information of the band image G24 and the position information of the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image (effective period image G22) at each update timing when the predetermined individual image (effective period image G22) is changed and displayed in a predetermined manner, using the first predetermined state determination information (band display table 145) in which the first predetermined state information for determining the first display content is set in chronological order. and a function to execute the process of step S1616);
a second determining means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1608 and S1613 in the display CPU 72) for determining second display contents (type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image is displayed in the predetermined mode without using the information for determining the first predetermined mode;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E1, when the predetermined individual image is changed and displayed in a predetermined mode, the first display content and the second display content of the predetermined individual image can be independently and individually controlled. As a result, when diversifying the display mode of the change display according to the predetermined mode in the predetermined individual image, the first display content and the second display content can be independently and individually controlled, and the diversification is facilitated.

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the second determination means determines the second display content of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image is changed and displayed according to the predetermined mode, using second predetermined mode determination information (blinking display table 146) in which the second predetermined mode information for determining the second display content is set in chronological order.

According to feature E2, the information for determining the first predetermined mode that determines the content of the first display and the information for determining the second predetermined mode that determines the content of the second display are separately provided, so that the first display content and the second display content can be independently and individually controlled while making it possible to execute display control according to each of the predetermined mode information.

Feature E3. The information for determining the first predetermined mode is
a first predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of pieces of first predetermined reference information for sequentially updating the reference target by the first determination means is set each time the first display content of the predetermined individual image is updated;
a first predetermined mode information group (size information and tip position information) in which the first predetermined mode information for determining the first display content at each update timing of the first display content of the predetermined individual image is set corresponding to each of the first predetermined reference information;
with
The information for determining the second predetermined mode is
a second predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of second predetermined reference information for sequentially updating the reference target by the second determination means is set each time the second display content of the predetermined individual image is updated;
a second predetermined mode information group (image data information) in which the second predetermined mode information for determining the second display content at each update timing of the second display content of the predetermined individual image is set corresponding to each of the second predetermined reference information;
The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized by comprising:

According to feature E3, a dedicated first predetermined reference information group is set in the first predetermined mode determination information, and a dedicated second predetermined reference information group is set in the second predetermined mode determination information. This makes it easier to independently control the update cycle of the first display content and the update cycle of the second display content.

Feature E4. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, further comprising means for changing the update cycle of one of the first display content and the second display content independently of the update cycle of the other (the function of executing the processing of steps S1610 and S1612 in the display CPU 72).

According to feature E4, the update cycle of one of the first display content and the second display content is changed independently of the update cycle of the other, so that it is possible to suitably realize diversification of the display mode of the change display according to the predetermined mode in the predetermined individual image.

Feature E5. The display control means creates drawing data by setting image data in the setting storage means (the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b), outputs an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means, and causes the display unit to display an image,
The predetermined individual image is displayed using first predetermined individual image data (band display image data 142) and second predetermined individual image data (lighting image data 143, light-off image data 144),
the first display content corresponds to the display content of an image displayed using the first predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image;
the second display content corresponds to the display content of an image displayed using the second predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein information (tip position information) for setting the second predetermined individual image data in association with the first predetermined individual image data when setting the second predetermined individual image data in the setting storage means is set in the first predetermined mode determining information.

According to feature E5, even in a configuration in which the first display content and the second display content can be independently controlled, it is possible to easily set the second predetermined individual image data in the setting storage means in a manner associated with the first predetermined individual image data.

Feature E6. one of the first display content and the second display content is at least one of the size, shape, and color of the predetermined individual image;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the other of the first display content and the second display content is a type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image.

According to the feature E6, it is possible to independently control at least one of the size, shape and color of the predetermined individual image and the type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image.

Note that any one configuration of features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10 may be applied to the configuration of any one of the features E1 to E6. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
display storage means (memory module 203) storing image data in advance;
setting storage means (VRAM 204) in which the image data is set;
Derivation means (display CPU 201) for deriving parameter information that determines a setting mode when setting the image data in the setting storage means;
display control means (VDP 205) for creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means according to the parameter information derived by the deriving means, and displaying an image on the display unit by outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means;
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means displays a predetermined type of image over the front period based on setting predetermined types of image data (the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, the second background individual image image data 243, and the effect character image data 244) in the setting storage means. 205 for executing setting processing for separate storage display),
The parameter information derived by the derivation means to be applied to the predetermined type of image data in the anterior period is stored in a predetermined storage area of a predetermined storage means (work RAM 202), and the predetermined storage area is held as an area for storing the parameter information of the predetermined type of image data even in the latter period.

According to the feature F1, even in a situation where the display of the predetermined type of image using the predetermined type of image data is interrupted, the predetermined storage area storing the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type of image data is stored as an area for storing the parameter information of the predetermined type of image data, thereby eliminating the need to newly execute the processing for securing the predetermined storage area when resuming the display of the predetermined type of image using the predetermined type of image data. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when restarting the display of the predetermined type of image using the predetermined type of image data.

Feature F2. The gaming machine according to feature F1, wherein the deriving means updates the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type of image data even in the latter period.

According to the feature F2, since the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type of image data is updated even in the latter period, when the latter period ends and the display of the predetermined type of image using the predetermined type of image data is resumed, the display of the predetermined type of image using the predetermined type of image data can be restarted from the state in which the content of the predetermined type of image continues to change for the latter period according to the display pattern determined in chronological order with respect to the display state immediately before the start of the latter period.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the predetermined type control means creates the drawing data in the rear period by using pre-created data (first separately stored image data 245, second separately stored image data 247) created based on setting the predetermined type of image data in the setting storage means in the front period.

According to the feature F3, it is possible to display a predetermined type of image even in the latter period.

Feature F4. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the predetermined type control means creates the drawing data based on setting the pre-created data and additional image data (image data 246 for additional individual images and effect image data 248) in the setting storage means in the latter period.

According to the feature F4, since the additional image data is added as the image data to be used in the latter period, it is possible to make the display content flashy. Further, in the latter period, the predetermined type image data is not used as the image data for displaying the predetermined type image, but the pre-created data is used, so even if the additional image data is added as the image data to be used, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature F5. The latter period occurs when a predetermined start opportunity occurs in the former period,
The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, wherein the predetermined type control means creates the pre-created data before a situation in which the predetermined start opportunity may occur in the preceding period.

According to the feature F5, the pre-created data is created before the situation where the predetermined start opportunity can occur, so compared to the configuration in which the pre-created data is created at the timing when the predetermined start opportunity occurs, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the timing when the predetermined start opportunity occurs.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, wherein the predetermined type control means newly creates the pre-created data in the continued anterior period when the pre-created data is created before the predetermined start opportunity occurs in the anterior period but the pre-created data does not occur by the branch timing.

According to feature F6, pre-created data is newly created as needed, so it is possible to use pre-created data created at a timing closer to the timing at which the pre-created data is actually used.

Feature F7. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F6, wherein the predetermined type control means creates a plurality of types of the pre-created data in the front period so that the content of the image displayed by the pre-created data differs.

According to feature F7, by creating multiple types of pre-created data, it is possible to diversify situations in which images are displayed using pre-created data.

Feature F8. At least first pre-created data (second separate stored image data 247) and second pre-created data (first separate stored image data 245) are created as the pre-created data,
The trailing period includes a first trailing period and a second trailing period that can occur later than the first trailing period,
The predetermined type control means is
a first pre-creation means for creating the drawing data using the first pre-created data in the first rear period (a function of executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3912 in the VDP 205);
a second pre-creation means for creating the drawing data using the second pre-created data in the second rear period (a function of executing the processing of steps S3906 to S3909 in the VDP 205);
The gaming machine according to feature F7, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F8, it is possible to use pre-created data suitable for each subsequent period.

Feature F9. The first rear period occurs when a predetermined start opportunity occurs in the front period,
The first pre-created data and the second pre-created data are created before the situation in which the predetermined start opportunity may occur in the anterior period,
The gaming machine according to feature F8, wherein the second pre-creation means newly creates the second pre-created data in the continued anterior period when the predetermined start opportunity does not occur in the anterior period.

According to the feature F9, when the first rear period does not occur, the second pre-created data is newly created before the second rear period occurs, so it is possible to use the second pre-created data created at a timing closer to the timing at which the second pre-created data is actually used.

Feature F10. The display control means is
arranging means for arranging object data, which is three-dimensional information as the image data, in the virtual three-dimensional space in the setting storage means (function for executing the processing of steps S2602 to S2604 in the VDP 205);
viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S2605 and S2606 in the VDP 205);
Rendering setting means for projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and creating rendering data based on the data projected onto the projection plane (a function of executing the processing of steps S2607 to S2612 in the VDP 205);
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature F10, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in the configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied to the configuration of any one of the features F1 to F10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the above feature group A to feature group F can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. A first control means (main side MPU 52) and a second control means (sound and light side MPU 62, display CPU 72, VDP 76),
The first control means is
Grant determination means (function for executing special figure special electric control processing in the main side MPU 52) for determining whether or not to grant a privilege to the player;
Information transmission means (function for executing special figure special electric control processing in main side MPU 52) for transmitting predetermined correspondence information (variation command and type command) corresponding to the result of grant determination;
with
The second control means is
Content determination means for determining the content of the unit performance (performance for the game round) corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information (function for executing the processing of steps S404 and steps S406 to S408 in the sound and light side MPU 62);
Effect execution control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) that controls the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the unit effect corresponding to the effect content determined by the content determination means is executed;
with
The game machine is characterized in that the performance contents that can be determined by the content determination means based on the same type of predetermined correspondence information include at least a first performance content whose duration of performance corresponds to a first duration and a second performance content whose duration of performance corresponds to a second duration.

According to the feature G1, it is possible to diversify the performance contents and increase the degree of freedom of the processing configuration for determining the performance contents by selecting performance contents with different performance durations from the same type of predetermined correspondence information.

Feature G2. The game machine according to feature G1, wherein the performance execution control means terminates the unit performance when the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information elapses regardless of which performance content is determined by the content determination means.

According to the feature G2, since the unit performance ends when the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information elapses regardless of which performance content is determined, even if there is a configuration in which performance contents with different performance durations can be selected from the predetermined correspondence information of the same type, the duration of the unit performance can be set to the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information.

Feature G3. The first control means comprises a duration determination means for determining the duration of the unit production (a function of executing a special figure special electric control process in the main side MPU 52),
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the predetermined correspondence information includes information that enables the second control means to specify the duration determined by the duration determination means.

According to the feature G3, by determining the duration of the unit performance in the first control means, even in a configuration in which the execution control of the unit performance is performed in the second control means, the first control means can grasp the duration of the unit performance without transmitting information from the second control means to the first control means. In this case, by providing the structure of the characteristic G2, even if the contents of performance with different duration of performance can be selected from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, the duration of the unit performance can be set to the duration determined by the first control means.

Feature G4. The game machine according to feature G2 or G3, wherein the performance content determined by the content determination means is performance content whose duration corresponding to the performance content is equal to or less than the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information that triggered the determination of the performance content.

According to the feature G4, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that the unit performance is terminated due to the lapse of the duration of the unit performance during the execution of the performance content determined by the content determination means.

Feature G5. The effect execution control means causes the effect execution means to perform, as the unit effect, an effect in which the pattern is kept in a predetermined area and displayed in a standby state after the pattern is variably displayed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G4, further comprising means for extending the execution period of the standby display accordingly (a function of executing the process of step S504 in the sound and light side MPU 62) when the duration of the effect content determined by the content determination means is shorter than the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information.

According to feature G5, by extending the execution period of the standby display, the difference between the continuation period of the effect content determined by the content determination means and the continuation period corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information is compensated. As a result, there is no need to largely modify the effect content of the unit effect in order to compensate for the difference, and it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for compensating for the difference.

Feature G6. The content determining means is
means for determining the content of the first effect range in the unit effect by executing the first lottery process (function for executing the process of step S404 in the sound and light side MPU 62);
means for determining the contents of the second effect range in the unit effect by executing the second lottery process (function for executing the process of step S406 in the sound and light side MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G6, by executing the first lottery process and the second lottery process and determining the performance contents of the unit performance, it is possible to irregularly determine the performance contents of the unit performance. In this case, since the configuration of the feature G1 is provided and performance contents with different durations of performance can be selected from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, the degree of freedom in designing the first lottery process and the second lottery process is enhanced.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied to the configuration of any one of the features G1 to G6. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the characteristic group G can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory.

Here, in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing effects such as display effects, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
display control means for controlling the display means so that measurement result information (number display image G31) corresponding to the number of objects to be measured (the number of acquired game balls) is displayed on the display unit (function of executing calculation processing for measurement display in display CPU 72, function of executing calculation processing for increase display in display CPU 72);
with
The display control means includes change value change means for changing the change value of the value displayed in the measurement result information when the measurement result information is updated (steps S2003, S2007, S2010 and S2012 in the display CPU 72. A function of executing the processing, and a function of executing the processing of steps S2102 to S2104 in the display CPU 72).

According to the feature H1, by displaying the measurement result information corresponding to the number of objects to be measured on the display section, it is possible for the player to recognize the number of objects to be measured. In this case, the change value of the value currently displayed in the measurement result information is changed when the measurement result information is updated. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes.

Feature H2. The display control means starts display of the measurement result information when a measurement start trigger occurs, and terminates display of the measurement result information in the measurement cycle when a measurement end trigger occurs,
The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value within the range of one measurement.

According to feature H2, since the change value of the measurement result information can be changed within the range of one measurement, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes even within the range of one measurement.

Feature H3. The display control means starts display of the measurement result information when a measurement start trigger occurs, and terminates display of the measurement result information in the measurement cycle when a measurement end trigger occurs,
The game machine according to feature H1 or H2, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value between one measurement time and another measurement time.

According to the feature H3, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes in each measurement.

Feature H4. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the change value changing means sets a value corresponding to a result of dividing a value finally displayed as the measurement result information by a predetermined value as the change value.

According to the characteristic H4, it is possible to make the change value of the value corresponding to the measurement result information irregular according to the value finally displayed as the measurement result information.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the change value changing means changes the change value according to a value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information.

According to feature H5, by changing the change value according to the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information, it is possible to change the change value of the measurement result information while relating it to the value to be reflected.

Feature H6. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the variation value changing means increases the value of the variation value as the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information increases.

According to the feature H6, the larger the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information, the larger the value of the change value. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes while shortening the period required to complete the reflection of the value to be reflected in the measurement result information.

Feature H7. The display control means is
When the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to an increase in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is divided into a plurality of update timings and reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information.
When the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to a decrease in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information at one update timing (a function of executing the processing of steps S2003 and S2004 in the display CPU 72);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein when the value to be reflected by the first reflection means is reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information at a plurality of update timings, the change value change means can change the change value at each update timing.

According to the feature H7, when the value to be measured increases, the value to be reflected is reflected at a plurality of update timings, thereby making it possible to emphasize that the value to be measured is increasing. In this case, when the value of the object to be measured increases, the change value at each update timing can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes in a situation where the value of the object to be measured increases.

Feature H8. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein the object to be measured is a difference between an increase in the number of game media usable by the player and a decrease in the number of game media usable by the player.

According to feature H8, when the difference between the increase and decrease in the number of game media available to the player is displayed as the measurement result information, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied to the configuration of any one of the features H1 to H8. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the characteristic group H can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. Production execution means (symbol display device 41) for executing production,
Production control means (sound and light side MPU 62, display CPU 201, VDP 205) that controls the production execution means,
In a game machine equipped with
The performance control means includes a time response control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3010 and S3011 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that causes the performance execution means to start the special performance (special period performance) when the start condition is satisfied at a predetermined start corresponding time.

According to the feature I1, the special effect is started when the predetermined start corresponding time comes, so that it is possible to perform the effect triggered by the predetermined time. Further, for example, it is possible to simultaneously start the same effect in a plurality of game machines installed in a game hall. In addition, by starting the special performance when the start condition is established at the corresponding start time, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being started in an unfavorable situation when the special performance is started from the viewpoint of facilitating the understanding of the processing load and the contents of the game.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the time corresponding control means starts the special effect after a preparation period has elapsed when the start corresponding time has come.

According to the feature I2, when the start corresponding time comes, the special effect is started after the preparation period has passed, so the start time of the special effect can be set to the predetermined time. In addition, it becomes possible to distribute and execute the processing necessary for executing the special effect during the preparation period, thereby distributing the processing load.

Feature I3. The effect control means has an arbitrary response control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3208 to S3213 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that executes the optional response effect (effect for game round) by the effect execution means when an arbitrary trigger occurs at an arbitrary timing.
The gaming machine according to feature I2, wherein the preparation period is set as a period longer than or equal to the longest execution period of the execution period of the arbitrary correspondence effect.

According to the feature I3, since the preparation period is set as a period longer than the longest execution period of the arbitrary correspondence performance, even if the start correspondence time comes in the situation where the arbitrary correspondence performance is being executed, the arbitrary correspondence performance during execution is finished before the timing for starting the special performance. As a result, it is possible to limit the execution situation of the optional corresponding performance when the special performance is started to a prescribed situation, and to prevent the occurrence of the event that the processing load at the timing when the special performance is started becomes extremely high.

Feature I4. The effect control means has an arbitrary response control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3208 to S3213 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that executes the optional response effect (effect for game round) by the effect execution means when an arbitrary trigger occurs at an arbitrary timing.
The gaming machine according to feature I3, characterized in that, when the arbitrary correspondence control means starts the arbitrary correspondence performance before the start condition is established after the start correspondence time has come, the performance content of the arbitrary correspondence performance is limited to a predetermined performance content.

According to the feature I4, it is possible to limit the effect content of the arbitrary corresponding effect when the special effect is started to the predetermined effect content. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that the processing load at the timing of starting the special performance becomes extremely high while making it possible to start the optional corresponding performance after the start corresponding time and before starting the special performance.

Feature I5. The game machine according to any one of the characteristics I1 to I4, wherein the production control means includes a preparation control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2806, S2807, steps S3006 and S3007 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that causes the production execution means to execute the preparation corresponding production (production of the preparation period) until the start condition is satisfied when the start corresponding time has come.

According to the feature I5, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special effect will be executed from now on by executing the preparation corresponding effect.

Feature I6. The game machine according to feature I5, characterized in that, if a restriction condition is established when the start response time comes, the preparation response control means does not start the preparation response performance until the restriction condition is released.

According to the feature I6, when the limiting condition is satisfied, the performance corresponding to preparation is not started even if the start corresponding time comes, so that the performance corresponding to preparation can be prevented from being started in a situation which is not preferable from the viewpoint of the processing load or the like.

Feature I7. The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein the preparation control means executes notification (display of remaining time notification image G63) corresponding to the restriction condition when the restriction condition is satisfied.

According to feature I7, it is possible for the player to recognize that the preparation corresponding effect and the special effect will be executed from now on even in a situation where the restriction condition is satisfied.

Feature I8. The effect control means has an arbitrary response control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3208 to S3213 in the sound and light side MPU 62) that executes the optional response effect (effect for game round) by the effect execution means when an arbitrary trigger occurs at an arbitrary timing.
The game machine according to feature I6 or I7, characterized in that the preparation control means does not start the preparation correspondence performance until the arbitrary correspondence performance is completed when the start correspondence time comes in a situation where the arbitrary correspondence performance is being executed.

According to the feature I8, it is possible to prevent the start of the preparation correspondence performance during execution of the optional correspondence performance. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the processing load at the timing when the preparation corresponding performance is started becomes extremely high.

Feature I9. The effect execution means is display means having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a),
The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I8, wherein when the preparation corresponding effect and another effect (game cycle effect) are executed at the same time, the preparation corresponding effect is executed in a partial area of the display unit, and the other effect is executed in another area (divided display area G66) of the display unit.

According to the feature I9, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize each of the preparation corresponding effect and the other effect.

Feature I10. The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I9, wherein the preparation control means causes the effect execution means to notify remaining time information (remaining time notification image G63) corresponding to the remaining time until the special effect is started as the preparation response effect.

According to feature I10, the player can recognize that the start of the special effect is approaching by checking the remaining time information.

Feature I11. The preparation corresponding control means,
means for starting display of the remaining time information from a predetermined initial value information regardless of the timing at which the preparation corresponding effect is started and continuing updating the remaining time information until the remaining time information reaches a predetermined end value information (a function of executing the processing of step S3404 in the display CPU 201);
means for changing the update value of the remaining time information once according to the timing at which the preparation corresponding effect is started (function for executing the processing of steps S3402 and S3403 in the display CPU 201);
The gaming machine according to feature I10, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature I11, it is possible to diversify the update mode of the remaining time information in relation to the timing at which the preparation corresponding production is started.

Feature I12. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I11, further comprising: means (a function of executing the process of step S2801 in the sound and light side MPU 62) for starting a predetermined effect in effect execution means (display light emitting unit 44, speaker unit 45) different from the effect execution means when a predetermined time that is the start corresponding time or later and before the start condition is satisfied has come.

According to the feature I12, it is possible to reliably start the predetermined effect when the corresponding start time has come. As a result, regardless of the performance execution status of the performance executing means in the plurality of gaming machines installed in, for example, the game hall, it is possible to simultaneously start the predetermined performance in the plurality of gaming machines.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied to the configuration of any one of the features I1 to I12. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each invention of the characteristic group I can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery. In addition, it is common that an effect is performed to make the player predict or recognize the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, a pachinko machine is known to have a configuration in which a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a ball-entering section provided in a game area, and variable display of patterns is performed on the display surface of a display device, and when a winning result is obtained in the lottery, a combination of specific patterns, etc. is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface to shift to a special game state advantageous to the player. When the game shifts to the special game state, for example, opening and closing of a ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the entry into the ball entry device.

Here, it is necessary to provide novel game contents in the gaming machines such as those exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
display storage means (memory module 74) storing image data in advance;
display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and for displaying an image on the display section by outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means;
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means is
First frame control means for displaying first frame images (first character image G41, first pseudo moving image G52) containing specific individual images (first pseudo moving image character G42, second pseudo moving image character G43, pseudo moving image character G51) using the first still image data (first character image data 171) stored in advance in the display storage means (the processing of steps S2204 to S2207 in the display CPU 72 is performed. functions to perform) and
a second frame control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2217 to S2220 in the display CPU 72) for displaying a second frame image (second character image G48, second pseudo moving image G53) containing the specific individual image using the second still image data (second character image data 173) stored in advance in the display storage means;
midway control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2211 to S2214 in the display CPU 72) for displaying an intermediate image (effect image G45, pseudo moving image effect image G54) that does not include the specific individual image by using the intermediate image data (effect image data 172) pre-stored in the display storage means at the image update timing after the first frame image is displayed but before the second frame image is displayed;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the feature J1, an intermediate image not including the specific individual image is displayed between the update timing when the first frame image including the specific individual image is displayed and the update timing when the second frame image including the specific individual image is displayed. Thus, even in a situation where there is not enough image data for the player to recognize that the moving picture display of the specific individual image is being performed, the player can be made to recognize that the moving picture display of the specific individual image is being performed by interposing the intermediate image.

Feature J2. The gaming machine according to feature J1, wherein the first frame control means displays the first frame image in different display modes at a plurality of update timings by changing the setting mode of the first still image data in the setting storage means.

According to the feature J2, by using the first still image data, it is possible to create a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

Feature J3. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, wherein the second frame control means displays the second frame image in different display modes at a plurality of update timings by changing the setting mode of the second still image data in the setting storage means.

According to feature J3, by using the second still image data, it is possible to create a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

Feature J4. a configuration in which the intermediate image is displayed next to the first frame image, and the second frame image is displayed next to the intermediate image in the specific effect period;
The first still image data is used in a first period different from the specific effect period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the second still image data is used in a second period different from the specific effect period and the first period.

According to feature J4, the effect of displaying a specific individual image in the specific effect period is executed using the first still image data used in the first period and the second still image data used in the second period. As a result, the still image data can be shared in a plurality of situations, and the required storage capacity of the display storage means can be reduced. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature J1, even with the configuration using the first still image data and the second still image data, it is possible for the player to recognize that the moving image display of the specific individual image is being performed during the specific performance period.

Feature J5. The first still image data and the second still image data are set so that the predetermined portion of the specific individual image displayed in the second frame image is displayed at a position ahead of a predetermined motion path with respect to the predetermined portion (predetermined portion G51a) of the specific individual image displayed in the first frame image,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4, wherein the intermediate image data is set such that the intermediate individual image (individual image G54a) displayed in the intermediate image is displaced along the predetermined motion path.

According to the feature J5, the intermediate image is displayed such that the intermediate individual image is displaced according to the motion path of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the first still image data and the second still image data, so that even if the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the first still image data and the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the second still image data are separated, it is possible to give the player the impression that the predetermined part is displaced along the predetermined motion path.

Feature J6. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the first frame image and the second frame image are actually shot images, and the intermediate image is a non-actually shot image.

According to the feature J6, it is possible to give the player an impression that a specific individual image is being displayed as a moving image by using non-actually photographed images even in a situation where there are few types of photographed images.

Note that any one configuration of features A1 to A10, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E6, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G6, features H1 to H8, features I1 to I12, features J1 to J6, and features K1 to K10 may be applied to the configuration of any one of features J1 to J6. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
display storage means (memory module 203) storing image data in advance;
display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
with
The display storage means is
first moving image data (first moving image data group 261 of A angle) that enables a series of specific moving images to be displayed by using image data created by executing the decoding process;
Second moving image data (second moving image data group 262 of A angle) that enables display of a specific intermediate moving image that starts at a timing in the middle of the specific moving image by using image data created by executing the decoding process;
is stored in advance.

According to the feature K1, since the second moving image data is provided in addition to the first moving image data, it is possible to select either the first moving image data or the second moving image data as the object to be used according to the timing of occurrence of the display start trigger. Thus, only by switching the moving image data to be used, the display of the specific moving image can be started from the beginning of the specific moving image, and the display of the specific moving image can be started from the middle of the specific moving image.

Feature K2. The first moving image data includes a plurality of first unit moving image data (moving image data 271a) each having a different display period corresponding to the specific moving image,
The second moving image data has a plurality of second unit moving image data (moving image data 271b) corresponding to the specified intermediate moving image, each having a different display period,
The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein each of the second unit moving image data is set as data for displaying a moving image that is started at a timing in the middle of a moving image displayed by using the first unit moving image data in the corresponding order in the plurality of first moving image data.

According to the feature K2, it is possible to set many timings that allow the specific moving image to be started from the middle, and it becomes easy to start the specific moving image from the display content corresponding to the generation timing of the display start trigger.

Feature K3. The gaming machine according to feature K2, wherein, in the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in corresponding orders, the amount of difference in image update timing between the start timing of the moving image displayed by using the first unit moving image data and the start timing of the moving image displayed by using the second unit moving image data is the same or substantially the same for each combination of the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in corresponding orders.

According to feature K3, it is possible to facilitate the design of the timing at which the display of the moving image based on the first unit moving image data can be started and the timing at which the display of the moving image based on the second unit moving image data can be started.

Feature K4. The gaming machine according to feature K2 or K3, characterized in that the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are data such that the number of pieces of image data created by executing the decoding process is the minimum number that can be set as moving image data.

According to the characteristic K4, it is possible to set many timings at which switching to display of moving images based on the first moving image data and timings at which switching to display of moving images based on the second moving image data are possible. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of moving image data read out at one time.

Feature K5. The display control means includes target switching means (a function of executing the processes of steps S4105 to S4117 in the display CPU 201) for starting display of the specific moving image using the first moving image data when a predetermined operation is performed by the player at a timing before the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image, and for starting display of the specific intermediate moving image using the second moving image data when the predetermined operation is performed at a timing after the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image. The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, characterized in that

According to the characteristic K5, even if the predetermined operation by the player occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to start the display of the specific moving image from the situation corresponding to the occurrence timing of the predetermined operation.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to feature K5, wherein, even when the predetermined operation is performed at a timing after the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image and before the timing corresponding to the start of the specific intermediate moving image, the target switching means does not start the display of the specific intermediate moving image using the second moving image data when the predetermined operation is performed after the timing before the period required to start using the second moving image data with respect to the timing corresponding to the start.

According to the feature K6, it is possible to start the display of the specific moving image from the situation corresponding to the occurrence timing of the predetermined operation within the range where the use of the second moving image data can be smoothly started.

Feature K7. The display control means includes target switching means (a function of executing the processing of steps S4105 to S4117 in the display CPU 201) for switching to a situation in which another video is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by the player in a situation where one of a plurality of types of videos is displayed,
The combination of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying the first moving image among the plurality of types of moving images,
The display storage means is
Third moving image data (first moving image data group 264 of B angle) that enables a series of predetermined moving images to be displayed by using the image data created by executing the decoding process;
Fourth moving image data (second moving image data group 265 of B angle) that makes it possible to display a predetermined intermediate moving image that starts at a timing in the middle of the predetermined moving image by using the image data created by executing the decoding process;
is stored in advance,
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, wherein the combination of the third moving image data and the fourth moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying a second moving image among the plurality of types of moving images.

According to the feature K7, it is possible to set many timings at which switching of the moving image to be displayed can be performed between the first moving image and the second moving image.

Feature K8. the first moving image data and the third moving image data match in timing at which the start image can be displayed in a predetermined effect period;
The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the second moving image data and the fourth moving image data have the same timing at which the start image can be displayed in the predetermined effect period.

According to the characteristic K8, when switching from one of the first moving image and the second moving image to the other, it is possible to start displaying the switching destination moving image from the display content corresponding to the switching source display content.

Feature K9. The gaming machine according to feature K7 or K8, wherein the first moving image and the second moving image are moving images with different angles for displaying the special individual image.

According to the feature K9, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described in the configuration in which the display target is switched between a plurality of moving images with different angles for displaying the special individual image.

Feature K10. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display portion (liquid crystal display portion 41a);
display storage means (memory module 203) storing image data in advance;
display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using the image data stored in the display storage means;
with
The display storage means stores in advance predetermined moving image data (various moving image data groups 261 to 269) that enables a series of special moving images to be displayed by using the image data created by executing the decoding process,
The predetermined moving image data has a plurality of special unit moving image data (moving image data 271a to 273c) with different display periods corresponding to the special moving images,
The gaming machine, wherein the special unit moving image data is data that allows the number of pieces of image data created by executing the decoding process to be the minimum number that can be set as moving image data.

According to the feature K10, it is possible to set many timings at which switching to display of moving images based on predetermined moving image data is possible. In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of moving image data read out at one time.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, the features G1 to G6, the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied to the configuration of any one of the features K1 to K10. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

Each of the inventions of the characteristic group J and the characteristic group K can solve the following problems.

Pachinko game machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of game machines. As these game machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The game machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory.

Here, in the game machines such as those exemplified above, there is a demand for a configuration capable of appropriately performing display control, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature is applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine comprising an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and each game part arranged in the game area, and giving a privilege to the player when the game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of each game part.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: A game machine which includes a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and a privilege is given to a player according to the pattern after the stop.

10 Pachinko machine 41 Symbol display device 41a Liquid crystal display unit 44 Display light emitting unit 45 Speaker unit 52 Main side MPU 62 Sound and light side MPU 72 Display CPU 74 Memory module 76 VDP 82a First frame area 82b Second frame area 122 Character stopping table 123 Character moving table 124 Background table 125 Interlocking flag 132 Decode image data 142 Band display image data 143 Lighting image data 144 Turning off image data 145 Band display table 146 Flashing display table 171 First character image data 172 Effect image data 173 Second character image data 201 Display CPU 202 Work RAM 203 Memory module 204 VRAM 205 VDP 211 VRAM 211a Area for texture 211b Area for moving image data 241 Rearmost image data 242 First background individual image data 243 Second background individual image image data 244 Directed character image data 245 First separate image data 246 Additional individual image data 247 Second separate image data 248 Effect image data 261 to 26 9 Moving image data group 271a to 273c Moving image data 282 Special moving image data 284 Still image data G4 Loop display character G5 Loop display background G11 Group display character G22 Effective period image G24 Band image G25 Flashing image G31 Number display image G41 First character image G42 First pseudo-moving character G43 Second pseudo-moving image character, G45... effect image, G48... second character image, G51... pseudo-moving character, G51a... predetermined part, G52... first pseudo-moving image, G53... second pseudo-moving image, G54... pseudo-moving effect image, G54a... individual image, G63... remaining time notification image, G66... division display area, T10... execution target table for acceleration period, T11... execution target for first high speed period Tables, T12 . . . Execution object table for the first low speed period.

Claims (1)

a display means having a display;
display control means for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a game machine equipped with
The display control means includes simultaneous display control means for simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display unit,
The gaming machine comprises information storage means for pre-storing first mode determination information in which first mode information for determining the display mode of the first type image is set in chronological order, and second mode determination information in which second mode information for determining the display mode of the second type image is set in chronological order,
When simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display unit, the simultaneous display control means determines the display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, and determines the display mode of the second type image according to the second mode determination information.

Images